610E03760_Ventura_Publisher_1.1_Reference_1987 610E03760 Ventura Publisher 1.1 Reference 1987

User Manual: 610E03760_Ventura_Publisher_1.1_Reference_1987
Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 520
Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF
XEROX VENTURA PUBLISHER EDITION
REFERENCE GUIDE

610E03760
REFERENCE GUIDE

This manual, including the table of contents and index, was produced
and printed using Xerox Ventura Publisher.
Xero,,®, 6060 Family, Xerox Personal Computer, Xerox PC, SereenMate, Writer III Full Page, Interpress, 4020 Laser
Prio ter, and 4045 Laser CP are trademarks of Xerox Corporation.
AST TurboLaser™ is a trademark of AST Research.
AutoCADTM is a trademark of Autodesk, Inc.
Dataproducts® is -a registered trademark of Da'taproducts Corp.
dBase™ is a trademark of Ashton~Tate.
Digital Research®is a registered trademark of Digital Research, Inc.
Displaywrite® is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corp.
Epson® is a registered trademark of Epson America, Inc.
Freelance™, Lltus rrM, ·and 1__ 2~3TM are trademarks of Lotus Development Corp.
GEMTM, GEM Draw™, GEM Graph T~, GEM DesktopTM and GEM Paint"M are trademarks of Digital Research, Inc.
Genius ™ is a trad-ematk of Micro Dis_play Syste~s Inc.
Hercules™ Graphics Card is a trademark 6"fHercules Computer Technology.
HP LaserJet™ and LaserJet™Plus are trademarks of Hewlett"Packard Corp.
IBM" and Proprinter®are registered trademarks ofInternational Business Machines Corp.
JLaser™ is a trademark of Tall Tree Systems, Inc.
LaserwriterTM is -a trademark of Apple Computer.
Linotype ™ and Linotrtmic™ are trademarks of Allied Corp.
Logi-Mouse™is ,a trademark,dfLogitech Inc.
Mentor Graphics® is a registered trademark of Mentor Graphics Corp.
MicrosOft® and Microsoft.® Word aTe registered trademarks of Microsoft Corp. MSTM is a trademark of Microsoft Corp.
-M ulti-mate® Professional Word Processor is a registered trademark -of Multimate Intermitional Corp.
peTM Mouse is a tradema'rk of Mouse Systems, Inc.
PC Paintbrush™is a trademark orz"Soft Corp.
PostScript"M and Sonata are trademarks of Adobe Systems Inc.
QMS® is a.registered trademark ofQMS, Inc.
Summa™ Mouse is a trademark of Summagraphics, Inc.
Video ShOW™ is a trade-mark of-General Pa-Tametries, Inc.
Ventura ,Pu-blisher™is:a trademark cifVenrura Software, -Inc.
WordPerfect is a copyright of SSISoftware.
Wordstar® is a registered trademark of MicroPro International Corp.
Glypha®, Helvetica®, Melior@, Optima®, Palatino®, Times®, and 'Prump® are registered trademarks of Allied ,Corporation.
ITC American Typewriter™, fTC Avant Garde Gotbic™, ITC BenguiatTM, ITC BookmanTM, ITC Galliard™, ITC
Garam-ond™, -ITC Korinna™. -ITC 'Lubalin GraphTM, ITC Machine™, ITC New BaskervilleT~, ITC Souvenir™, Ire
ZapfChanceryTM, andlTC ZapfDingbats™aretegistered trademarks ofInternational Typeface Corporation

This manual was written by John Meyer, Ventura Software, Inc.
Copyrigh.t © Xerox Corp. 1986, 1987. All rights reserved.
Copyright© Ventura Software, Inc. 1986,1987. All rights reserved.

Inform·ation in this manual is subject to change without notice and does
not represent a commitment on the part of the vendor. The software
described .in this manual is furnish.edunder a license agreement and
maybe used or copied only in accordance with the terms ·of the agreeinent.

ii

REF8R8NCEGlJfDE

TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION

1-1

How to use this documentation
Contents of package
Features . . . . . . . . . .
Typographical conventions

1-1
1-2

SETUP AND INSTALLATION

2-1

System requirements
Software installation
Starting the program
Quitting . . . . . . .

1-3

1-4

2-1
2-2
2-7
2-8

USER INTERFACE

3-1

Mouse . . . . .
Keyboard keys
Dialogbox . . .
Item selector .
Main screen controls
Side-bar . . .

3-1
· 3-1
· 3-7

FUNCTIONS
Frame setting function
Paragraph tagging function
Text editing function . . .
Graphic drawing function

MENU COMMANDS

.3-10
.3-14
.3-17

4-1
· 4-2

.4-12
.4-15
.4-27

5-1

DESK MENU

5-5

FILE MENU
New . . . . .
Open chapter
Save . . . .

5-6
5-7

REFERENCE GUIDE

5-8

.5-10

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Save as
Abandon
Load text/picture
Load different style
Save as new style
To print . . . . . .
DOS file operations
Quit . . . . .

.5-11
.5-12
.5-13
.5-17
.5-18
.5-19
.5-22
.5-24

EDIT MENU
Cut/copy/paste
Insert footnote
Insert/edit index
Insert/edit anchor
Remove text/file .
File type/rename

.5-25
.5-26
.5-31
.5-32
.5-36
.5-38
.5-40

VIEWMENU .

.5-42

PAGE MENU
Page layout . .
Widows & Orphans
Chapter counter
Page counter '"
Auto-numbering
Renumber chapter
Re-anchor frames .
Headers & footers
Turn header/footer off'(on)
Footnote setting
Insert page/remove page
Go to page . . . .

.5-44
.5-45
.5-48
.5-50
.5-52
.5-54
.5-61
.5-62
.5-64
.5-69
.5-70
.5-73
.5-75

FRAME MENU
Margins & columns
Sizing & scaling
Repeating frame
Anchors & caption settings
Table counter/figure counter
Vertical rules . . .
Ruling lines
Frame background

2

.5-77
.5-78
.5-82
.5-88
.5-92
.5-96
.5-98
.5-100
. 5-102

REFERENCE GUIDE

I

TABLE OF CONTENTS

PARAGRAPH MENU
Font . . .
Alignment
Spacing .
Breaks ..
Tab settings
Special effects
Typographic controls
Ruling lines
Removetag . . . . .
Renametag . . . . .
Assign function keys

· 5-104
· 5-106
· 5-108
· 5-111
· 5-117
· 5-120
.5-123
.5-125
· 5-129
· 5-133
· 5-135
· 5-136

GRAPHIC MENU
Send to back
Bring to front .
Line attributes
Fill attributes
Select all
Grid settings

· 5-138
.5-139
· 5-140
· 5-141
· 5-143
· 5-145
· 5-146

OPTIONS MENU
Set preferences
Set ruler . . . . .
Printer info .. .
Add/remove fonts
Showlhide side-bar
Showlhide rulers .
Showlhide column guides
Showlhide pictures . . . .
Showlhide tabs & returns
Turn column snap on/off
Turn line snap on/off
Showlhide loose lines
Multi-chapter . . . .

· 5-147
· 5-148
· 5-152
· 5-154
· 5-160
· 5-163
· 5-164
· 5-165
· 5-166
· 5-167
· 5-168
· 5-169
· 5-170
.5-171

HINTS, TIPS, & TECHNIQUES
Frames and pictures
Text editing
Style sheet . . . . .

REFERENCE GUIDE

6·1
. 6-1
. 6-8
.6-12

3

TABLE OF CONTENTS

APPENDIX A

INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
Software installation
Post-installation

A·l
· . A-4
.. A-13

APPENDIXB
HYPHENATION DICTIONARY

B·l

APPENDIXC
COMMON PROBLEMS

C·l

Commonly asked questions
Error messages and alerts

APPENDIXD
TEXT FROM OTHER PROGRAMS

D·l
D-ll

ASCII text . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DCA (Displaywrite III and IV) . .
Microsoft WordIWindows Write ,
Multimate ..
Wordperfect .
Wordstar ..
Xerox writer
Xywrite . . .

D-15
D-15
D-16
D-17
D-17

APPENDIXE
CHARACTER SETS AND CODES

E·l

APPENDIXF
PRINTER INEOltMATION

F·l

D-14
D-14 I

Xerox 4045 laser printer . . . . . . . . . .
Xerox 4020 color ink jet printer . . . . . .
HP LaserJet, LaserJet Plus, LaserJet II .
JLaser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dot matrix printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PostScript, Interpress . . . . . . . . .
... . . .
AST TurboLaserand Cordata printers . . . . . . . . . .

4

· . F-3
· . F-8
· . F-9
F-15
F-17
F-18
. F-24

REFERENCE GUIDE

TABLE OF CONTENTS

APPENDIXG
PICTURES

G-l

APPENDIXH
APPLICATION NOTES

H-l

Publishing a database
Digitizers . . . . . . .

APPENDIX I
GLOSSARY

I-I

APPENDIXJ
COMPLETE FEATURES LIST

J-I

APPENDIXK
ADDING FONTS

K-l

What is a font? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How are fonts used by the printer? . . . . .
How are fonts used by the computer display?
Adding new screen fonts . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding new printer fonts-General instructions
Adding new fonts to the HP LaserJet Plus . . .
Adding new fonts to the Xerox 4045 Laser Printer
Adding fonts to: AST Turbo Laser; Cordata; JLaser
Adding new PostScript fonts
Typefaces . . . . . . . .
VFM file format . . . . .
Modifying kerning pairs

I

. H-1
. H-4

. K-1
. K-2
. K-3
. K-4
. K-5
. K-6
. K-9
K-12
K-14
K -15
K-18
K-22

APPENDIXL
STYLE SHEETS

L-l

APPENDIXM
APPLICATIONS

M-l

INDEX

REFERENCE GUIDE

5

TABLE OF CONTENTS

This page intentionally left blank.

6

REFERENCE GUIDE

INTRODUCTION
How to use this documentation
READ THE NEXT TWO PAGES, EVEN IF YOU
DON'T READ ANYTHING ELSE.
Many people only read their user's manual as a last
resort. If you are one of those, the next two pages tell
you where to find information when you need it.
1) To learn how to install Xerox Ventura Publisher,
read Chapter 2: Setup and Installation. If you
want to install without reading the manual, insert
the Application Disk in the A drive, type
A:VPPREP and then press the Enter key.
2) To run Ventura Publisher, type VP and then press
the Enter key. To quit, select the QUIT option in the
File menu.
3) This is a Reference Guide. It provides a complete
description of each feature, and assumes you already
understand concepts unique to Xerox Ventura
Publisher, such as Style Sheets and Chapters. To
learn how to use the basic features, read the Ventura Publisher Edition Training Guide.
4) To learn by looking at examples, OPEN the example chapters contained in the TYPESET subdirectory. The style sheets associated with each of
these chapters are described in Appendix L.
5) Read the User Interface chapter to learn about
using the mouse and keyboard shortcuts.
6) Read the Functions chapter to learn about Xerox
Ventura Publisher's four separate functions (Frame
Setting, Paragraph Tagging, Text Editing, and
Graphic Drawing.)
REFERENCE GUIDE

1-1

INTRODUCTION

Contents of package

7) Read the Menu Commands chapter to obtain a
complete description of each menu operation.
8) If you have a problem, read through the Common
Problems appendix (Appendix C.) You should also
consult the Problem heading in the index.
9) Other useful information about printers,
wordprocessors, and advanced operation is contained
in the various appendices.
10) If you want to add additional fonts to your printer,
read Appendix K.
~

Do not use the DOS COPY command to copy chapters. Use Xerox Ventura Publisher's Multi-chapter
Copy command instead (see the Multi-chapter section in the Menu Commands chapter.)

~

Background utilities (such as Sidekick) should not be.
installed when running Xerox Ventura Publisher because they reduce the chapter size.
For technical support, call Xerox at (214) 436-2616.
If you are interested in joining the Ventura Publisher
User Groug (VPUG) , a non-profit user group which is
not affiliated with Xerox, you can contact them at:
VPUG
675 Jarvis Drive
Morgan Hill, CA 95037

Contents of package
Xerox Ventura Publisher includes:
Eleven 5114 inch MS-DOS formatted floppy
disks:
• 1. Xerox Ventura Publisher Application Disk

1-2

REFERENCE GUtDE

Features

INTRODUCTION

• 2. Xerox Ventura Publisher Examples Disk
(contains sample style sheets, table templates,
and example documents.)
• 3-10. Xerox Ventura Publisher Device Driver
Disks (contain configuration software for
various printers and displays, plus fonts for
each printer and display.)
• 11. Xerox Ventura Publisher Utilities Disk
(contains font and picture conversion utilities)
Ventura Publisher Edition Reference Guide
Ventura Publisher Edition Training Guide
Ventura Publisher Edition Quick Reference
Registration Card
License Agreement

Features
Xerox Ventura Publisher is a professional page
layout system that lets you create typeset documents
by automatically combining text from wordprocessors with pictures from AutoCAD, Lotus 1-2-3, Mentor Graphics PC CAD programs, GEM Draw, GEM
Graph, PC PaintbrushTM, and Macintosh (see Appendix J for a complete list of graphics software supported.) Also, pictures created in many other
programs (such as Lotus Freelance), and then converted to General Parametric's Video Show format,
AutoCAD DXF format, HPGL, CGM, or encapsulated PostScript, can be used as well. Images created
by a graphics artist can be digitized with a scanner,
converted to GEM or PC Paintbrush file format, and
then displayed, scaled, cropped, and moved on the
computer screen. You can also create simple drawings .directly in Xerox Ventura Publisher.
The resulting pages are formatted automatically by
Style Sheets. A Style Sheet is a computer file which
contains typographic attributes (e.g., fonts, ruling
lines, inter-line spacing.) These attributes are
grouped together into Tags which can then be apREFERENCE GUIDE

1-3

INTRODUCTION

Typographical conventions

plied to each paragraph in your document. By applying a tag to a paragraph, you change the typographic
attributes for that paragraph. The same Style Sheet
can be used for many documents, resulting in consistent typography from one document to the next. Also,
a style· sheet designed by a typographic professional
can be used by an amateur to produce sophisticated
documents.
Depending on the number of pictures, number of
paragraphs, version of DOS, and size of width table,
each chapter can contain up to 500K bytes of text in
a 640K system. Up to 128 chapters can be combined
together into a Publication. Thus, you can develop
and print documents which are thousands of pages in
length.
Appendix J contains a complete features list.

Typographical conventions
The ~ callout emphasizes important points
throughout this manual.
Throughout this manual, when you see
Enter

you should press the Enter key (sometimes called the
Return key.)
Anything to be typed by you is shown in upper case,
but can always be typed in any combination of upper
and lower case.
The terms Text, Line Art, Images, and Graphics
are used throughout this manual. Text refers to
everything that originates either in a wordprocessor
or in Xerox Ventura Publisher's Text Editing nmction. Line Art refers to artwork generated by computer graphics programs such as AutoCAD or GEM
1-4

REFERENCE GUIDE

Typographical conventions

INTRODUCTION

Draw. Images refers to artwork generated by a scanner or paint program. Text, line art, and images are
all stored and maintained in their original format
under their original file names. Graphics refers to
any drawing generated with Xerox Ventura
Publisher's drawing package.
The term Mouse Cursor refers to the cursor that
moves when you move the mouse. The shape of this
cursor depends on the function selected, and on the
nature of the action being performed.
The term Text Cursor refers to the vertical line cursor that indicates the location where text is currently being added or deleted. The text cursor is always
placed between characters.
Throughout this manual, the phrase Select the ... is
used. This means you should move the mouse cursor
to the middle of the item to be selected and then press
the left mouse button once.
Except when explicitly stated, the computer hard
disk is always assumed to be C.
The correct name for this product is Xerox Desktop
Publishing Series: Ventura Publisher Edition.
Within this manual, this is abbreviated to Xerox
Ventura Publisher.

REFERENCE GUIDE

1-5

INTRODUCTION

Typographical conventions

This page intentionally left blank.

1-6

REFERENCE GUIDE

SETUP AND INSTALLATION
System requirements
Xerox Ventura Publisher requires an IBM PC, IBM
XT, IBM AT, or a compatible computer which runs the
same software as these machines. Your computer
must also contain the following or equivalent:
A minimum of 512 kilobytes of RAM (640

kilobytes is recommended when creating
chapters of more than 20 pages.)
A hard disk drive with one to three megabytes
available space to hold software and fonts (space
required depends on printers installed-see the
Software Installation section which follows.)
A graphics board:
Hercules Graphics Card, or equivalent
IBM Color Card and compatible color monitor
IBM Enhanced Graphics Adapter and compatible color monitor
Micro Display Systems Genius display
Wyse 700
Xerox 6065 color display adapter
Xerox 6065 full page display adapter
Xerox 6065 monochrome display adapter

A mouse:
• Microsoft Mouse (serial or bus mouse)
• Mouse Systems PC Mouse, or one of the following equivalents:
- Summagraphics Summa Mouse
- Logitek Logi-mouse
- Torrington Mouse
- Microage Mouse
• Xerox 6065 Mouse

MS-DOS or PC-DOS version 2.10 (or higher)
REFERENCE GUIDE

2-1

SETUP AND INSTALLATION

Software installation

You must also have one ofthe following printers
in order to print what you see on the screen:
• Any Interpress or PostScript compatible
printer or typesetter
• Apple Laserwriter or LaserWriter Plus
• AST TurboLaser
• Cordata laser printer
• Epson MX-80IFX-80/RX-80
• Hewlett-Packard LaserJet Plus
• Hewlett-Packard LaserJet with 92286F font
cartridge
• IBM Proprinter
• Tall Tree Systems JLaser printer card and
compatible printer
• Xerox 4020 Color Ink Jet Printer
• Xerox 4045 Laser Printer
Additional display and printer drivers are available
from other companies although they are not supported directly by Xerox.
~

TO RUN THIS SOFTWARE, YOUR COMPUTER
MUST CONTAIN HARDWARE FROM THE OP·
TIONS LISTED ABOVE AND ON THE PRE·
VIOUS PAGE-INCLUDING A MOUSE AND A
GRAPHICS BOARD

Software installation
~

If you previously installed version 1.0 of Xerox Ventura Publisher, please consult Appendix A in the section Updating From Version 1.0.
This section provides installation instructions intended for use by a person who has basic familiarity
with the IBM PC. Step-by-step installation instruc- (
tions, along with instructions on how to modify an existing installation, are provided in Appendix A.

2-2

REFERENCE GUIDE

SETUP AND INSTALLATION

Software installation

Note that Xerox Ventura Publisher will not operate
when shared between multiple computers, nor is it
licensed for sharing between multiple computer
workstations on a communications network. It can,
however, print over a network provided:
• Each computer workstation on which it is installed contains 640K bytes of RAM
• The network software which runs on each
workstation adds less than 64K bytes to the
memory required by DOS.

Installation preparation
You need to know the following about your computer
hardware:
• Graphics board installed in your computer.
• Printer port used by your printer e.g., serial or
parallel ports (or special printer interface.)
• Serial port or special board used by your
mouse.
You should make backup copies of your distribution
disks to guard against accidental damage. Read the
Software License and Warranty Agreement at the
beginning of this manual to understand the legal
restrictions governing copying and installation of the
software.
You need between one and three megabytes of space
on your computer's hard disk to hold all printer fonts,
screen fonts, system software, application software,
and examples. Approximate space requirements are
as follows:
Xerox 4045, HP LaserJet Plus
. 3.0 Megabytes
PostScript . . . . . . . . . .. . 1.2 Megabytes
JLaser, Dot Matrix, Xerox 4020 . 2.0 Megabytes
Exact space requirements are given in Appendix A.

REFERENCE GUIDE

2·3

SETUP AND INSTALLATION

Software installation

If you'll be using a Microsoft Bus Mouse, Xerox optical mouse, or AT&T 6300 mouse, locate the disk that
contains the MOUSE.COM file. (The Xerox 6060
mouse file is on the MS-DOS with ScreenMate disk.)
You must copy this file to your computer's hard disk
when finished with installation.

Installation
~

The installation process can be aborted at any time
by pressing and holding the Ctrl key and then pressing the Break key.
Make sure that MS-DOS or PC-DOS version 2.10 or
above has been booted.
Insert the Xerox Ventura Publisher disk labeled
Xerox Ventura Publisher Application Disk #1
into the A drive. The 1.2 Mbyte drive in an AT is
usually the A drive and can be used. Close the drive
door, type A:VPPREP and then press the Enter key.

~

If you install from any drive other than A, type
n:VPPREP n: where n is replaced with letter of the
floppy disk drive.
The system responds with: Is your hard disk drive
C?Y
To install Xerox Ventura Publisher on drive C, press
Enter. If your computer uses a different letter, or you
have more than one hard disk drive and want to install on another disk drive, type N and then press the
Enter key.
If you answer N, the computer asks you to:

II

2·4

Type your hard dis.k drive letter ( A-Z )?

II

REFERENCE GUIDE

Software installation

SETUP AND INSTALLATION

Respond by typing the appropriate letter. For instance to install for the D drive, type D and then
press the Enter key.
After you enter the drive letter, the computer asks:

Are you installing this version for the first
time? Y.

Respond by pressing Enter. (Note: If you have already installed Xerox Ventura Publisher version 1.1,
you can change part of the installation without going
through the entire installation process by typing N
and then pressing the Enter key in response to this
question.)
Xerox Ventura Publisher then creates new directories, and instructs you to insert Screen Device
Driver Disk #3.
You are then asked what type of graphics board, display, mouse, and printer you wish to install. You are
given a list of choices for each hardware option. Type
the letter of the option you want to install, and then '
press Enter. If you make a mistake and type the
wrong letter, merely type the new letter. If you press
Enter after typing the wrong letter, either abort and
start over, or continue until you are asked to confirm
your choices, and then tell the system that your
choices are not all correct. You can install up to five
printer drivers.
After you have confirmed your choices, you are asked
to insert one or more of the Xerox Ventura Publisher
disks, depending on what display, mouse, and
printers you are using. Don't be surprised if you
never use certain disks, and you are asked to insert
others more than once. This is normal.

REFERENCE GUIDE

2-5

SETUP AND INSTALLATION

Software installation

The installation process takes five to thirty minutes
depending on the printers installed. The message
Expanding Font Files stays on the screen for five
to ten minutes, for each printer installed, towards
the end of installation.
For complete installation information, consult
AppendixA.
Post-installation
To assure best performance, use the ASCII text nmction of your wordprocessor to modifY the file in your
computer called CONFIG.SYS to contain the lines:
BUFFERS=15
FILES=15.

Any number greater than 15 also works. Any number
less than 15 noticeably degrades performance.
Without a BUFFERS statement in the CONFIG.SYS
file, the default is BUFFERS=3.
If CONFIG.SYS does not exist, you can create it,
and add the line BUFFERS = 15 by typing the following directly from the DOS prompt (this example
assumes that the computer boots from hard disk C):

COPY CON: C:\CONFIG.SYS Enter
BUFFERS=15 Enter
FILES=15 Enter
 Enter
where  means "hold down the Ctrl key while
typing a Z."
~

Failure to add the BUFFERS and FILES statements
to your CONFIG.SYS file results in slower performance.
If you installed a bus mouse (option C in the mouse
menu), copy the file MOUSE.COM from your mouse
distribution disk to the root directory of your com-

2-6

REFERENCE GUIDE

SETUP AND INSTALLATION

Starting the program

puter. Then use the ASCII text function in your wordprocessor to add the word MOUSE to the
AUTOEXEC.BAT file:
If your system does not have an AUTOEXEC.BAT
file, you can create one, and place the MOUSE command in it by typing the following:

COPY CON: C:\AUTOEXEC.BAT Enter
MOUSE Enter
 Enter
where  means "hold down the Ctrl key while
typing a Z." Some mice use the CONFIG.SYS file to
load the mouse driver. In this case you must copy the
file called MOUSE.SYS to the root directory of your
hard
disk,
and
add
the
statement
DEVICE=MOUSE.SYS to the CONFIG.SYS file.
Consult your mouse manual for more information.
~

You must place the MOUSE statement in your
AUTOEXEC.BAT file when using a Microsoft Bus
mouse, or AT&T or Xerox 6065 Keyboard mouse.

Starting the program
To run Xerox Ventura Publisher, make sure that you
have logged-onto to your computer's hard disk drive,
and that you are in the root directory. To log onto your
computer's hard disk drive (assuming it is drive C),
and change to the root directory, type the following:
C: Enter
CD \ Enter
Make sure you type \ not I.
To run Xerox Ventura Publisher, type VP Enter.
Depending on your computer, Xerox Ventura Publisher takes anywhere from five to forty-five seconds
REFERENCE GUIDE

2-7

SETUP AND INSTALLATION

Quitting

to load. Ifloading time seems excessively long (more
than 45 seconds), make sure that the CONFIG.SYS
file contains the statement BUFFERS=15, as
described under Post Installation.
You can specify the chapter you want to load when
you start the program by typing the file name on the
same line with VP. For example:
VP C:\TYPESET\SCOOP.CHP Enter

If your computer contains at least 1.2 megabytes of
RAM, you can increase performance when creating

long documents. Th do this, follow these steps:
~

Use the software supplied with your memory card
to create a RAM disk of at least 500 Kbytes.
~ Add/O=n :to the last line of the VP.BAT file, where
n is the letter of your RAM disk drive. For instance, to use a RAM disk configured as drive D,
the last line of the VP.BAT file should read:
DRVRMRGR VP %1 fS=SD_X6655.EGAIM=3210=D:

The IS and 1M options may differ depending on the
screen and mouse installed
To load Xerox Ventura Publisher using Xerox ScreenMate:
Press FI, then F9
~ Highlight VP.BAT
~ PressF2 and Enter

.~

OR
~
~

Press F9, then Esc (to exit to the DOS prompt)
Type VPEnter

Quitting
Th quit from Xerox Ventura Publisher, select the
QUIT option in the File menu.
REFERENCE GUIDE

USER INTERFACE
This chapter describes the use ofthe mouse and function of each keyboard key.

Mouse
Description

The mouse is used to move the Mouse Cursor to
items on the screen which are to be selected. It is also
used to draw frames and graphics.
Operation

Single items are selected by placing the mouse cur·
sor anywhere inside the item to be selected and then
pressing the left mouse button once. Placement of the
cursor is not critical as long as the point of the cursor
lies within the item to be selected.
Xerox Ventura Publisher uses only the left mouse
button.
When selecting file names, pressing the mouse button twice in a row, very quickly, is equivalent to
selecting an item and then selecting OK.
The mouse cursor changes shape depending on the
function selected, as shown in Figure 3-1.

Keyboard keys
Description

Various keys on the keyboard perform special functions:

REFERENCE GUIDE

3-1

Keyboard keys

USER INTERFACE

Frame Setting

+

Add New Frame

Ifi

Re-size Frame

~

Pan Image

~

Move Frame
Paragraph Tagging

I

Graphic Selection

~

Line Drawing
Circle Drawing
Rectangle Drawing
Rounded Rectangle Drawing

3-2

~

Text Editing

Box Text

Figure 3-1

+

,

lYe

E9

r
r

Mouse Cursor Shapes

REFERENCE GUIDE

Keyboard keys

USER INTERFACE

The keyboard Cursor keys control the movement
of the Text Cursor.
The Home key goes to the first page ofthe document.
The End key goes to the last page of the document.
The Pg Up key goes to the previous page.
The Pg Dn key goes to the next page.
The Del key deletes the character to the right of
the text cursor when you are using the Text Editing function. When a block of text, frame, or
graphic is selected, pressing the Del key is
equivalent to selecting the Cut option in the Edit
menu. Pressing the Shift key simultaneously
with the Del key is equivalent to selecting the
Copy option in the Edit menu.
Pressing the Ins key is equivalent to selecting the
Paste option in the Edit menu.
The Backspace key deletes the character to the
left of the text cursor.
The Esc key halts the print operation for the current chapter when printing. When going to a page,
the Esc key also halts a "go to page" operation. In
a Dialog Box, the Esc key deletes all characters on
the line that contains the text cursor. At all other
times, the Esc key reformats the current page.
The Alt key performs several functions:
• Used in conjunction with the mouse to move
cropped pictures within frames. Press and
hold down the Alt key, move the mouse cursor
to the center of the image to be moved, press
and hold the mouse button, and then move the
image. Release both the Alt key and the
mouse button when finished.
The Shift keys are used in conjunction with the
mouse to select multiple paragraphs, frames, or
REFERENCE GUIDE

3-3

USER INTERFAce

Keyboard keys

graphics.. Press and hold down either shift key
while selecting in order to select several items.
Also, pressing the Shift key while adding frames
or graphics keeps the Add New Frame or graphic
tool enabled> thus letting you draw several frames
orgrapbics ina row. Finally,pressing the right
Shift key and theCtrl key simultaneously causes
the keyboard cursor keys to toggle between controlling the text cursor (normal operation) and
controlling the mouse cursor.
The Tab key inserts horizontal tab characters.
The Special Function Keys can be used to tag
paragraphs, if the style sheet has assigned tags to
these keys. See Assign Function Keys in the
Menu C()tttmall'cischapter.
The Ctrlkey is used:
,. With the Enter .key to insert a line break
• With the Hyphen key to insert a discretionary
hyphen.
Pressing and holding the Ctrlkey while selecting
graphics or frames with the mouse lets yoo.select
graphi'cs which are "hidden"beneat'hother
gfa,phics. Pressing theCtri and right Shift keys
simultanoouslytoggle:s the keyh- Select a range of text
>- Use the Set Font button to change this range of
text to Symbol characters
Additional symbols can be added within this range
using the Text Editing function.
~

The symbol character set is not available with all
printers. Consult Appendix F.

Generating mathematical formulas
Although not designed specifically to generate complex mathematical equations (e.g., large integrals,
chemical equations), Xerox Ventura Publisher can
easily generate simple formulas using the symbol .
I
character set.
If you only need one or two symbols within a
paragraph, select the one or two characters you wish
to change to symbols, and change them using the
Text Editing Set Font button. For instance, to put a
1t in the formula

type the letter p, then select this letter and use the
Set Font button to change this one letter to a symbol.
V se superscript, subscript, or Set Font Shift option
to create powers and subscripts.
To change all characters in a paragraph to symbols,
create a new tag and change its typeface to symbol.

4-26

REFERENCE GUIDE

FUNCTIONS

Graphic drawing function

Interaction with your wordprocessor.
Consult Appendix D for important information on
text transfer between Xerox Ventura Publisher's
wordprocessor and your favorite wordprocessor.

Graphic drawing function
Xerox Ventura Publisher includes a drawing package
that lets you draw lines, ellipses, rectangles and
rounded-edge rectangles. These shapes can then be
filled with different colors and shades. Also included
is the ability to place text in a box and move this box
anywhere on a page. This drawing capability is
designed to let you draw call-out boxes, create forms
and tables, place additional ruling lines anywhere on
the page, and create additional graphic effects.
The graphics drawn in Xerox Ventura Publisher will
print with the maximum resolution your printer is
capable of producing. These graphics are not "screen
snapshots".

Box text

Ellipse

Rounded rectangle

Figure 4-16
REFERENCE GUIDE

Graphic Drawing function enabled
4-27

Graphic drawing function

FUNCTIONS

Tying graphics to a frame
To draw graphics, a frame must first be selected, and

then the Graphic Drawing function enabled, as
shown in Figure 4-16..
Graphics are tied to a frame, and can be placed either
inside or outside the frame boundaries. A frame that
already contains either text or a picture file can also
have graphics associated with it. When the frame is
cut, copied, pasted, or moved, the graphics tied to
that frame are cut, copied, pasted or moved with it.
Graphics can be moved anywhere on the page. They
can also be re-sized. However, when the frame is resized, the graphics associated with that frame do not
change size or shape.
~

Graphics tied to the underlying page will automatically repeat on every page.

Basic drawing
Enable the Frame Setting function and select either
a frame or the underlying page. Graphics are tied to
the frame selected. Each frame can have its own set
of graphics.
Next, enable the Graphic Drawing function. The Assignment List is replaced with six icons (pictures)
which represent Graphic Selection and the five drawing tools available. Figure 4-16 shows these icons and
their function.
You can select any of these tools and then draw the
graphic object. To draw the object:
~
~

~

4-28

Press and hold the mouse button
Draw the object
Release the mouse button when the desired size
and shape has been obtained

REFERENCE GUIDE

Graphic drawing function

FUNCTIONS

Once a graphic is drawn, you can move it, re-size it,
or change its attributes.
~

When the Graphic Drawing function is enabled, you
can select graphics, but not frames. When the Frame
Setting function is enabled you can select frames, but
not graphics. Always first select the frame whose
graphics you want to change, and then enable the
Graphic Drawing function.
One exception: When the Frame Setting function is
enabled, you can type Ctrl + Q to select all graphics
associated with that frame.
The Current Selection Indicator shows the type of
graphic currently selected (i.e., ellipse, line, rectangle, box text.)
Multiple graphic objects can be selected by pressing
and holding either Shift key and then selecting each
individual graphic. All graphics associated with a
frame can be selected by choosing the Select All
function in the Graphic menu.
These graphics can then be cut, copied, pasted, or
moved. Attributes can also be applied simultaneously to all selected graphics. Multiple graphic objects
can also be re-sized as a group: Re-size one graphic
in a group, and all graphics in that group will change
size proportionally.

Grid settings
Graphics can be snapped to an invisible grid which is
defined in the Grid Settings option in the Graphic
menu (Figure 4-17.) The grid setting can be different
for each frame in the chapter.
The Grid Setting is used to help align different
graphic objects with one another. It also is used, in
conjunction with Boxed Text, to construct complex
tables or forms.
REFERENCE GUIDE

4-29

Graphic drawing function

FUNCTIONS

GRID SETTINGS
Grid Snap: •

[]ff]

Horizontal Spacing: B1,B~ picas &points
Vertical Spacing: B1,BB

I Cancel I

OK

Figure 4-17

Grid Settings Dialog Box

Graphic attributes
To change a graphic's attributes, first enable the
Frame Setting function and select the frame tied to (
the graphic. Then enable the Graphic Drawing function. Select the graphic object whose attributes you
wish to change. Then choose either the Line Attributes or the Fill Attributes option in the
Graphic menu. The operation of these options is explained in the Menu Commands chapter.

Graphic order
If graphics are placed on top of one another, the last

graphic placed on the page is always placed on top.
To change this order, first select the graphic you wish
to move and then select either the Send to Back or
Bring to Front option in the Graphic menu. The
selected graphic is then either put on the bottom of
all graphics associated with this frame (Send to ,
Back), or on the top (Bring to Front.)

4-30

REFERENCE GUIDE

Graphic drawing function

Figure 4-18

FUNCTIONS

Line behind a rectangle

Figure 4-18 shows a line behind a rectangle. Figure
4-19 shows the result of selecting the line and then
choosing the Bring to Front option.

Figure 4-19

REFERENCE GUIDE

Line brought to front of rectangle

4-31

FUNCTIONS

Graphic drawing function

Selecting graphic on bottom
When one graphic is underneath another graphic, it
is sometimes difficult to select the graphic on the bottom. To select a graphic which is covered by several
other graphics, press and hold the Ctrl key and then
select the first graphic. While holding the Ctrl key,
press the mouse button again to select the next
graphic down from the top. Continue pressing the
mouse button, while holding the Ctrl key, until you
select the desired graphic.

Drawing multiple graphics
After each graphic is drawn, Xerox Ventura
Publisher automatically changes to the Graphic
Selection mode. If, however, you want to draw several
graphics of the same kind, you can depress and hold
either Shift key while drawing each graphic. As long
as you depress the Shift key while drawing the
graphic, the drawing tool remains available. As soon i
as a graphic is drawn without pressing the Shift key,
the Graphic Selection mode is immediately enabled.

Box text
The box text feature lets you place text anywhere on
the page. Unlike text in frames, which is formatted
in columns and causes text in other frames to move
aside, Box Text is formatted in a single column, and
overlaps all text and pictures on the page. Think of
box text as a Post-It® (self-adhesive yellow note
paper) that can be placed anywhere on the page.

To create box text, first select a frame to which the
box text will be attached. Select the Box Text icon,
then draw a box in the same manner as you would
draw a frame. This box can then be moved anywhere
on the page; and it can be increased or decreased in
size.

4-32

REFERENCE GUIDE

Graphic drawing function

FUNCTIONS

Notice that the words Box Text appear within the
box. Select the Text Editing function and then delete
these words and place any text you desire in the box.
If necessary, select the Graphic Drawing function
and make the box larger or smaller, to hold more or
less text. The text entered into this box is stored in
the chapter's caption (CAP) file.
~

If you don't see any text when you first draw box text,
this means that the Above, Below, In From Left, or In
From Right spacing for the box text tag (Z_BOXTEXT), is greater than the box size. To correct, temporarily make the box text larger until you can see
the words Box Text. Select the Paragraph Tagging
function, select the words Box Text, and reduce its
spacing as necessary.
Box text callouts
Use the box text feature to place callouts outside, but
attached to, a picture frame. To do this, enable the
Frame Setting function and select the desired frame.
Then, enable the Graphic Setting function and draw
a box text box. If you don't want a line around the box,
select Line Attributes and set Thickness to None.
Place the box at the position inside or outside the
frame where you want the callout to appear. When
the box is placed correctly, select the line drawing tool
and draw a line from the box to the item in the frame
you wish to annotate. You can change the line's thickness and add arrows. If you want to move the line and
box together, select both, using the Shift key and the
mouse as described above, and move them both.
When they are positioned correctly, enable the Text
Editing function, place the text cursor in the box, and
type the callout.
Box text tables and forms
Simple tables can be created using tabs and
paragraph ruling lines, as described in the Tables

REFERENCE GUIDE

4-33

FUNCTIONS

Graphic drawing function

section in the Hints, Tips, & Techniques chapter.
However, complex tables, as shown in Figure 4-21,
are more easily done with box text. To create a complex table, first use the Frame Setting function to
create a frame in which the table will be placed.
Next, enable the Graphic Drawing function and set
the Grid Settings for this frame. Make the horizontal
spacing a convenient sub-multiple of the frame
width, and the vertical spacing an integer multiple of
Z_BOXTEXT.

D

Figure 4-20

D

Creating table with Box Text

WidgetTablel

Fe at u re L i st2

This is the second
category

Th i s i s th
third category

This is th
third category

Figure 4-21

4-34

This is the second

Th i 5

(ate gory

third category

is

th e

Table composed with Box Text

REFERENCE GUIDE

Graphic drawing function

FUNCTIONS

Look at Figure 4-20 to see how a table might be organized using box text. Notice that different boxes
are created for each row of items, and that two boxes
are used for the table headings. Since you are drawing multiple boxes, be sure to depress the Shift key
to keep the box text tool available.
When all boxes have been drawn, select each box and
use the Text Editing function to add text. (You can
also change line or fill attributes for each box.) Figure
4-21 shows the finished table.

REFERENCE GUIDE

4-35

FUNCTIONS

Graphic drawing function

This page intentionally left blank.

4-36

REFERENCE GUIDE

MENU COMMANDS
This chapter describes each function controlled
through the menus at the top of the screen and the
options within them. These commands are presented
in the order in which they appear on the screen, from
left to right. Use the index for an alphabetical
reference to these commands.

Menu conventions
Often, a menu option is shown in gray, and cannot be
highlighted. This usually indicates that the proper
function has not been selected. The table below indicates which function should be selected to use the
desired option.

DESK
Publisher Info ...

Always available

FILE
New
Open Chapter ...
Save
Save As .. .
Abandon .. .
Load TextlPicture ...
Load Diff. Style ...
Save As New Style ...
To Print ...
DOS File Ops ...
Quit

REFERENCE GUIDE

Must Open Chapter or Load TextlPicture
Always available
File name must be in title bar
Always available
Chapter must have been saved
Always available
Always available
Always available
Always available
Always available
Always available

5-1

MENU COMMANDS

EDIT
Cut or Copy

Paste

Insert Footnote
InsertlEdit Index .. .
InsertlEdit Anchor .. .
Remove TextlFile .. .
File TypelRename .. .

Text Editing; Text selected
Frame Setting; Frame selected
Graphic Drawing; Graphic selected
Text Editing; Text on clipboard
Frame Setting; Frame on clipboard
Graphic Drawing; Graphic on clipboard
Text function; Text cursor placed
Text function; Text cursor placed
Text function; Text cursor placed
Frame Setting function
Frame Setting function

VIEW

Facing Pages View
Reduced View
Normal View (IX)
Enlarged View (2X)
Frame Setting
Paragraph Tagging
Text Editing
Graphic Drawing

Double Sided selected in Page Layout
Always available
Always available
Always available
Always available
Always available
Always available
Always available

PAGE
Page Layout ...
Widows & Orphans ...
Chapter Counter ...
Page Counter ...
Auto-Numbering ...
Renumber Chapter
Re-Anchor Frames .. .
Headers & Footers .. .
Turn Header On/Off
Turn Footer On/Off
Footnote Settings ...
InsertlRemove Page ...
Go To Page ...
5-2

Always available
Always available
Chapter number set in header/footer
Page number set in header/footer
Always available
Auto-Numbering turned on
Always available
Always available
Headers disabled/enabled for this page
Footers disabled/enabled for this page
Always available
Always available
Always available

REFERENCE GUIDE

MENU COMMANDS

Frame
Margins & Columns ...
Sizing & Scaling .. .
Repeating Frame .. .
Anchor & Caption Setting
Table Counter ...
Figure Counter ...
Vertical Rules ...
Ruling Line Above .. .
Ruling Line Below .. .
Ruling Box Around .. .
Frame Background .. .

Frame Setting function; Frame selected
Frame Setting function; Frame selected
Frame Setting function; Frame selected
Frame Setting function; Frame selected
Frame Setting function;
Frame selected, caption defined
Frame Setting function;
Frame selected, caption defined
Frame Setting function; Frame selected
Frame Setting function; Frame selected
Frame Setting function; Frame selected
Frame Setting function; Frame selected
Frame Setting function; Frame selected

PARAGRAPH
Font ...
Alignment ...
Spacing .. .
Breaks .. .
Tab Settings ...
Special Effects ...
Typographic Controls ...
Ruling Line Above .. .
Ruling Line Below .. .
Ruling Box Around .. .
Remove Tag .. .
Rename Tag .. .
Assign Function Keys ...

Paragraph Tagging;
Paragraph Tagging;
Paragraph Tagging;
Paragraph Tagging;
Paragraph Tagging;
Paragraph Tagging;
Paragraph Tagging;
Paragraph Tagging;
Paragraph Tagging;
Paragraph Tagging;
Paragraph Tagging
Paragraph Tagging
Paragraph Tagging

paragraph selected
paragraph selected
paragraph selected
paragraph selected
paragraph selected
paragraph selected
paragraph selected
paragraph selected
paragraph selected
paragraph selected

GRAPHIC
Send to Back
Bring to Front
Line Attributes .. .
Fill Attributes .. .
Select All
Grid Settings ...
REFERENCE GUIDE

Graphic Drawing; Graphic
Graphic Drawing; Graphic
Graphic Drawing; Graphic
Graphic Drawing; Graphic
Graphic Drawing
Graphic Drawing

selected
selected
selected
selected

5-3

MENU COMMANDS

OPTIONS
Set Preferences...
Set Rulers...
Set Printer Info...
AddlRemove Fonts
ShowlHide Side-Bar
ShowlHide Rulers
ShowlHide Column Guides
ShowlHide Pictures
ShowlHide Tabs & Returns
ShowlHide Loose Lines
Turn Column Snap On/Off
Tum Line Snap On/Off
Multi-Chapter...

5-4

Always
Always
Always
Always
Always
Always
Always
Always
Always
Always
Always
Always
Always

available
available
available
available
available
available
available
available
available
available
available
available
available

REFERENCE GUIDE

DESK MENU

MENU COMMANDS

DESK MENU

Figure 5-1

Desk Menu

Description
The Desk menu provides both the version and serial
numbers for your copy of Xerox Ventura Publisher.
To operate, select Publisher Info. When finished,
select OK.

REFERENCE GUIDE

5-5

MENU COMMANDS

FILE MENU

FILEMENU

New
Open Chapter ...
Save
Save As".
Abandon .. .

AS

Load Te~t/Picture .. .
Load Diff. Style .. .
Save As New Style .. .
To Print ...
DOS File Ops".
uit
Figure 5-2

File Menu

Description/application
The File menu controls the flow of information into
and out of Xerox Ventura Publisher.
The File menu provides five basic functions:
• You can Open or Save the entire chapter
• You can Load individual text, line art, or
image files into the chapter
• You can use a different style sheet than the
one currently in use, or save a newly created
style sheet
• You can print the chapter
• You can execute DOS file commands
• You can finish using (Quit) Xerox Ventura
Publisher

5-6

REFERENCE GUIDE

MENU COMMANDS

New

New
Description
Selecting New removes the current chapter from
memory and provides a blank screen. The last version saved is still available on disk.

Application
• Start composing a brand new chapter.

Operation
Select New in the File menu. If any changes have
been made to the chapter since it was last saved, a
warning appears reminding you to save the chapter.
Also, if any changes have been made to the style
sheet since the chapter or style sheet was last saved,
a second warning appears. In both cases, select Save
to save all changes made, or select Abandon to
throwaway all changes.
The current style sheet remains in effect after New
is selected.

REFERENCE GUIDE

5-7

MENU COMMANDS

Open chapter

Open chapter
Description
The Open Chapter option retrieves a previously
stored chapter, and its related style sheet, text, and
picture files.

Application
Resume composing and editing a previously
saved chapter.

Operation
Select the Open Chapter option in the File menu. If
another chapter is currently being edited, Xerox Ventura Publisher prompts you to save the existing chapter. Select Save to save, or select Abandon to throw
away all changes.
The Item Selector then appears. Using the conventions described under Item Selector in the User Interface chapter, select the chapter to open.
~

If the file name is not shown, you may have saved the
chapter with an extension different than the CHP
default used by Xerox Ventura Publisher, or the file
may be saved in a different subdirectory than currently shown in the Item Selector. Either change the
default extension on the Directory line in the Item
Selector, or change the subdirectory.
As the chapter is loading, different messages appear
on the screen. When text files are loading, the message Loading & Hyphenating Text File: appears.
Xerox Ventura Publisher places all possible hyphenation points in the text in order to increase re-formatting speed each time you add a frame or change a text
attribute. For a large text file, this takes several
minutes, depending on the speed of your computer

5-8

REFERENCE GUIDE

Open chapter

MENU COMMANDS

and size of the chapter. If you install a hyphenation
algorithm other than the US English algorithm, the
text loading time may increase. The hyphenation
time is different for each language.
~

REFERENCE GUIDE

Use Open Chapter to retrieve an entire chapter and
all associated text, picture, and style sheet files. To
add another text or picture file to an existing chapter,
use Load TextlPicture instead.

5-9

Save

MENU COMMANDS

Save
Description
The Save option stores the chapter under the name
shown in the Title Bar. The style sheet and each text
file are also saved if they have been changed.

Application
• Save changes under an existing file name.
• Protect against accidental erasure due to
power failures.

Operation
Select the Save option in the File menu, or press and
hold the Ctrl key and then press S. The file is saved
under the file name shown in the Title Bar. If the
name UNTITLED.CHP is shown in the Title Bar,
the Item Selector appears and you must then specify
a chapter file name.
The style sheet shown in the Title Bar, and all text
files shown in the Assignment List, are also saved, if
they have been changed. If you don't want to change
the current style sheet, use the Save as new style option to save the style sheet under a new name prior
to saving the chapter.
All captions, graphics, and information for a chapter
are automatically saved in files which have the same
name as the chapter, but which have the extensions
CAP, VGR, and CIF respectively. The elF file is for
use by future software programs.
If selected in the Set Preferences option in the Option
menu, backup files (e.g., $HP) are automatically
made for chapter, style sheet, and text files.

5-10

REFERENCE GUIDE

MENU COMMANDS

Save as

Save as
Description
The Save As option saves the chapter under a new
name. The style sheet and each text file are also
saved-under their original names-if they have
been changed.

Application
• Save the same chapter under a name different
than shown in the Title Bar.

Operation
Select the Save As option in the File menu, then use
the Item Selector to specify the new file name. If the
extension is not specified, Xerox Ventura Publisher
automatically adds CHP.
If you don't want to change the current style sheet,

use the Save as new style option to save the style
sheet under a new name prior to saving the chapter.
All captions, graphics, and information for a chapter
are automatically saved in files which have the same
name as the chapter, but which have the extensions
CAP, VGR, and CIF respectively. The elF file is
available for use by other future software programs.
Backup files (e.g., $HP) are automatically made for
chapter, style sheet, and text files, if selected in the
Set Preferences option. The first letter of the backup
file extension is changed to a dollar sign.

REFERENCE GUIDE

5-11

MENU COMMANDS

Abandon

Abandon
Description

I

Abandon replaces the chapter currently in memory
with the last version saved.

Application
• Recover from major mistakes.

Operation

I

Select the Abandon option in the File menu. An
Alert Box appears asking if you want to

Abandon changes to this chapter and revert to
the previously saved version?

Select OK to throwaway all changes and automatically Open the last version saved. All changes made
since the last time the chapter was saved are lost.
Select Cancel to stop the Abandon operation and
resume working with the existing chapter.
If the chapter has been saved, but you want to get rid
of the changes and start with a blank page, select
New instead.

5-12

REFERENCE GUIDE

Load textJpictu re

MENU COMMANDS

Load text/picture
LOAD TEXT/PICTURE
hpe of File: . . ! Line· Art!

I::i!illJ

Text Fomat: ! Generated! . . . ! WordStar US! ! "ultiMate!

C!lDmJ

! Writer US! ! WordPerfect!

! WordStar UK! ! Writer G·1 !

llill!iliJ []ill

Line·Art Fmat: [@l] ! AutoCad ,SLD! ! Lotti, ,PIC! ! Mentor (ir !
! VideoSllow! ! MAC PICT! ! ((iM! ! PostScript!

[]ill]
[Aage Fomat: I GEM ( Dr, HALO! ! PC·Painturu,h I ! MAC Paint!
~ of Files: _

Figure 5-3

! Several!

[][] !Cancel!

Load Text / Picture Dialog Box

Description
The Load TextlPicture option places either text,
line art, or image files in the Assignment List prior
to placing them in a frame.

Application
• Build a list of all files in the chapter.

Operation
~

~
~

REFERENCE GUIDE

Select the Load Text/Picture option in the File
menu. The Load Text/Picture Dialog Box shown in
Figure 5-3 appears.
Select the type of file you want to add e.g., text,
line art, or image.
Select the file format under which this file was
saved, such as GEM, or Lotus 1-2-3. (Select Text
and Generated to load a table of contents or index
file generated by Xerox Ventura Publisher.)

5-13

Load text/picture

MENU COMMANDS
~

If you want to load several files of the same type
(e.g., four Lotus 1-2-3 pictures) select Several at
the bottom of the screen.
~ Select OK when ready to select files.
~ Xerox Ventura Publisher then displays the Item
Selector, with the appropriate subdirectory and
file filter already chosen. If the subdirectory and
filter are not initially correct, change them as
described in the Item Selector section.
~ Finally, elect the file name to be loaded and then
select OK.
For instance, if you are loading a Wordstar file, first
select Text and then select Wordstar. Or, if you are
loading Lotus 1-2-3 graphics, first select line art and
then select Lotus .PIC.

Ilaf

When loading text files, you will notice a delay-up
to several minutes for large files-as Xerox Ventura
Publisher converts text and inserts hyphens.
If you selected Multiple, the Item Selector reappears after each file is selected. To finish selecting
multiple files, select OK without first selecting
another file name, or choose cancel.

Ilaf

Use Load TextlPicture to add another text or picture
file to an existing chapter. To retrieve an entire chapter and all associated text, picture, and style sheet
files, use Open Chapter instead.

Text changes made during load
The following is a list of all changes made to text
during the Load TextlPicture operation:
• Multiple spaces are converted to a single space
plus non-breaking spaces.
• All possible hyphen points are temporarily inserted into the text. (They are not saved back
into the text file.)

5-14

REFERENCE GUIDE

Load text/picture

MENU COMMANDS

• Information not used by Xerox Ventura
Publisher, such as centering, indents, printing
commands, and so on, is eliminated.
Most typists press Enter twice in a row to create
blank lines between paragraphs. However, Xerox
Ventura Publisher treats each carriage return in the
wordprocessor file as a new paragraph and adds
above, below, and inter-paragraph spacing. This may
create too much space between paragraphs within
Xerox Ventura Publisher and unwanted spaces at the
top of columns. To eliminate these null paragraphs,
type the following on the first line of the
wordprocessor's text file:
@PARAFILTR ON =
Most typists type two spaces after a period or colon.
This, however, is not considered correct when a page
is typeset. Therefore, you should use the search and
replace feature in your wordprocessor to eliminate
all double spaces.

Picture changes made during load
Pictures stored in other than GEM format (e.g., a
Lotus 1-2-3 PIC file), are automatically converted to
Xerox Ventura Publisher's file format and saved in
new files which have the same name as the original
file, but with the extension GEM (line art) or IMG
(image.) The original files remain unchanged. Your
disk must have enough room to hold both the original
and the converted files.

Graphics limitations
Xerox Ventura Publisher converts several industry
standard graphics formats into its own file format, as
described above. These formats include:

REFERENCE GUIDE

5-15

MENU COMMANDS

Load text/picture

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

GEM
CGM
DXF
HPGL
Macintosh PICT
Macintosh Paint
PostScript
Video Show

Because of the tremendous range of capabilities of
these programs, not all graphics produced by them
can be completely displayed and printed by Xerox
Ventura Publisher. The limitations noted in Appendix G for the DXF to GEM converter apply to all
graphics brought into Xerox Ventura Publisher.
Use PC Paintbrush format to load files created by a
scanner.

Picture size
Xerox Ventura Publisher cannot always calculate the
size of pictures imported from other sources. This
may result in a picture which is larger than the
frame. To correct, reduce the picture size using the
Sizing & Scaling option.

PostScript iIles
PostScript files must be in encapsulated (EPSF)
format, or an error message will result. If your
program produces PostScript files, check with the
software manufacturer to make sure these are stored
in encapsulated format. Note: Any single page
printed to a disk file by Xerox Ventura Publisher is
created in encapsulated format. This lets you load a
page into a frame and then expand or shrink it.
~

5-16

PostScript files cannot be displayed on the screen. A
frame containing a PostScript file is filled with a
large X, and the name of the file is displayed in the
Current Selection Indicator.
REFERENCE GUIDE

Load different style

MENU COMMANDS

Load different style
Description
Load Different Style combines a different style
sheet with the chapter currently in memory. If the
chapter is then saved, the reference to the old style
sheet is replaced with a reference to the new style
sheet.
Application
• Retrieve an existing style sheet.
• Experiment with different styles once your
chapter has been tagged.

Operation
Select Load Different Style in the File menu. The
Item Selector appears. Select the desired style sheet.
The new style sheet name appears in the Title Bar at
the top of the screen.
The Open Chapter function automatically loads the
style sheet for that chapter.
If you used a special set of fonts when you last used
this style sheet, the width table for these fonts will
automatically be loaded when you load the style
sheet.

REFERENCE GUIDE

5-17

MENU COMMANDS

Save as new style

Save as new style
Description

I

Save As New Style creates a new style sheet file or
modifies an existing style sheet.

Application
• Create new style sheets.
Operation
Select the Save As New Style option in the File menu.
When the Item Selector appears, type the name of
the new style sheet, and then select OK. If you do not
specify the extension, Xerox Ventura Publisher
, automatically appends the extension STY to the file
name.
~

Saving the chapter after modifying a style sheet, or
saving a modified style sheet under its original name,
changes the look of other chapters that use that same
style sheet. Always save modifications to existing
style sheets under a new name unless you want those
modifications to affect other chapters.
If you have loaded a new width table in order to gain
access to a different set of fonts, the reference to this
width table will be stored with the style sheet. (See
the Set Printer Info and AddlRemove Fonts sections
in the Menu Commands chapter for more information on width tables.)

5-18

REFERENCE GUIDE

To print

MENU COMMANDS

To print
PRINT IHFIlIMATION
Which Pag~s:

rnIJ IDImD !liliJ mill] I Curr~nt I

Fran Pag~: 005BB2~
Through Pag~:
~
Hunb~r of Copi~s: B1
CollaUd Copies:

II!IDI

rn

Printing Ord~r: 11st to Last I

'M.ii.ln

Configuration: POSTSCRIPT. COH1:
Paper Tra~:
MultHhanm:

IiDI!8I rnDIl rnDII ~
I m ill (lie file I I Each ill 5epmte File I

Crop Hans: []ill . .

~

ICancel I

Figure 5-4 To Print Dialog Box set to print pages 23
through 57

Description
To Print begins the printing process.
Application
Generate printed copies of the currently
opened chapter.
• Print to a file. This file can then be copied to
floppy disk and sent to a remote printer or
typesetter.
• Place camera guides around the edge of the
page.

Operation
Select the To Print option in the File menu. The
Print Information Dialog Box shown in Figure 5-4
appears. If you want to print just one copy of the entire chapter, select OK.
To print more than one copy of the pages selected,
move the text cursor to the Number of Copies line
and type the number of copies desired. You can have
REFERENCE GUIDE

5-19

To print

MENU COMMANDS

these copies printed so they are collated by selecting
Collated Copies: On.
~

When printing pages that contain pictures, selecting
Collated adds a tremendous amount of time to the
printing operation.
You can change the printing order from 1st to Last
to Last to 1st or vice versa, depending on how your
printer stacks paper in the output tray,
To print only part of the chapter, pick the Selected
option. Next, enter the number of the first page to
print on the From Page line. Type the number of the
last page to print on the Through Page line. The
page numbers specified refer to the page numbers
shown in the on-screen Page Number Indicator, not
the numbers in the header or footer. To print only the
current page, select Current.

Duplex printing
Which Pages: LeftlRight is used to print on both
sides of the page (duplex printing.) To do this:
~
~

~

Print all left pages (if the chapter begins on right
page)
Turn the paper over and re-insert in the paper tray
(insert a blank sheet after the last page, if necessary)
Print all right pages

The Configuration line shows which printer is
selected. To change printers, or to print to a file,
select the Set Printer Info option in the Options
menu. If Output To: Filename is selected in the Set
Printer Info option, then the Configuration line will
display the word Filename, and the Item Selector
appears as soon as you select OK. Type the name of
the print file you wish to create, and select OK.

5-20

REFERENCE GUIDE

To print

MENU COMMANDS

The Paper Tray option lets you select which paper
tray to use. Select Manual if you want to feed paper
manually, one page at a time.
The Multi-Chapter options, shown in gray, are only
used in the Multi-Chapter Print option, and are not
used in the To Print option.
~

To stop a print operation in progress, press Esc.
Printing stops after the current page is printed.

Crop marks
To place camera crop marks around the edge of the
page, select Crop Marks On.

Large page printing
If Double is selected in the page layout option, a
Dialog Box appears which gives you three choices:
Shrink, Overlap, and Nothing. Choose Shrink if you
want to reduce the 11 x 17 page to fit on an 8 1;2 X 11
sheet. (This option os only available with PostScript
printers.) Choose Overlap if you want to print four
8 1;2 x 11 pages which can later be pasted together to
form one 11 x 17 page. Choose Nothing if your printer
can actually print an 11 x 17 page.
If Broadsheet is selected, you can also Shrink, or you

can print in strips. Printing in strips prints three
strips each 24 inches long. Note: Printing in strips is
used with typesetting machines only and is not intended for use with laser printers.

REFERENCE GUIDE

5-21

MENU COMMANDS

DOS file operations

DOS file operations

DOS FI LE OP ERATI OMS
File Spec: (:,*.I~l-_ _ _ _- - - - Operation:

I Select
I Delete

Figure 5-5

I
I

Different File Specification

lliake Directory I I Renove Directory
Hatching File(s)

I

DOS File Operations Dialog Box

Description
DOS File Operations lets you delete files, and
make and delete DOS directories.
Application
• Delete files before quitting from Xerox Ventura
Publisher, if you run out of room on your hard
disk while attempting to save a style sheet or
chapter.
• Create a subdirectory if you decide to save
style sheets or chapters in a new DOS subdirectory.

Delete files

To delete a file or files, select the DOS File Operations option in the File menu (Figure 5-5.) Then,
type the file name to delete (including DOS wildcard
characters) directly on the File Spec: line, including
the subdirectory, if any. Then, select Delete Match5-22

REFERENCE GUIDE

MENU COMMANDS

DOS file operations

ing File(s) to delete all files matching the File Spec.
Alternatively, you can select Operation: Select Different File Specification. The Item Selector appears and you can select the file to delete.
Make directory
To create a new directory:
~ Type the new directory name, including disk drive
and any parent directories, directly on the File
Spec line.
~ Select Make Directory.
For instance, to make a new sub-directory called
STYSHET under the directory called TYPESET, type
the following:
C:\TYPESET\STYSHET

Select Make Directory.

Operation-Delete directory
To delete a directory:
~

~

Type the directory name, including disk drive and
any parent directories, directly on the File Spec
line.
Select Delete Directory.

For instance, to delete a sub-directory called CHAP1,
type the following on the File Spec line C:\CHAPI.
Then, select Remove Directory.
All files must be removed from the directory before
the directory can be removed.
~

REFERENCE GUIDE

For all DOS file operations, no operation is performed
if the file is write-protected or if the directory or file
selected does not exist.

5-23

Quit

MENU COMMANDS

Quit
Description
The Quit option ends the current Xerox Ventura
Publisher session and returns you to DOS.

Application
• Move to other programs to do wordprocessing,
line art design, and image editing. When you
use Xerox Ventura Publisher the next time,
any changes made by these other programs to
text, image, or line art files will automatically
appear in your chapter.

Operation
Select Quit in the File menu. If you have made changes to your chapter or style sheet since they were last
saved, Xerox Ventura Publisher asks:

Save or Abandon changes to this chapter?
Save, Abandon, Don't Quit.

Select Save to save the changes before quitting;
select Abandon to throwaway any changes made;
select Don't Quit to continue editing.
When you Quit from Xerox Ventura Publisher, the
current Function, View, and Options settings are all
saved. When you next use Xerox Ventura Publisher,
you resume with the same settings that were in effect at the end ofthe previous session. These settings
are saved in the VP.INF file in the VENTURA subdirectory.

5-24

REFERENCE GUIDE

~

EDIT MENU

MENU COMMANDS

EDIT MENU

Cut T~xt
Cory T~xt

Paste Text

n~l
tn~l

Ins

Insert Footnote
Insert/Edit Index",
Insert/Edit Anchor .. , I
•••••••••••••••••••••••• 1

R~ROIJ~ T~xt!f il~, »
fil~ T ~!R~;1
This entry is placed into the final index as follows:
REFERENCE GUIDE

5-33

MENU COMMANDS

Insert/edit index

M

Motion Picture
See Movies

Movie Technologies
Sound

4-12,4-15 - 4-18

3-D

4-34, 5-33

Wide screen 4-25,5-15
See Also Technology
Note that multiple index entries result in multiple
chapter and page references, separated by commas.
If these entries appear on consecutive pages, the
starting and ending pages are shown, separated by a
dash.

Operation-See, See also
If See is selected, the index entry is placed in the alphabetically correct location in the index according to
the Primary Entry, and the word See is placed in
front of the Secondary Entry. The See entry does not
generate a page or chapter number. See Also works
like See, except the words See Also are added to the
front of the reference.
Since See and See Also do not generate chapter or
page references, their locations within a chapter or
publication do not matter. It is recommended that all
See and See Also references be grouped together at
the beginning or end of a chapter. This lets you add
and delete these cross-references without searching
for them.

Operation-Editing index entries
Index entries can be edited by placing the text cursor
at the location ofthe entry. The Current Selection Indicator displays the word Index if the cursor is
properly placed. If you then select the InsertlEdit
Index option in the Edit menu, the dialog box which
appears will display the current index entry. Make
5-34

REFERENCE GUIDE

MENU COMMANDS

Insert/edit index

whatever changes you desire, and then select OK. To
delete this index entry:
~
~
~

Select OK or Cancel to clear the dialog box from
the screen
Check to make sure the word Index is still in the
Current Selection Indicator
Press the Del key.

Index entries placed at the beginning of the
paragraph are placed before the first character position in the paragraph. Therefore to edit or delete an
index entry at the beginning of the paragraph, use
the keyboard cursor keys to move the cursor to the
left until the word INDEX appears in the Current
Selection Indicator.
Index generation is an art, far beyond the scope of
this manual. In general, it is a good idea to insert
more than one reference, using synonyms, at especially important points in a manual. Since an index
can be inserted within your wordprocessor (see Appendix D), you can search for every occurrence of a
word or phrase and insert an index entry. However,
this technique should be used with caution, since it
typically results in many meaningless references.
The best indexes are those which index concepts as
well as words, and which provide many synonym
references to the same point.

REFERENCE GUIDE

5-35

MENU COMMANDS

Insert/edit anchor

Insert/edit anchor

REMOUE FILE
File Nane: NOZZLE ,GE~
RenolJe fron:

List of Files
OK

Figure 5-8

I

Frane

I

I Cancel I

Insert/Edit Anchor Dialog Box

Description
The InsertlEdit Anchor option lets you place a
frame anchor into text placed in the underlying page.
Any time the Re-Anchor Frames command is executed, the referenced frame is automatically moved
to the same page as the text anchor.

Application
• Insert a location in text to which frames will
be anchored.

Operation
Place the text cursor where you wish to insert an
anchor point and then select the InsertlEdit
Anchor option. The InsertlEditAnchor Dialog Box
shown in figure 5-8 appears. Type the name of the
frame you wish to reference. The name must match
the name entered in the Anchors & Captions
Dialog box. If it doesn't, an error message appears
during the Re-Anchor Frames operation.

5-36

REFERENCE GUIDE

Insert/edit anchor

MENU COMMANDS

The frame can be placed either before or after the line
which contains the frame anchor. If Fixed, On Same
Page As Anchor is chosen, the frame's position on a
new page is identical to its position on the old page.
~

REFERENCE GUIDE

Always check each page after you Re-Anchor Frames
to make sure that no frames have been pushed off the
edge of the page, and that no frames overlap.

5-37

MENU COMMANDS

Remove text/file

Remove text/file

REMOVE FILE
File Nane: NOZZLE .GE~
Renave fran: List of Files

I Frane I

I Cancel I

OK

Figure 5-9

Remove File Dialog Box

Description
Remove TextlFile completely removes a file and its
contents from a frame or the Assignment List. The
file is not deleted from disk. (Use Delete Matching
Files in the DOS Files Operations option to delete
files from disk.)
Application
• Remove TextlFile (from list of files) is used
when the wrong file has been placed in a chapter.
• Remove TextlFile (From frame) is used to
create an empty frame. This is useful when
you have set a frame's margins, columns,
ruling lines, background pattern, etc., and you
want to use Copy Frame and Paste Frame to
create additional frames with these identical
settings, but with nothing in them.
Operation
To remove a file name from either the list of files in
the Assignment List or from a frame or page:

5-38

REFERENCE GUIDE

Remove text/file

MENU COMMANDS
~

Activate the Frame Setting function.
Select the frame whose contents you wish to
remove.
~ Select Remove Text/File in the Edit menu. The
Dialog Box shown in Figure 5-9 appears.
~ To remove the file from both the frame and from
the list of files in the Assignment List, select
Remove from List of Files
~ To remove the file from the frame or page only, but
keep the file name in the Assignment List, select
Remove from Frame.

~

~

It is a good idea to remove excess files from the Assignment List, since excess files slow down the time
it takes to open a chapter. Also, all text files in the
Assignment List are loaded into memory, whether or
not they are placed anywhere in the chapter.

You can place a file into a frame which already contains a text or picture file by selecting the frame and
then selecting a file from the Assignment List. A
Remove from Frame operation is automatically
performed on the file already in the frame.

REFERENCE GUIDE

5-39

MENU COMMANDS

File type/rename

File type/rename
FILE TYPE / RENAME
Old Nallle: C:\TYPESET\BOOK,TXT_ _ _ _ _ __
Enter new text file
name on this line

New Nallle: C:\TYPESET\NEWBO~, TXT_ _ _ _ __
Text Forlllat: I Generated I . . I WordStar US I I MultiMate I

I MHord I I Writer US I I WordPerfect I
I WordStar UK I I Writer G·1 I I XyWrite I []ill

Figure 5-10 File Type/Rename Dialog Box. A new
file called NEWBOOK. TXT will be created the next
time the chapter is saved.
Description

I

File Type/Rename lets you change the name of any
text file placed in a frame or page.

Application
• Assign a new name to the text file. The next
time the chapter is saved, a new text file is
created. The file with the old name remains
unchanged.
• Convert from one wordprocessor format to
another. This option lets you use text files
from several wordprocessors, and yet save
each file in a common format.
• Convert caption frames to text files.

Operation

> Enable the Frame Setting function.
> Select the page or frame which contains the text
file to be renamed or converted.
REFERENCE GUIDE

File type/rename

MENU COMMANDS
~

~
~

Select the File TypelRename option in the Edit
menu. The dialog box shown in Figure 5-10 appears.
Enter the new file name on the New Name: line
Select the wordprocessor format to be used.

When the chapter is next saved, a new text file is
created, and the chapter will then point to this new
file instead of the old file. The old text file remains
unchanged.
~

A new file is not actually created until the chapter is
saved.
If you select a frame which contains a caption, then
you will not only change the file name and file type,
but will also cause the text to be stored in a separate
file rather than in the chapter's caption (CAP) file.

REFERENCE GUIDE

5-41

MENU COMMANDS

VIEW MENU

VIEWMENU

Reduced View
AR
NorAal View (1x) AN
Enlarged View (2x) AE

Figure 5-11

View Menu

Description
The View menu provides four different ways to
present the chapter on your computer screen:
•
•
•
•

Facing Pages View
Reduced View
Normal Page View (IX)
Enlarged View (2X)

It also provide an alternative way to enable each of
the four major functions when the Side-bar is hidden.

Application
• Check the overall layout of a page.
• Place frames (easier when you can see the
whole page)

Operation
Select the desired option in the View menu (Figure 5U.) Views can also be selected from the keyboard by
pressing a combination of the Ctrl key and one of the
following keys:
5-42

REFERENCE GUIDE

VIEW MENU

MENU COMMANDS

View

Key

Reduced View
Normal View
Enlarged View

R
N
E

Normal Page View is used to edit and read text. This
view provides the most accurate view of the final
printed page. Use Enlarged View to check picture
details and graphic placement. Use reduced view to
place frames and check overall layout.
In reduced view and facing pages view, text which is
too small to be read on the screen is "greeked," meaning that a line of the appropriate height and length
replaces the actual text. Greeking decreases the time
needed to redraw the page on the screen. You can set
the size of text to be greeked in the Set Preferences
option in the Options menu.
When changing to a more magnified view, you can
zoom into a specific area of the page as follows:
~

Place the mouse cursor at the spot which will be
the upper left corner of the more magnified view.
~ Use the keyboard shortcuts shown above to
change view

~

In Facing Pages View, you cannot drag frames from
one page to another. Use Cut, Copy, Paste instead.
Facing Pages View is only available when Double
Sided printing is enabled in the Page Layout option.
To enable any of the four Xerox Ventura Publisher
functions, select the appropriate option in the View
menu, or press a combination ofthe Ctrl key and one
of the following keys:

Function
Frame Setting
Paragraph Tagging
Text Editing . .
Graphic Drawing .
REFERENCE GUIDE

Key

U
I

o
P
5-43

MENU COMMANDS

PAGE MENU

PAGEMENU

agl! layout ...
Widows &Orphans ...
Chaptl!r Countl!r ...
Pagl! Countl!r .. .
Auto-Nunbl!ring .. .
R(!mmU(!f ChTimes: at the appropriate level.

5-60

REFERENCE GUIDE

MENU COMMANDS

Renumber chapter

Renumber chapter
Description
Renumber Chapter updates the numbering of
paragraphs defined in the Auto-Numbering option.
Application
• Renumber the entire chapter according to the
Auto-numbering settings

Operation
Select Renumber Chapter in the Page menu, or press
and hold the Ctrl key and then press B. The entire
chapter is immediately renumbered. Select Renumber Chapter any time you want to update section
numbering. Removing or retagging section numbered paragraphs also requires that you renumber
the chapter.
~

Section numbers are not added, deleted or modified
during text editing. You must Renumber Chapter to
update section numbers.
Section numbers are not saved in the text file. Instead, they are regenerated each time the chapter is
loaded.

REFERENCE GUIDE

5-61

Re-anchor frames

MENU COMMANDS

Re-anchor frames
Description
Re-Anchor Frames moves every frame in the chapter to the page on which its anchor appears. A frame
is not moved if no anchor has been set for it in the
Anchors & Caption option, or if the anchor name set
for the frame does not match any anchor name in the
text.
Application
• Move frames to anchor points in the text

Operation
If the frame anchor name specified in the Anchors &
Captions pption matches a frame anchor name in the
text, the frame moves to a new location when Re- I
anchor Frames is selected.
To operate:
~

Select the Re-Anchor Frames option in the Page
menu.
~ A Dialog Box appears. Choose whether you want
to re-anchor only the frames on this page, or all the
frames in this chapter.
~ Go to each page to make sure that frames have
been moved to a desireable location.
If frames are anchored above or below a point in the
text, and that text is currently at the top or bottom of
the page, the re-anchor operation will move those
frames into the upper and lower margins. These
frames must be re-Iocated manually, as described in
the Functions chapter, after the re-anchor operation.
If the anchor name in the text does not match the
anchor name given to the frame, Xerox Ventura
5-62

REFERENCE GUIDE

Re-anchor frames

MENU COMMANDS

Publisher displays a message on the screen during
the re-anchor process. You can then correct the name
of the anchor in the text before the re-anchor process
continues.

REFERENCE GUIDE

5-63

Headers & footers

MENU COMMANDS

Headers & footers
HEIlDERS I FOOTERS

Define: 1 Left Page Header 1 Rlght PJgc HCJdcr
1 Left Page Footer 1 "1Rl""ig~ht:-1P;-ag--e"'Fo--o::-te"'r1
Usage: III I]ff]
Left: [Page IU]-[P"I _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Right: 1[- Select the frame
>- Select Hide This

Repeating Frame in the
Repeating Frame option.

To restore this frame to view:

>- Select Show This Repeating Frame. Once you
select another frame, however, you must select
Show All ffidden Frames to make all hidden
repeating frames on the current page reappear. •
You can then selectively re-hide any repeating ~
frame on the current page that you don't wish to
see.

To remove a repeating frame from the entire chapter:

>- Select the repeating frame
>- Select For All Pages: Offin the Repeating Frame
option.
The frame is removed from every page except the current page. Since this is now a normal frame, you can
remove it from the page using the Cut option in the
Edit menu.

5-90

REFERENCE GUIDE

MENU COMMANDS

Repeating frame

Operation-Large headers/footers
To create a header larger than allowed by the Header
& Footer function or create a multi-column header:
~
~

~
~

Turn Headers off
Place a frame at the top of a page
Type the header desired directly into this frame.
Make this frame a repeating frame.

The same technique works for footers. Page numbers, however, can only be placed in a header or footer
created with the Headers & Footers function.

Operation-Create more columns per page
Repeating frames can be used to automatically
create a large document which contains more
columns per page than Xerox Ventura Publisher can
normally handle. To do this:
~

Set the number of columns in the underlying page
to at least two columns
~ Place a text file in the underlying page
~ Draw a frame. Snap the frame to the top, bottom
and both sides of one of the column guides, so that
one column is completely covered.
~ Set the number of columns in the selected frame
~ Place the same text file into this frame
~ Select Repeating Frame and make this frame
repeat on both left and right pages
On each page, the text will flow from the underlying
page first and into the repeating frame second.
If you create several repeating frames, and set more
than one column in each frame, you can create documents with more than eight columns.
~

REFERENCE GUIDE

Do not completely cover the underlying page with
repeating frames when using this technique. Some
text must still flow into the underlying page.
5-91

MENU COMMANDS

Anchors & caption settings

Anchors & caption settings

ANCHORS & CAPTIONS
Anchor: NozzleL--Caption: [][] I Aboue I

DIll

QillJ []!ili]

Label: Figure [C#]-[F#l _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Inserts: I Table # II Figure #11 Chapter # II Text Attr. I

Figure 5-39

Anchors & Caption Setting Dialog Box

Description
The Anchors & Caption Settings option lets you:
• Assign an anchor name to a frame
• Attach a caption frame to the left, right, above,
or below any given frame. The caption can consist of either automatically generated text or
manually entered text.
Two different caption counters-a Table counter and
a Figure counter-can be used to number captions.
These counters are automatically updated as captions are added and deleted. (See the Table
Counter/Figure Counter sections.)
All captions for a chapter are stored in a caption file
which can later be edited and checked for spelling errors using the ASCII text function of a standard
wordprocessor. Be careful not to change the number
of paragraphs, or text will appear in the wrong captions.

5-92

REFERENCE GUIDE

I

Anchors & caption settings

MENU COMMANDS

Application
• Create captions for pictures
• Automatically generate figure/table numbers
• Anchor a picture to a location in the text

Operation-Anchor
Type the anchor name you wish to assign to a frame
on the Anchor line. This name must match the
anchor name inserted into the text. Whenever the
Re-Anchor Frame command is executed, this frame
will be moved to the page that contains the corresponding anchor reference in the text.

Operation-Generated caption
To create a caption:
~
~

~
~

~

Select the frame which is to be captioned
Select the Caption option in the Frame menu
Choose whether the caption is to be placed above,
below, to the left or right of the frame.
Type the desired caption on the label line.
Select the Table #, Figure #, or Chapter # options
at any point that you want to insert an automatically updated number. Selecting these options
places the following codes on the label line:

Inserts

Code

Table #
Figure #
Chapter #

[T#]
[F#]
[C#]

These codes generate table, figure, or chapter numbers. You can use either the table or figure number
(not both) plus chapter number in each caption.
For example, if the caption setting shown in Figure
5-39 were the sixth caption in the fifth chapter, and
the previous four captions all specified the [F#]
figure counter, this caption would display as:
REFERENCE GUIDE

5-93

MENU COMMANDS

II

Anchors & caption settings

II

Figure 5-6

Once the caption frame is attached, it always moves
with the original frame, even when using Cut, Copy,
or Paste. The caption frame can be sized independently from the original frame. To remove a caption, select the frame and tum Position: Off.
~

If no text appears in the caption frame, enable the
Frame Setting Function, select the caption frame,
and make this frame longer until the caption appears. Then enable the Paragraph Tagging function,
select the caption, and adjust the above, below, and
in from left/right space as necessary.

Operation-Free-form caption
If you make the caption frame longer, and if you
select Show Tabs and Returns in the Set Preferences option, you will notice an end of file mark in the
caption frame, next to or below the caption. Select the
Text Editing function and place the text cursor
directly in front ofthis paragraph mark. You can then
type additional text directly into the caption frame in
exactly the same manner as you would add text to
any other frame in the chapter. By making the caption frame larger, this free-form caption can be made
very long.

The text for all captions in the chapter is saved in a
caption file which is automatically created when the
chapter is saved and given the same name as the
chapter, but with the extension CAP. The caption file
is an ASCII text file which can be edited with a
wordprocessor or checked with a spelling checker.

Advanced operation
Two tags are automatically generated the first time
you add a caption to a frame within a chapter: One
5-94

REFERENCE GUIDE

Anchors & caption settings

MENU COMMANDS

for the generated caption (the part entered from the
Dialog Box) and one for the free-form caption. These
tag names are Z_LABEL FIG, and Z_CAPTION.
These names cannot be changed.
The basic attributes for these tags are copied from
Body Text, although some changes in the Alignment
settings are made (e.g., Z_LABEL FIG is centered.)
You can change ,both caption tags so that free form
captions are placed on the same line as generated
captions. To do this, change the generated
caption's tag attributes to:
Font
Line Break
Alignment
Spacing
Ruling Lines Above
Ruling Lines Below

Same as
free form caption
Before
Left
No space below
(As desired)
None

Change the free-form caption's tag attributes to:
Font
Break
Alignment

Spacing
Ruling Lines Above
Ruling Lines Below

Same as
generated caption
After
Indent relative
to previous line
plus 1 pica
No space above
None
(As desired)

The figure captions in this document consist of two
parts: The words "Figure 5-39" are created in the caption Dialog Box, and the remaining text is entered as
a free form caption.

REFERENCE GUIDE

5-95

Table counter/figure counter

MENU COMMANDS

Table counter/figure counter

TABLE (OUmR

Restart (ounting: . . [!]
With !Wilber: 88261

!WRber ForRat: _

[gJ [JJJ []JIJ [bill

[]M;"]iiQJ ~ lone, two I

Figure 5-40

Table / Figure Counter Dialog Box

Description
The Table Counter sets the table numbering style
to arabic numbers (1, 2, 3, ... ), roman numerals, letters (A, B, C, ... ) and text (One, Two, Three, .... ) It can
also force the table numbering to start at a new number.
The table counter and figure counter work in
the same way. The only difference is that the Table
Counter affects captions that are numbered with
Table H, whereas the Figure Counter affects captions
numbered with Figure H. The phrase Table Counter
is used throughout this section, but the same comments apply to the Figure Counter.
Application
• Set numbering style
• Start numbering captions at a number other
than one.

5-96

REFERENCE GUIDE

Table counter/figure counter

MENU COMMANDS

Operation
To start numbering the first table with a number
other than one:

> Select the Table Counter option in the Page menu
> Select YES next to Restart Counting. The words

>

With Number: change from gray to black and a
text cursor appears immediately to their right.
Enter the starting table number.

To select a different number format, select the Number Format desired.
Restart Counting always restarts the counter to the
same number, even if the frame is cut and moved to
another location in the chapter.

REFERENCE GUIDE

5-97

MENU COMMANDS

Vertical rules

Vertical rules
UERTICAL RUlES

Settings For: ' • • I Right Page
Inter· Col. Rules: •

I

[]ill Width: 00.5_

Rule 1 Position: O2.BO inches
Rule 1 Width: 02. DB fractional pts
Rule 2 Position: OUII
Rule 2 Width: DB. iii!
Inserts:

Figure 5-41

I COP? To Facing Pm I

Vertical Rules Dialog Box

Description
The Vertical Rules option lets you place ruling lines
between each column on either left pages, right
pages, or both pages. In addition, vertical rules can
be placed between columns of text within any frame.
Up to two vertical rules can be placed anywhere
within a page or within a frame.

Application
• Place rules between columns
• Place rules at edge of page or column (e.g., the
vertical rule on this page)

Operation

>- Select the frame in which you want to place vertical rules.
the Vertical Rules option in the Frame
menu (Figure 5-41.)
>- Choose whether you want the rules placed on the
left or on the right page.

>- Select

5-98

REFERENCE GUIDE

I

MENU COMMANDS

Vertical rules

+--

Vertical Rule
Placement Measured
From Edge Of

....----.1..----...,
Vertical
Rule
Within
Frame

Page

Figure 5-42 Vertical Rule placement is measured
from edge ofpage, not edge of Frame
~

Turn inter-column Rules On and set the intercolumn Rules Width to place ruling lines between
each column.
~ Enter Rule Width and the Rule Position for Rule 1
and/or Rule 2. The Rule Position is measured from
the left edge of the physical page, not the edge of
the frame. It is independent of margin settings.
~

The dimensions for all vertical rule widths are set by
changing Rule 1 's width.
Ifthe same settings are desired for the opposite page
(when Double sided is selected in Page Layout),
choose Copy to Facing Page. If different settings
are desired for the opposite page, select Settings
For: the opposite page, and enter the opposite page
vertical rule information as described above.

~

If you don't immediately see a vertical rule within a
frame, the frame is probably in the wrong position on
the page relative to the rule. (See Figure 5-42.)
Frame-wide paragraphs interrupt vertical rules.
Column-wide paragraphs do not.

REFERENCE GUIDE

5-99

MENU COMMANDS

Ruling lines

Ruling lines

RULlIUi LINES ABOIJE
Width:

I Hone I [ill[] I Margin I !1iliiiiiJ

I11III I tusta~ I

(alar: [J!6lli] IIi!!D []ill I 'reen II Blue I[ill!] I Yellow I[]illlli]
Pattern: IT]
Space Above
Height of
Space Below
Height of
Space Below
Height of

rn rn rn rn rn rn IlmII

Rule
Rule
Rule
Rule
Rule
Rule

1:
1:
1:
2:
2:
J:

Space Below Rule J: 00. BB
Overall Height: 27. jjjj

Figure 5-43

I Dashes OFF I

116.
07 •D2
04.98
04.82
03.08
01.98

a c::J
Measurement
Units

Ruling Lines Dialog Box

Description
Up to three ruling lines, each of different thickness
and with different spacing between each rule, can be
placed above, below, or around a frame or the underlying page. Texture and color can be assigned to each
set of ruling lines.
All three Ruling Lines menus function the same
way.
Application
• Isolate text or pictures from the surrounding
text.
Operation
~

Activate the Frame Setting function.
Select the frame.
~ Select the appropriate ruling line option (Above,
Below, or Box Around.)
~

5-100

REFERENCE GUIDE

Ruling lines

MENU COMMANDS

~

Select Frame to enable this ruling line.
Select the ruling line Color and Pattern. The same
color and pattern is assigned to all three rules.
~ Enter the appropriate ruling line height, as well as
space between each ruling line, for each of the
three rules.
~ If you wish to make dashed rules, turn dashes on,
and then select the width of the dash and the space
between each dash. Note: Xerox Ventura
Publisher cannot display or print thick dashed
rules. If dashes do not display on the screen,
reduce the ruling line thickness.
~

The ruling lines are immediately shown to aid in
determining the proper line thicknesses and spacing.
The total height and space between all ruling lines is
shown on the Overall Height line. Keep changing
the thicknesses and spacing until you are satisfied.
The dimensions for all settings can be changed
among inches, centimeters, picas & points, and fractional points. To change to a different unit of
measurement, point to the measurement units and
press the mouse button once. When setting in picas
& points, remember that, three picas, twelve points
(i.e., 3,12) is equivalent to four picas (4,00.) Measurement units in other Dialog Boxes can be changed in
a similar manner.
Note that the ruling line Overall Height is measured
from the edge ofthe frame and is independent of the
current frame margin s, ttings. Therefore, if the
frame top, bottom and side margins are set to zero,
the ruling lines will overlap any text or pictures
placed inside the frame. Therefore, you may need to
increase the frame margins after adding ruling lines.

REFERENCE GUIDE

5-101

MENU COMMANDS

Frame background

Frame background

FRAME BACKGROUND
Color:

Pattern:

Result:

I White I I Black I ~ I Green I
I!1l!l!I ~ I Yellow I I Magenta I
I Hollow I D
m m m rn I Solid I

mm

. '.

.
~

:

OK

Figure 5-44

I Cancel I

Frame Background Dialog Box

Description

--~------------------------~

I

The Background option sets the frame background
color and texture.

Application
• Isolate a picture or text frame from the surrounding text.
• For printers that support white on black printing, the background can be set to black. (The
text within the frame is automatically set to
white.)

Operation

>- Activate the Frame Setting function and select the
frame.

>- Select the Background option in the Frame menu.
>- Select the color and pattern desired.

5-102

REFERENCE GUIDE

Frame background
~

MENU COMMANDS

Selecting a background pattern that is too dark may
make the printed output unreadable. For most applications, stay with the lightest patterns.
The background pattern fills the frame, minus:
• The space above the ruling line above
• The space below the ruling line below
• The space above the ruling box around.

REFERENCE GUIDE

5-103

PARAGRAPH MENU

MENU COMMANDS

PARAGRAPH MENU
••• 1

Font ...
Aligm1llmt .. .
Spacing .. .
Brl!aks .. .
Tab Sl!ttings ...
Spl!cial Effl!cts ...
T9Pographic Controls ...
Ruling Linl! AboVI! .. .
Ruling Linl! Bl!low .. .
Ruling BOK Around .. .

Figure 5-45

Paragraph Menu

The Paragraph Menu defines the individual Tags
(paragraph formats) contained within a style sheet.
These tags are used to change the text format for
each paragraph in a chapter.
Each tag defines a set of font, alignment, spacing,
breaks, tabs,special effects, typographic characteristics, and ruling lines for a paragraph. A collection of
tags, plus the current underlying page layout and
margin and column settings, is stored in a style
sheet. Xerox Ventura Publisher includes a series of
style sheets designed by typographers. (See Appendix L.) You can also create your own, as described in
the Training Guide.
~

Before any option in the Paragraph menu can be
selected, the Paragraph Tagging function must be
enabled and a paragraph selected.
The tag Body Text is reserved by Xerox Ventura
Publisher. While the characteristics of Body Text can

5-104

REFERENCE GUIDE

PARAGRAPH MENU

MENU COMMANDS

be changed, the name itself cannot be removed. All
text not formatted with a specific tag is automatically formatted as Body Text.
Note that before you can change a tag's attributes,
you must first select a paragraph that has been
tagged with this tag. This lets you see what the tag's
attributes currently look like, and also lets you see
the effect of any changes made.
~

Any attributes placed in the text using the Text Editing function take precedence over the paragraph tag.
Each option in the Paragraph menu is described on
the following pages.

REFERENCE GUIDE

5-105

MENU COMMANDS

Font

Font
"Body Text" FONT
:,:,:m

CustaR She:

ooa

Stule :mm ,:,: (alar i i
Light
White
II.m.
Nomal
Bold
Red
Htalic
Green
Blue
B·ltalic (yan
Yellow
Magenta

nail1ts

Shift: []Jl] [Jlillill] 0.000 il1ches
Km: 0,000

Figure 5-46 Font Dialog Box. Size option displays
the word Custom for PostScript printers; displays
discrete sizes for other printers.
Description
The Font option defines the typeface, type size, type
style (bold, italic), and color for each paragraph.

Application
• Set the font for each paragraph tag
• Change text to white to print white text on a
black background
• Change text to colors for color separations

Operation
To change a tag's font:

>- Select the

Font option in the Paragraph menu.
(The typefaces and fonts available depend on the
printer width table installed.)

5-106

REFERENCE GUIDE

MENU COMMANDS

Font

> Select the

desired typeface, size, style, and color.
The Font sizes are displayed in Points, where 72
points equals one inch. Ten and twelve points are
standard sizes for Body Text.

The paragraph selected, and all other paragraphs
tagged with the same tag will be formatted with the
new font. Note, however, that the paragraph font
does not override any font attributes placed in the
text using the Text Editing function.
For PostScript printers, select the size in points, on
the Custom Size line. (See Figure 5-46.) Any integer
size between 1 and 254 points is allowed. For other
printers, only certain font sizes are available, and the
Custom Size option is not available. Instead, select
one of the discrete sizes shown in the Size menu.
~

Depending on the printer installed, not all styles are
available for every typeface. Those selections not
available are "grayed out." For instance, with the HP
LaserJet Plus, Normal type is available for 10 point
Dutch (Times Roman) type, but is not available for 24
point Dutch (Times Roman.) You can add additional
fonts to overcome these limitations. Also, for PostScript printers, only the fonts actually installed in
your printer or on your computer's hard disk can be
printed. See Appendix K for more information.
If Auto Adjust Styles is set to Yes in the Set Preferences menu, changing the size of the font automatically changes the tag's spacing. For instance, changing
from 10 point to 18 point increases the tag's interline, inter-paragraph, above, and below spacing by a
factor of 1.8. If you want a different spacing, change
the inter-line space in the Paragraph Spacing option
after changing fonts.

Shift and Kern are only used when setting text attributes using the Set Font option in the Text Editing
function. They are therefore not available when
using the paragraph Font option.

REFERENCE GUIDE

5-107

MENU COMMANDS

Alignment

Alignment

"Body Text" ALIGNMENT
Alignl1lent: [Jill] ~

c::llililJ .IIAUml

I SPANISH I
Successive Hyphens: OJ 111 rn rn rn I Unlil1lited I
Overall Width: I,'bli,,,i/mrw I Fral1le' Wide I
First Line:
I Outdent I
Hyphenation: []ill

11~,u(n~':1

um

In/Outdent Width:
In/Outdent Height:
Relative Indent:

B1.B~ picas

BB1

&points

lines

lIm I Length

of Previous Line I

DO I Cancel I

Figure 5-47 Alignment Dialog Box. (Indent width
is set to one pica.)
Description
Alignment controls the way in which text lines up
within a column. The controls available include left,
center, right or justified alignment; hyphenation
on/off; first line indent/outdent; and column-wide or
frame-wide overall paragraph width.
Application
• Change from ragged right to fully justified and
hyphenated text.
• Center headlines.
• Force a paragraph to go across the entire
frame or page.
• Cause the first lines in a paragraph to be indented by either a fixed amount, or relative to
the length of the last line in the previous
paragraph.
• Create a lead-in paragraph.
5·108

REFERENCE GUIDE

i

Alignment

MENU COMMANDS

• Change hyphenation algorithms (allowing
simultaneous hyphenation in two languages
within the same document.)

Operation
To change a tag's alignment, select the Alignment option in the Paragraph menu. (See Figure 5-47.) Then
choose whether the text will be aligned with the left
or right column guide, centered within the column, or
justified.
Hyphenation can be turned on or off for any
paragraph tag. Select the language for which
hyphenation should be performed. (The default installation sets both hyphenation options to US
English.) The number oflines in a row which can be
hyphenated can be changed by the Successive
Hyphens control. A setting of 2, for instance, only allows two lines in a row to be hyphenated. See Appendix B for more information on hyphenation.
To override column settings and make a paragraph
print across the entire frame, select Frame-wide.
Text below a frame-wide paragraph continues in the
next column, below the frame-wide paragraph. Also,
if a paragraph in a column other than the left column
is made frame-wide, it prints over the paragraphs in
the left columns. Therefore, Column Balance should
always be turned on whenever frame-wide tags are
applied to paragraphs which are not at the top of the
frame. Frame-wide paragraphs interrupt vertical
rules.

First Line Indent/Outdent lets you force the first
line of a paragraph in or out from the left margin by
the space specified on the Fixed Indent line. For example, to select an indent of 0.1 inch, select First
Line Indent, Relative Indent None, and then
place the text cursor on the Fixed Indent line and
type 00.10. Make sure the measurement units are set
to inches.
REFERENCE GUIDE

5-109

MENU COMMANDS

Alignment

If you specifY a temporary indent using the In From
Left setting in the Spacing option, the Indent/Outdent is calculated from this temporary margin.
~

Do not use fixed indent in conjunction with right
aligned or centered text.

Relative Indent: Length of Previous Line adds a
first line indent to this paragraph exactly equal to the
length of the last line in the previous paragraph. To
use this feature, select Length of Previous Line. If
a Fixed Indent amount is specified, this adds a fixed
additional amount to the length of the previous line.
When used in conjunction with Paragraph Breaks,
this feature is useful to create lead-ins. (See the end
ofthe Breaks option in the Paragraph menu.)
Indent/Outdent Height lets you specify the number oflines for which the indent/outdent is to take effect. Normally, only the first line is indented or outdented, but you can indent any number of lines.
To indent the entire paragraph, use In From Left
spacing in the Spacing option instead.

5-110

REFERENCE GUIDE

Spacing

MENU COMMANDS

Spacing
"Bod~

Text" SPACIHfi

Above:
Belo,,:
Inter·line:
Inter· Paragraph:

01, DB picas & points
~O, DB
01,00 picas & points
B1,BB

Add in Above: [llilli]

When Not at ColuMn Top

Settings For: IIU.M I Right page I
In Froll Left: B2,BB picas
In Froll Right: B2', BB
Inserts:

a points

I COPY To Facing Page I

Figure 5-48 Spacing Dialog Box. Add in Above
When Not at Column Top means above space is not
added when paragraph is at top of column or page.
Description

I

The Spacing option controls the space between lines
and paragraphs, and sets temporary margins.

Application
Set temporary left and right margins (for
quotes, bullets, etc.)
• Create complementary left and right pages
• Set inter-line spacing (leading)
Operation-Vertical spacing
To change a tag's spacing:
.. Select the Spacing option in the Paragraph menu .
.. Enter the values for above, below, inter-line and
inter-paragraph spacing. The option Add in
Above: When Not at Column Top suppresses
REFERENCE GUIDE

5-111

MENU COMMANDS

Spacing

.......................................................................................... ... _----.
........ "." ........ " ...... " ...... " ..... ".' .... " .......... ' ........

.-----------4iA4~-----------

~:::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::
~::::::

~I: :·: : ·: : ·: : ·: : : : : i ,:·: : ·: : ·: : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : :1

,.......................................
................................ .........
..... ...
"., ,

,•.........................................
.........................................

~::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::
~:::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::
~::::::::

~:::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::
~:::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::
~:::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::

:::::]: ::

Figure 5-49

Complementary left and right pages

any above space when the paragraph begins a new
column.
Inter-line spacing sets the space between the base of
the characters on one line and the base of the characters on the following line (Figure 5-50)-what typographers call "leading" (pronounced led-ing.) While
inter-line spacing may be set to any value you desire,
typesetting aesthetics usually allow a certain

Inter-line spacing

Inter-paragraph spacing

{

~ow is the time
"""""""---Tor all good men
- - t o come to the
--aid of their country

{

--The quick brown fox
jumped over the lazy
dog.

Figure 5-50

5-112

Paragraph vertical space

REFERENCE GUIDE

MENU COMMANDS

Spacing

amount of spacing between lines, depending on the
font size selected. A good rule of thumb is that interline spacing should be roughly 1.2 times the font size.
Thus, a tag with 10 point type should have 12 point
inter-line spacing. Increase the inter-line spacing
when using wide columns, or single column formats.

Above and Below space adds additional space between paragraphs tagged with different tags. Interparagraph adds space between paragraphs tagged
with the same tag. Think of inter-paragraph as the
space you want to place between similar paragraphs,
and above or below as the minimum acceptable space
between this paragraph and a paragraph with a different tag.
Ifinter-paragraph space is even slightly different for
each paragraph, then no inter-paragraph space is
added. To judge whether two paragraphs contain
precisely identical inter-paragraph spacing, change
the measurement system for inter-line and interparagraph to fractional points. This unit of measurement provides the greatest precision.
~

Suggestion: For most documents, set both Above
and Below to the space between paragraphs and set
Inter-paragraph to zero.
The total space between paragraphs is controlled by
inter-line, above, below, and ruling line space.
The spacing between any two paragraphs equals (see
Figure 5-51):
• The greater of
The first paragraph's below space and the
overall ruling height below or around or
The second paragraph's above space and the
overall ruling height above or around

plus

REFERENCE GUIDE

5-113

MENU COMMANDS

Spacing

Spacing Between Paragraphs is The Greater Of
I

j

j

Second Paragraph Above
plus
Overall Ruling Line Above. J
plusL
Inter-paragraph*
plusl'
First Paragraph Inter-line

]

First Paragraph Below
plus
~ Overall Ruling Line Below
plus
Inter-paragraph*
plus
First Paragraph Inter-line

Inter-paragraph spacing only
added if the inter-paragraph
spacing for both paragraphs is
exactly identical

Figure 5-51

Space between paragraphs

• The inter-paragraph space, if the interparagraph space is identical for both
paragraph tags
plus
• The first paragraph's inter-line space
~

5-114

If you inadvertently set spacing in inches instead of
fractional points, you may set spacing which is
greater than the page length. When you press Page
Down, the page counter begins counting and will
never stop. To fix, press ESC to stop the formatting,
and then press HOME. If the paragraph tag name is
still shown in the Current Selection indicator, you
can simply change the spacing settings. If the
paragraph tag is not shown, then you must use the
Remove option to delete the tag.

REFERENCE GUIDE

~

MENU COMMANDS

Spacing

Multiple column spacing
To assure that text in adjacent columns aligns, the
total vertical space for every tag in a multi-column
style sheet should always equal an integer multiple
(e.g., 1, 2, 3, ... ) of Body Text's inter-line spacing.
To assure that adjacent columns of Body Text always
align when designing a multi-column style sheet, follow these rules for each tag:
~

~
~

~

Set inter-line spacing to an integral multiple of
Body Text's inter-line spacing.
Set inter-paragraph spacing to an integral multiple of Body Text's inter-line spacing.
Set above space plus overall ruling line height
above to an integral multiple of Body Text's interline spacing.
Set below space plus overall ruling line height
below to an integral multiple of Body Text's interline spacing.

The style sheets in Appendix L provide examples of
how to set tag spacing.

In From Left
Margin is
Measured
From
Column Edge

Figure 5-52

REFERENCE GUIDE

In from left setting

5·115

MENU COMMANDS

Spacing

Operation-Temporary margins
A temporary margin is set by In From Left and In
From Right. In From Left and In From Right refer
to the distance towards the center of the column from
the column edges. (See Figure 5-52.) Ruling Lines
which are set to Margin Width are affected by this
setting. In From Left and In From Right can be set
differently for Left and Right pages. To enter different settings for each page, first select Left Page
and enter its In From Left/Right settings, then
repeat for the Right Page. The In From LeftlRight
settings can be copied to the opposite page at any
time by selecting Copy To Facing Page.
Note that the Settings For: Left PagelRight Page
option only applies to In From Left and In From
Right, not to the rest of the Spacing option.

5-116

REFERENCE GUIDE

Breaks

MENU COMMANDS

Breaks
"Bod, Text" BREAKS
Page Break:

IlII

[]iliii] I After I I Before

aAfter I

I Before/Until Left I I Before/Until Right I
ColulII1 Break: IlII I Before I I After I I Before a After I
Line Break: []!J IIlII'mI Cillru I Before aAfter I
Next YPosition: . . . I Beside Last Line of Prevo Para I
Alloll Within: _
Keep Wi th Next: [!ru

[]!J

IlII

Figure 5-53 Breaks Dialog Box. These are the appropriate settings for most tags.
Description
A Break is an interruption in the flow of text between paragraphs. Mter a break, the next paragraph
can begin on a new line (line break), at the top of a
new column (column break), at the top of a new page
or frame (page break), or at the top of the next left or
right page or frame (page break before/until
left/right.)
In addition, the break can occur either before, after,
or both before and after the paragraph. For instance,
selecting page break before and after causes any
paragraph formatted with this tag to start at the top
of a new page, and to be the only paragraph on that
page.

Allow Within controls whether or not line breaks
are allowed within the paragraph. When Allow
Within is set to No, the paragraph does not split between two pages.

REFERENCE GUIDE

5-117

Breaks

MENU COMMANDS

Keep With Next forces the selected paragraph to always appear on the same page as the next paragraph. This feature is very- useful for headings.
Application
•
•
•
•

Vertical tabs
Outdented heading
Paragraph lead-ins
Page breaks

Operation
To change paragraph breaks, select the Breaks op-

tion in the Paragraph menu (see Figure 5-53.) Select
the appropriate options and then select OK.
Each break further down the. Dialog Box is overridden by the break shown immediately above (e.g., if
both Page Break Before and Column Break
Before are selected, only Page Break Before takes
effect.)
If no break of any type is set between two paragraphs, the second paragraph begins on the first
line of the previous paragraph if Next Y Position is
set to Normal. You should increase the second
paragraph tag's In From Left spacing to keep the two
paragraphs from overlapping.
If no break of any type is set between two paragraphs, the second paragraph begins on the same
line as the last line of the previous paragraph if
Next Y Position: Beside Last Line of Previous
Paragraph is selected.

5-118

REFERENCE GUIDE

Breaks

MENU COMMANDS

Example
The following "paragraph" is actually two different
paragraphs. The first paragraph-The style sheet
examples-is formatted with Line Break Before.
The second paragraph (the remainder of the text) is
formatted with line break after and indent relative to
previous line.
This is a
separate
paragraph

L.:-----'--"--'-"--'--'---=c...:..,:.-=-....:..:....--="'_le-"--sceJin Appendix L show how
tag options can be combined together.
Most paragraphs in the style sheets supplied use line
break before. However, if you change Body Text to
Line Break After in order to place lead-ins or section numbers on the same line, as in the example
paragraph above, You may find that text sometimes
overlaps the previous paragraph during text editing.
To fix this problem, change the other tags in the style
sheet to line break after.
The chapters in the TYPESET directory and the applications shown in Appendix M provide examples of
how to combine Breaks with other paragraph attributes to create effects such as vertical tabs, outdented headings, paragraph lead-ins, and page
breaks.

REFERENCE GUIDE

5-119

MENU COMMANDS

Tab settings

Tab settings
"UAPTION" TAB SETTINGS
Tab NUJllber: •
If tab stop is turned

m rn m m m rn rn

mooDIlm:JmJD!lmJOO
I!mI ~ I Right I I DeciJllal1

off, no tab will show

Tab T9pe: []ill

I Shown as Open Space I

Shown as Leader Char

OJ.D~ inches

Tab location is
measured from left
edge of the column

Leader Char:

Uillill •

Leader Spacing: []]

OJ II

D

[]!§£!J 046 (ASCill

rn rn IT] rn rn rn
[][] I Cancel I

Figure 5-54 Tab Settings Dialog Box. First tab stop
set to 3 inches from left margin, with dot leader
turned on, left aligned. Two spaces will be placed between each leader dot.
Description
Horizontal Tabs are used to align text or numbers.
Whenever a horizontal tab character is encountered
in the text, Xerox Ventura Publisher positions the
next character at the next tab location. Up to sixteen
tabs are allowed per paragraph. Text can be aligned
so that the right, center, left, or decimal (in the case
of numbers) part of the text or numbers aligns with
the tab position.
The space created by the tab can be filled with any
character. These fill characters are called Leaders
(pronounced leed-ers.)

5-120

REFERENCE GUIDE

Tab settings

MENU COMMANDS

Application
• Tables
• Directory listings
• Equations
When using proportionally spaced fonts, you cannot
fonnat tables reliably using spaces between entries.
Therefore, you must use tabs to make columns align
correctly.
Operation
To set tabs:
.. Select the Tab Settings option in the Paragraph
menu (Figure 5-54.)
.. Choose the Tab Number you want to set.
.. Choose whether the text is to be Left, Center,
Right, or Decimal aligned .
.. Select Shown as Leader Char for Tab Display
if you want to place leader characters for this tab
stop. Select Shown as Open Space if you don't
want leader characters for this tab stop .
.. Enter the tab location. The tab location is
measured from the left edge of the current column.
.. Repeat this process for each tab you wish to set.
You can review and edit any Tab Number's Tab
Location at any time by selecting the Tab Number.
~

Remember to select Left, Center, Right, or Decimal.
One of these options must be chosen, or the tab stop
will not be enabled.
If Shown as Leader Character is chosen for any
tab stop

.. Select the leader character (spaces, periods, underlines, or some other character) for this tag.
.. If you choose Other, consult the character set
table in Appendix E, choose the decimal number
which corresponds to the character you want to
REFERENCE GUIDE

5-121

Tab settings

MENU COMMANDS

~

put in the tab space, place the text cursor on the
Leader Char line, and type this number.
Enter the space between leader characters allowed for this tag.

~

Justification (set in Alignment) overrides tab settings. Therefore, tabs do not work if justify is set on.

~

Do not set tabs to create a first line indent. Use the
indent feature in the Alignment option instead.
Tabs are designed to be used on a single line. This
line should be terminated with a paragraph end
(Enter) or line break (Ctrl plus Enter.) Also, when
tabs are set, automatic wordwrap will not work.
Therefore, text on any line which contains a tab may
extend beyond the right margin. Use a line break
(Ctrl plus Enter) to force this text down to the next
line.

Equations
Tabs can also be used to format equations. Set a
Center Tab stop at the position on the page where you
want to center the equation. Then, type a tab character and then the equation. The equation automatically centers itself at the location defined by the tab
stop.

Superscript

.........

X 2 +y2 +Z2 ...- - Overscore
5X+ 2Y +3Z

t
Centered around
centered tab

5-122

REFERENCE GUIDE

Special effects

MENU COMMANDS

Special effects
"Bod~

Text" SPECIAL EFFECTS
Special Effect:
COllllllands:

Space for Big First:
Show Bullet As:

I:ilmJ Ild.EO I Bullet I
I Set Font Properties I
I NOrillal I III!l!ID 0021 lines
~ 0 0 IT] D D D 0
[}] [§J D IT] [}] I Other I

Bullet Char: 000 (ASCI! )
Il1del1t After Bullet: 00.00 il1ches

Figure 5-55 Special Effects Dialog Box. Settings
are for big first character at beginning of paragraph.
Description
Special Effects allows you to add a Big First
Character (also called a Dropped Capital) or Bullet
at the beginning of a paragraph. The font for the bullet or big character can be selected independently
from the rest of the paragraph.
Application
• Dropped capitals at beginning of paragraph
Real typographic bullets for lists (e.g., • instead of*)
Operation-Big first character
To create a Big First Character:
~

~

REFERENCE GUIDE

Select Special Effects in the Paragraph menu.
(See Figure 5-55.)
Choose Special Effect: Big First Char
5-123

Special effects

MENU COMMANDS
~
~
~

Select Set Font Properties. The font selections
available depend on the printer installed.
Select Face, Size, Style, Color and character
shift up or down. Zero shift usually works best.
Select OK to return to the first Dialog Box, and
then select OK again.

Space for Big First Char specifies how many lines
of text the first character will occupy. Normal
creates the number of line automatically. Custom
lets you specifY the number oflines.
Operation-Bullet
To add a Bullet:
~

Select Special Effects in the Paragraph menu.
Choose Special Effect: Bullet.
~ Select Set Font Properties to make the bullet a
different font from the rest of the paragraph. The
Font Settings For Bullet Dialog Box appears.
The actual font selections available depend on the
printer installed. Choose the Face and Size and
vertical shift. Zero shift works for most situations.
~ Select OK to return to the first Dialog Box.
~ Select, from the Show Bullet As: line, the bullet
you want to use. To use some other bullet character, select Other,. place the text cursor on the Bullet Char line, and type the number from the table
in Appendix E for the desired bullet character.
~ Select the Indent After Bullet. This indent
specifies the space between the bullet and the text
following the bullet.
~

~

Failure to specifY indent after the bullet results in
the first line in the paragraph overlapping the bullet.
Select None to remove an existing special effect from
a given paragraph tag.
Note: Text attributes cannot be applied to bullets and
Big First Characters.

5-124

REFERENCE GUIDE

Typographic controls

MENU COMMANDS

Typographic controls
'Bod~

TeKt" TYPOtiRAPHIC CONTROLS

Auto~atic

Kerning: []IT] . .

Letter Spacing: [][] _

Up to: 0.100 Ens

Tracking: 0.050 Ens I Looser I . .
Ilininun Space Width: 0.= * (space width) = 0.150 E~s
Nornal Space Width: 1.00 * (space width) = 0.250 Ens
MaKinun Space Width: 2.
* (space width) = 0.500 Ens
Overscore Height:
Strike· Thru Height:
Underline 1 Height:
Underline 2 Height:

00.66 Shift t By: 11.94 fractional pts
00.66
03.72
00.66 Shift • B~: 00.66
00.66
02.84

DO I Cancel I
Figure 5-56

Typographic Controls Dialog Box

Description
The Typographic Controls option lets you control
important typographic attributes for each tag, including kerning, letterspacing, spacing between
words, and text attributes such as underlining.

Application
• Automatic Kerning-Makes headlines more
attractive by placing individual letters closer
together. It can also reduce the page count of
long documents which contain large blocks of
body text.
• Letter Spacing-Reduces visual impact of
loose lines (lines with too much space between
words) by adding space between letters.
• Tracking-Used to expand or contract headlines to fit a given space. If applied to Body
Text, the entire document can be expanded or
reduced in size with only a subtle change in
overall appearance.
REFERENCE GUIDE

5-125

MENU COMMANDS

Typographic controls

• Customize text attributes. (Overscore,
Strike-thru, Underline 1, Underline 2 height.)
Operation-Automatic Kerning
Kerning can be turned on or off for any given
paragraph tag. To turn kerning on (off), select On
(Off) on the Kern: On/Off line. To see the effect of
kerning on the computer screen, On-Screen Kerning must be turned on in the Set Preferences option
in the Options menu.
Kerning reduces the text formatting speed slightly.
The font width table for the printer must include
kerning information for this feature to work. The
PostScript fonts supplied include kerning information. Fonts for the other printers do not. To add kerning information to fonts, or adjust the kerning values
for existing fonts, consult Appendix K.
Automatic kerning can be overridden for all tags by
selecting Globally Off in the Page Layout option.

Operation-Letter Spacing
As each paragraph is justified, Xerox Ventura
Publisher tries to fit words on a line, until the space
between words falls below the Minimum Space
Width. The word which could not fit on the line
without violating the Minimum Space Width then
starts the next line. If this word is long compared to
the length of the line (very likely in a multi-column
document), the space between words on this line may
exceed the Maximum Space Width. This results in a
loose line.
If Letter Spacing is turned on, additional space is
added between letters until the space between words
is less than the Maximum Space Width.

5-126

REFERENCE GUIDE

I

Typographic controls

MENU COMMANDS

To use Letter Spacing:
~

Turn justification on in the Alignment option
Turn Letter Spacing on
~ Set the Minimum Space Width to less than the
Normal Space Width. A typical number is 0.600
(i.e., 60% of normal space width.) Values above
1.000 have no effect.
~ Set the Normal Space Width to 1.000.
~ Set the Maximum Space Width to the largest
space between words allowable during justification. 2.000 (i.e., twice the Normal Space Width) is
a typical number.
~ Set the Up To amount to the maximum space allowed between letters during letterspacing.
~

The resulting space width is calculated and shown in
EMs, a typographic measurement equal to the width
of an M character in the current font size.

t

Normal space width
(line is not justified)

Example:

Maximum
Space Width

1

This is a loose line and therefore the line

Normal Space Width
The Normal Space Width setting lets you control
the amount of space between words. This lets you increase or decrease the size of any given paragraph by
subtly changing the space between each and every
word in that paragraph. For instance, choosing a
value of two doubles the space between every word.
As suggested above, 1.000 is the normal setting for
most documents.

REFERENCE GUIDE

5-127

MENU COMMANDS

Typographic controls

Operation-Tracking
To increase or decrease the space between letters
~
~

Select Looser to increase, Tighter to decrease
Enter, on the Tracking line, the amount to add or
subtract between individual letters.

Operation-Custom attributes
The line attributes (i.e., underline, double underline,
overs core, strikethrough) available in the Text Editing mode can be customized for any given paragraph
tag. For each attribute you can specify both the
height of the line and the amount this line should be
vertically shifted.
You should increase the height of the line attributes
whenever you change a tag's font size. For instance,
if you increase the font from 12 to 24 point, you
should double the height of each attribute. The
height and shift for Underline 1 controls both the
underline and the first line in the double underline.
Underline 2 controls height and shift for the second
line in the double underline.

5-128

REFERENCE GUIDE

i

Ruling lines

MENU COMMANDS

Ruling lines

RULING LINES ABOIJE
Width: I Hone I []!ill

IJi!ii!iiJ III!I!II I FraAe I I (ustOA I

i9

(olor: I White IIlImICRillIGreen II Blue ICillnJI Yellow I~
Pattern: [II
Space Abo~e
Height of
Space Below
Height of
Space Below
Height of

rn rn rn [IJ [I] rn ImD

Rule
Rule
Rule
Rule
Rule
Rule

1:
1:
1:
2:
2:
3:

09.00
04,02
03.
01,5
BB,
OB.OB

Space Below Rule 3: 09.00
O~erall Height: OB,52

Dash Width:
Dash Spacing:
(UStOA Indent:
CUStoA Width:

I Dashes Off I
00,00
00,00
00, 00
00,00

CD G

36,00 fractional pts

aG

Figure 5-57 Ruling Lines Dialog Box, Two rules
will be created. Both rules will be the width of the
column.
Description
All three Ruling Lines Menus function in an identical manner and provide the capability to place
ruling lines above, below, and around a paragraph,
Up to three ruling lines, each of different thickness,
with different spacing between each rule, can be
placed above, below, or around the paragraph. Texture and color can be assigned to each set of ruling
lines, and ruling lines can be dashed.

Application
• Isolate text from surrounding copy.
• Provide lines between entries in a table.
• Place text within a ruling line to create the effect shown in Figure 5-58.
• Create change bars
REFERENCE GUIDE

5·129

MENU COMMANDS

Ruling lines

Operation
To place ruling lines above, below or around a
paragraph:
~

Select the appropriate ruling line option in the
Paragraph menu.
~ Select the ruling line width. The ruling line can be
made the width of the text, current margin,
column, or frame or you can define a custom width.
If Margin is selected, the ruling line width is
decreased by the paragraph's In From Left and In
From Right spacing set in the Paragraph Spacing
option. If Custom is selected you can specify how
far from the left margin the ruling line should
begin by entering the appropriate number on the
Custom Indent line. Specify the width of the
ruling line by entering the desired width on the
Custom Width line.
~ Select the ruling line color and pattern. The same
color and pattern is assigned to all three rules.
~ Enter the height of each ruling line and the space
above and below each ruling line. This is done by
placing the text cursor next to the Space
AbovelBelow and Height of Rule lines and typing
the desired heights. The ruling line and line spacing is immediately shown to aid determining the
proper line thicknesses and spacing. Keep changing the height and spacing until you are satisfied.
Finally, if you wish to make dashed rules, select
Dashes On, and then select the length of the dash
and the space between each dash. (Dashes can be
turned off by selecting Dashes Off.) Note: Xerox
Ventura Publisher cannot display or print thick
dashed rules. If dashes do not display on the screen,
reduce the ruling line thickness.
~

5-130

Ruling boxes around paragraphs are intended for
headlines and other short paragraphs. Placing a
ruling box around a long paragraph which continues
into the next column or page causes the first part of
REFERENCE GUIDE

i

MENU COMMANDS

Ruling lines

the paragraph to be enclosed in a box. The second
part of the paragraph is placed in the next column or
page without any ruling box.
Overall Height: provides continuous feedback on
the total space occupied by all ruling lines. When the
measurement units are set to Fractional Points, individual settings are rounded up or down slightly as
you type. This is normal and is due to the way numbers are stored within Xerox Ventura Publisher.
Advanced operation-White text on black rule
The Space Below Rule 3 setting lets you shift the
entire set of ruling lines up or down by the amount
you specify, without moving the text in the tagged
paragraph. This lets you, among other things, put
white text on top of a black ruling line. To achieve this
effect:
.. Create a new tag called, for example, White Text .
.. Set the Font Color for this tag to White .
.. Select Ruling Line Above and create a height for
Rule 1 that is higher than the tag's font size.

Chapter 1

The Adventure Begins
This trip really began in September last year when Gerr
won first prize in a raffle at the fashion show which Rush
Presbyterian-St. Luke's Medical Center holds every year. The
prize was two round trip tickets to Hong Kong on United Airlines, and ten nights in the Hong Kong Hyatt Hotel. Analyzing our good fortune, we concluded that we wanted to do
more than spend ten days in Hong Kong and return, but a
the same time, United, having just gotten its routes and equipment from Pan American, had not yet received authority to

Figure 5-58

REFERENCE GUIDE

White text within black ruling line

5-131

MENU COMMANDS

Ruling lines

~

Select the - on the Space Below Rule 3 line and
enter the distance required to move the ruling line
down over the text. This distance is approximately one halfthe sum of the ruling line overall height
plus the Font Size.

For example, if you want to place 24 point white type
within a 36 point ruling line, enter approximately
0.5*(24 + 36) = 30 points for the Space Below Rule 3.
Some printers cannot print white text on a black
background. Print the CAPABILI chapter, located in
the TYPESET directory, to see if your printer is
capable of this effect.

Advanced operation-Change bars
A change bar is used to alert the reader that the contents of a paragraph have changed. A change bar can
be created as follows:
~ Add a new tag called Change Bar and copy the at~
~
~
~
~
~

tributes from Body Text
Assign this tag name to a special function key
using the Assign Function Keys option
Select a paragraph and tag it with this new tag
Select Paragraph ruling line around
Enter a Custom Width of 1 point
Enter a Height of Rule 1 of less than 2 points
Add a small (e.g., 1 pica) negative Custom Indent.

To use this feature, create a new tag which has the
same attributes as Body Text, but with this change
bar added. Then assign this new tag to a special function key. Whenever a change is made, simply press
the special function key while making the change.
Because change bars are created with a ruling box
around, and because ruling boxes do not continue
across column or page boundaries, change bars will
not continue to the top of the next column or page.
5-132

REFERENCE GUIDE

i

MENU COMMANDS

Remove tag

Remove tag

REMOVE TAG

Tag NaAe to ReAove: Chapter ~L--
Tag NaAe to Convert to: Body Text____
OK

Figure 5-59

I Cancel I

Remove Tag Dialog Box

Description

I

Remove Tag lets you remove extra tags from the
styIe sheet.

Application
• Remove tags no longer used
• Make tags easier to find in the Assignment
List

Operation
Select the Remove Tag option in the Paragraph menu
and specify the tag to be removed. (See Figure 5-59.)
The tag from the currently selected paragraph, if any,
is automatically placed on this line.
All paragraphs previously tagged with the removed
tag are converted to Body Text unless another tag
name is specified. Enter this new tag on the Tag
Name to Convert To: line. For example, if you
remove a tag called Headline and replace it with a
REFERENCE GUIDE

5-133

MENU COMMANDS

Remove tag

tag called Sub Head, each paragraph in the entire
chapter previously tagged with Headline is tagged
with Sub Head.
Remove Tag removes the selected tag from
paragraphs in all text files in the currently opened
chapter. However, all other text files previously formatted with this style sheet may still contain
paragraphs tagged with the removed tag name.
When chapters containing these text files are next
loaded and combined with the revised style sheet, all
paragraphs previously tagged with the removed
name are formatted as Body Text, and the removed
tag name appears in the Assignment List, in upper
case.
~

5-134

If any tags are removed, save the style sheet under a
new name. This avoids changing the format of other
documents that use the same style sheet.

REFERENCE GUIDE

MENU COMMANDS

Rename tag

Rename tag

RENAME TAG
Old Tag NaMe: Major Heading
New Tag NaMe: Heading 1L--OK

Figure 5-60

I Cancel I

Rename Tag Dialog Box

Description

I

Rename Tag lets you change the names of existing
tags.

Application
• Make similar tags appear together in the Assignment List.
Operation
~

Select the Rename Tag option in the Paragraph
menu.
~ Enter the Old Tag Name and the New Tag
Name. If a paragraph is selected, its tag is
automatically entered on the Old Tag Name line.
~

REFERENCE GUIDE

If any tags are renamed, save the style sheet under a
new name. This avoids changing the format of other
documents that use the same style sheet.

5-135

MENU COMMANDS

Assign function keys

Assign function keys

ASSIGN FUNCTION KEYS
F1:
FJ:
F5:
F7:
F9:

FirstPa~

Minor heading
Chapter Title
Caption __
Header_ _

F2: Major heading
F4: Bullet_ _
F6: Chapter~_
Fa: Foote,r_ _
F10: Bod~ Text_
OK

Figure 5-61

I Cancel I

Assign Function Keys Dialog Box

Description

I

The Assign Function Keys option lets you assign
tag names to each of the ten keyboard function keys.

Application
This feature lets you simultaneously tag paragraphs
and edit text, without switching back and forth between the Paragraph Tagging and Text Editing functions. It greatly decreases the time required to format and edit a document.
Operation
Select the Assign Function Keys option or press and
hold the Ctrl key and then press K. As shown in
Figure 5-61, the name of each tag is typed next to the
name of the function key. Use the mouse, or the up
and down keyboard cursor keys to move from line to
line. Select OK when finished.

5-136

REFERENCE GUIDE

Assign function keys

MENU COMMANDS

If a tag name is entered which doesn't exist for this

style sheet, a message appears on the screen. Return
to the Assign Function Keys option. Blank lines appear where the incorrect tag name(s) was typed. If
the same tag name is entered twice, only the first
name entered is used.
Once tags are assigned to function keys, pressing the
appropriate function key while using either the
Paragraph Tagging or Text Editing function causes
that tag to be assigned to the selected paragraph or
the paragraph which contains the text cursor.
All style sheets included with Xerox Ventura
Publisher use FlO for Body Text. This of course can
be changed using the Assign Function Keys option.

REFERENCE GUIDE

5-137

MENU COMMANDS

GRAPHIC MENU

GRAPHIC MENU

.~.Ir.

!II""

Send to Back
Bring to Front

AZ

AA

Line Attributes ... AL
Fill Attributes ... AF
Select All
Grid Settings ...

Figure 5-62

AQ

Graphic Menu

The Graphic Menu lets you perform three major
functions on selected graphics:
• Move them in front or behind one another
• Change line and fill (shading) attributes
• Create a grid to which all graphics will snap

5-138

REFERENCE GUIDE

MENU COMMANDS

Send to back

Send to back
Description
Send to Back takes the selected graphic and places
it at the bottom of all graphics associated with the
currently selected frame.
Application
• Change the way graphics overlap each other

Operation
Select the graphic you wish to place behind all other
graphics. Then either select the Send to Back option
in the Graphic menu, or press and hold the Ctrl key
and then press Z.

Figure 5-63

REFERENCE GUIDE

Line sent to back of rectangle

5-139

MENU COMMANDS

Bring to front

Bring to front
Description
Bring to Front takes the selected graphic and
places it on top of all graphics associated with the
currently selected frame.
Application
• Change the way graphics overlap each other

Operation
Select the graphic you wish to place on to of other
graphics. Then either select the Bring to Front option
in the Graphic menu, or press and hold the Ctrl key
and then press A.

Figure 5-64

5-140

Line brought to front of rectangle

REFERENCE GUIDE

MENU COMMANDS

Line attributes

Line attributes
LINE ATTRIBUTES For LINE
Thickness: []!iii] [ffi!]
, CustOI1l Width

II rn
I

01.261 Fractional pts

Color: 'White' . . []ill
, Blue'
End

St~les:

J_

m ,Thick'

IJillJ , Yellow'

ffilliJ
, Magenta'

_

.. J+

- -

DeFaults: 'load Frol1l ... , 'Save To ..• ,

[]D
Figure 5-65

'Cancel'

Line Attributes Dialog Box

Description

I

Line Attributes let you change the thickness, color,
and end style of the line placed around each graphic.

Application
• Change the thickness of graphic lines used as
extra rules.
• Create one or two way arrows for callouts.
Operation
~
~

~

REFERENCE GUIDE

Select the graphic.
Select the Line Attributes option in the Graphic
menu. A Dialog Box similar to Figure 5-65 appears. (Each of the five graphic types has its own
dialog box.)
Choose either a preset thickness for the line, or
select Custom Width to produce a line of any
thickness. If Custom Width is selected, place the
5-141

MENU COMMANDS

Line attributes

text cursor on the Custom Width line and enter the
desired width .
.. Select the Color and End Styles for the line. The
beginning and ending of each line can have a different end style. The End Styles in the left column
are for the beginning of the line, and the End
Styles in the right column are for the end of the
line.
You can save the line attributes for a particular type
of graphic (box text, line, ellipse, rectangle, rounded
rectangle) by using the Defaults: Save To feature.
If Save To is selected, the next time the same type of
graphic is created, it will have identical attributes.
If you want to apply the saved defaults to an existing
graphic of the same type:
.. Select the desired graphic
.. Select the Line Attributes option
.. Select Defaults: Load From. When OK is
selected, the saved defaults are automatically applied to the existing graphic.
To copy attributes from another graphic in a chapter:
.. Select that graphic. (You may need to select a different frame first.)
.. Choose the Line Attributes option and select
Defaults: Save To. This makes this particular
graphic's attributes the defaults for its graphic
type .
.. Select the graphic whose attributes you want to
change. Choose the Line Attributes option and
select Defaults: Load From. The attributes just
saved are copied to the selected graphic.

5-142

REFERENCE GUIDE

Fill attributes

MENU COMMANDS

Fill attributes
FILL ATTRIBUTES for R. RECTANGlE
Color:

I White I DEllI [!ill ~
I Blue I !Jill] I Yellow I I Magenta I

m rn
m m rn I Solid I

Pattern: I Hollow I []]

D
Result:

IlII!II
I Transparent I

Defaults:

Figure 5-66

I load Frolll ... I I Save To ... I
[][] I Cancel I
Fill Attributes Dialog Box

Description

I

Fill Attributes let you change the color and background of each graphic.

Application
• Provide a background for cells in a form or
table.
Operation

>- Select the desired graphic.
>- Select the Fill Attributes option

in the Graphic
menu. A Dialog Box similar to Figure 5-66 appears. (Each of the five graphic types has its own
dialog box.)
>- Select the color and pattern desired.

You can save the Fill Attributes for a particular type
of graphic (box text, line, ellipse, rectangle, rounded
REFERENCE GUIDE

5-143

MENU COMMANDS

Fill attributes

rectangle) by using the Defaults: Save To feature.
If Save To is selected, then the next time the same
type of graphic is created, it will have the saved attributes.
If you want to apply the saved defaults to an existing
graphic ofthe same type, select the desired graphic,
choose the Fill Attributes option, and then select
Defaults: Load From. When OK is selected, the
defaults are automatically applied to the existing
graphic.

To copy attributes from another graphic in a chapter:
~
~

~
~

Select that graphic. (You may need to first select a
different frame.)
Choose the Fill Attributes option and select
Defaults: Save To. This makes this particular
graphic's attributes the defaults for its graphic
type.
Select the graphic whose attributes you want to
change.
Select the Fill Attributes option and select
Defaults: Load From. The attributes just saved
are copied to the selected graphic.

The Opaque and Transparent options let you change
the look of overlapping graphics. If Opaque is
selected for the graphic on top, it completely blocks
any graphics below it. If Transparent is selected for
the graphic on top, and if the fill pattern is anything
other than black, then the graphics below will show
through the graphic on top.
Not all printers can print transparent graphics. Print
the CAPABILI chapter (located in the TYPESET
directory) to determine the capabilities of your
printer.

5-144

REFERENCE GUIDE

MENU COMMANDS

Select all

Select all
Description
Select All selects every graphic associated with the
currently selected frame.
Application
• Move every graphic associated with a frame to
a new location relative to the frame.
• Change the attributes for all graphics tied to a
frame.

Operation
~
~
~

Enable the Frame Setting function and select the
frame whose graphics you wish to select.
Enable the Graphic Drawing function
Choose the Select All option in the Graphic menu,
or hold the Ctrl key and press Q. All graphics associated with the selected frame are now selected.

You can de-select individual graphics, without deselecting the remainder, by pressing and holding the
Shift key, pointing to the desired graphic, and then
pressing the mouse button once.
~

REFERENCE GUIDE

Normally you must be using the Graphic Drawing
function to be able to select all graphics associated
with a frame. However, the CtrlQ keyboard shortcut
lets you select all graphics while using the Frame
Setting function. This is useful to see which graphics
are associated with a selected frame before selecting
the Graphic Drawing function.

5-145

MENU COMMANDS

Grid settings

Grid settings

GRID SETTINGS
Grid Snap:

Ell

[]ffJ

Horizontal Spacing: B1,B~ picas &points
Uertical Spacing: B1,BB
OK

Figure 5-67

I (ancell

Grid Settings Dialog Box

Description
Grid Settings defines an invisible piece of graph
paper for the currently selected frame. All graphics
are then fastened to the grid points on this graph
paper when drawn or moved.
Application
• Provide alignment for forms and tables, where
adjacent boxes must line up exactly.
• Assure perfect vertical or horizontal alignment.

Operation
~

Enable the Graphic Drawing function.
Select the Grid Settings option in the Graphic
menu.
~ Select Grid Snap: On.
~ Set the horizontal and vertical spacing.

~

5-146

REFERENCE GUIDE

OPTIONS MENU

MENU COMMANDS

OPTIONS MENU

Set Preferences ...
Set Ruler ...
Set Printer Info .. .
Rdd/Renove Fonts .. .
Hide
Show
Show
Hide
Hide
Show

Side-Bar
AW
Rulers
Colunn Guides
Pictures
Tabs &Returns AT
Loose Lines

Turn Colunn Snap Off
Turn Line Snap Off
Multi-Cha ter ...
Figure 5-68

Options Menu

The Options Menu performs three major functions:
• Set screen and printer format options
• Add or remove fonts
• Perform multi-chapter operations
~

REFERENCE GUIDE

Use the Multi-Chapter Copy option to copy chapters.
DO NOT use the DOS Copy command to copy chapters.

5·147

MENU COMMANDS

Set preferences

Set preferences
SET PREFERENCES
Generated Tags:

IIlI!imlI

I Shown I

Text to Greek: I None I [IJ
Keep Backup Files: []!i]

rn D rn [][]

[]ill

IIll'I

Double Click Speed: I Slow I [IJ

D

rn

ClliIJ

[llJ

IIiI

[HJ

Decillal Tab Char: 9461 (ASCII)
On' Screen Kerning: I None I
Auto·Adjust St~les:

Figure 5-69

III

rn:J

DID

[]ill

[]!]

Set Preferences Dialog Box

Description
Set Preferences lets you:
• Show or hide tags in the Assignment List for
generated text (e.g., captions).
• Control the size below which text is "greeked."
(The word greek is described on the next
page.)
• Create or not create backup files
• Change the speed at which two mouse clicks in
a row will be recognized as OK
• Change the tab-align character for decimal
numbers. (The US uses the period, Europe
uses the comma)
• Turn screen kerning on/off
Adjust or not adjust the inter-line spacing
when fonts sizes are changed.

5-148

REFERENCE GUIDE

Set preferences

MENU COMMANDS

Application
Hide Generated Tags (e.g., captions, section headings) is used to reduce the number of tags shown in
the Assignment List. Since generated text tags are
automatically assigned to headers, footers, section
numbers, etc., you don't need to see them in the Assignment List.
When using tabs, one of the tab types is Decimal.
You can change the decimal tab character from a
period (American convention) to a comma (European
convention.) This feature also lets you set the
decimal tab character to a slash (I), an equal sign (=)
or other characters.

Operation-General
Select the Set Preference option in the Options menu.
The Dialog Box shown in Figure 5-69 appears. Select
the option desired.

Operation-Greeking
The word greeking describes the practice in the
graphics art industry of quickly drawing horizontal
lines on a page to approximate how a real page of text
will look. Greeking is used in Xerox Ventura
Publisher to speed up the time it takes to draw the
screen when displaying either a Reduced or Facing
Pages View. Select larger numbers to display only the
largest text as readable text. Select smaller numbers
to display much smaller text as readable text. The
numbers refer to the screen pixel height of the font.
~

REFERENCE GUIDE

Depending on the resolution of your display, text
below a certain size may not be readable in Full Page
or Facing Pages View when greeking is completely
turned off. This is normal.

5-149

Set preferences

MENU COMMANDS

Operation-Backup files
Select YES to create style sheet, chapter, and text
backup files each time a chapter is saved. Backup
files have the same name as the original, with the
first letter of the extension changed to $.

Operation-Double click speed
When making selections in the Item Selector, you can
press the mouse button twice quickly, while pointing
to the file name, in order to select the file and select
OK. You can change the double-click speed necessary
to activate the selection process. Note that Xerox
Ventura Publisher delays all selection operations by
the time required for two mouse clicks. Therefore, always pick the fastest speed you can handle. If you do
not use the double-click shortcut, set double-click
speed to Fast.

Operation-Decimal tab character
One of the choices in the Tab Setting option in the
Paragraph menu is decimal tab. When selected, the
text aligns at the tab stop on the first decimal point
in the text. Xerox Ventura Publisher initially assumes that the period character is used as the
decimal point. However, some European countries
use the comma instead. Consult Appendix E and
enter the numeric value on the Decimal Tab
Character line for the character you wish to use as
a decimal point. (The comma is decimal 44.)

Operation-On-screen kerning
When Kerning is selected in the Typographic Controls option, the change in the space between letters
can be shown on the screen as well as on the printer.
However, the additional calculations necessary to adjust the space between each character take additional time and therefore slow down the screen drawing
speed. Also, because of the relatively limited resolu5-150

REFERENCE GUIDE

Set preferences

MENU COMMANDS

tion of the computer screen, the subtle differences
provided by kerning may not be noticeable at small
(less than 14 point) font sizes. Therefore, to provide
optimum performance, you can choose whether to
show kerning on the computer screen. If you do show
kerning, you can choose to show only fonts above a
certain size.

To show kerning on-screen, select the minimum font
size you wish to kern. All characters equal to or above
the font size chosen will be kerned. 18 or 24 point are
typical font sizes to choose.
If kerning is turned on in the Typographic Controls
option, and ifthe printer fonts provide kerning information (see Appendix K), the printed output will always be kerned, regardless of whether on-screen
kerning is enabled or not.

Operation-Auto adjust styles
Whenever you change a tag's font size, the inter-line
spacing for that font is automatically increased or
decreased. Thus, if the font was originally 12 point
with 14 point inter-line spacing and you increase the
font size to 24 point, the inter-line spacing is
automatically increased to 28 point. If you don't want
the inter-line spacing automatically adjusted, select
Auto Adjust Styles No. This is especially useful for
tables, where the space between lines should remain
constant.

REFERENCE GUIDE

5-151

MENU COMMANDS

Set ruler

Set ruler

SET RULER

Horizontal Units:
Vertical Units:

I Inches I I Centineters I Dl!II
IIIII!D I Centineters I I Picas I

Horizontal Zero Point: 06, O~ picas & points
Vertical Zero Point: 06, O~

Figure 5-70

Set Ruler Dialog Box

Description
Set ruler lets you set different ruler measurement
units for the vertical and horizontal rulers shown on
the edge of the screen.

Application
Measure the page horizontally in picas and
vertically in inches.
• Move the ruler to measure from column edge
rather than page edge

Operation
~
~

Select the desired measurement unit for both the
horizontal and vertical ruler.
Set the horizontal and vertical zero points.

The default for horizontal and vertical zero point is
zero. This lets you easily measure from the page
edge. However, since tabs are measured from the
column edge, you may find it useful to set the
horizontal zero point equal to the left margin. The
numbers on the horizontal ruler will then show the
distance from the left column edge.

5-152

REFERENCE GUIDE

Set ruler

MENU COMMANDS

The rulers can also be set interactively, as shown
below.

To move the rulers
with the mouse, or to
pull the ruler crosshairs onto the screen,
point to the 0,0 box,
press and hold the
mouse button, and
then ...

, .13 ,

L

,.e,

a,a

drag the cross-hairs
onto the screen. Use
these cross hairs to
check for vertical and
horizontal alignment. L
In facing pages view, .... : .........................................
you can check for alignment across pages.
When you release the 2_
mouse button ...
a,a

the zero points move to the mouse location. L
Move the mouse to the
top ruler before releas- ing the mouse button to
.
/.
reset only the vertlcal .P..
ruler. Select 0,0 to reset ~
the ruler zero point to
the upper left corner.

ty

REFERENCE GUIDE

+. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..

,/,

,

/,

:0

Rule~ zero point set
locatIOn ?f mouse pnor
to releasmg the mouse
button.

5-153

MENU COMMANDS

Printer info

Printer info

Load new screen fonts
by typing the
extension of the
screen font files on
this line (e.g., PSF for
PostScript fonts)

SET PRJ NT ER INFO

I EPSOM IIK/FX I lal~u.'Ma'
EGAI (Use those ~atchin9 this file extension.)
Output To:

When the width table
contains fonts for the
selected device (in
this case PostScript),
this line displays the
word Ultimate.

I LPT1 II

LPT2

II LPTl I mill I (OM2 I IDirect I I Filenm I

Width Table: (:\UENTURA\POSTS(PT.WID._ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
(oAlland:

I Load

Different Width Table (Le., Font Metrics)

I

Quali t~: UltiAate

Figure 5-71

Set Printer Info Dialog Box.

Description
The Printer Info option lets you change printers,
printer connections, printer and screen fonts. It also
lets you direct the printed output to a file.

Application
• Switch between several output devices connected to different computer ports. This can be
used to switch, for instance, between a black
and white printer, and a color printer.
• Print the chapter to a disk. This disk can be
sent to another location for printing on a high
speed laser printer or typesetter.
• Load a different printer width table. This lets ~
you change fonts. It also lets you change the
character widths to match those used on a different printer or typesetter.

5-154

REFERENCE GUIDE

MENU COMMANDS

Printer info

Changing output devices
You can switch between different installed printers
or typesetters by selecting the appropriate Device
Name in the Set Printer Info Dialog Box (Figure 570.) After changing the Device Name, you should
select a different Width Table. See Changing
Printer Width Tables later in this section.
You may also need to change the computer port. To
change computer ports (e.g., from COMl to COM2),
select the correct option on the Output To line.

Adding new screen fonts
To add new screen fonts to Xerox Ventura Publisher,
copy the fonts to the VENTURA directory. The fonts
must all have the same file extension. To select these
screen fonts, specify the correct extension on the
Screen Fonts line.

Output to disk file
If you select Output To: Filename, then the information normally sent to the output device during a
print operation is instead sent to a disk file. Nothing
is sent to the output device. This disk file can then be
sent via floppy disk, network, or modem to a remote
printer or typesetter for printing at a later time. To
print to a file, select the To Print option in the File
menu after selecting Output To Filename.
This option is not available for JLaser, Cordata, and
AST TurboLaser printers.
~

REFERENCE GUIDE

The disk file created using this command will be at
least as big as the sum of all the files contained in
your chapter or publication. Make sure your computer hard disk has enough room. To copy a large
print file to floppy disk, use the DOS BACKUP command rather than the DOS COPY command.

5-155

MENU COMMANDS

Printer info

Printing a chapter saved to a disk
Once you have printed to a file, you will eventually
want to send this file to a printer or typesetter. To do
this, use the standard DOS COPY command, and
copy the file directly to the output device by typing
the following directly from the DOS prompt:

COpy filename port: IB
Replace filename with the name of the disk file you
want to print, and port with the name of the port
selected, exactly as shown on the Output To: line. (IB
is not used when copying to a PostScript device.)
Remember to place a colon directly after the port
name. For example, to print a file named TECHDOCl.COO to a printer connected to LPTl, type the
following at the DOS prompt:

COPY TECHDOCl.COO LPTl: IB Enter
This only works with output devices connected with
a parallel cable. For output devices connected with a
serial cable, you must first execute the following commands (assuming your device is connected to COMl):

MODE LPTl:=COMl: Enter
MODE COMl:96,N,8,1 Enter
Then execute the COPY command to LPT1: exactly
as shown above.
Use the XPRINT utility to move Interpress files.

PostScript printers
When copying to a PostScript printer or typesetter,
you must first insert the Utilities Disk #11 into the A
drive and then type the following command directly
from the DOS prompt:

COPY A:\POSTSCPT\DTR.TXT LPTl: Enter
5-156

REFERENCE GUIDE

Printer info

MENU COMMANDS

DTR.TXT is a file contained on the Xerox Ventura
Publisher Utilities disk in the POSTSCPT directory.
Once this file is transmitted, it does not ever need to
be re-transmitted unless another program resets
your printer. It remains in the printer, even when
power is turned off. Sending this file to the printer or
typesetter does not affect the operation of Xerox Ventura Publisher.
You may not be able to print a file on very early
models of the Apple LaserWriter using the above
commands. See Appendix F for additional details on
how to print a file to an Apple LaserWriter.

Changing width tables
Each printing device creates individual letters and
symbols differently, with a different shape, height,
and width. Xerox Ventura Publisher must know, for
each device installed, the width of each character for
each typeface and size. This width information is
then used to adjust the position for each character on
the screen so the end of each line, paragraph, and
page matches the printed output.
During the initial installation process, Xerox Ventura Publisher automatically creates files called
width tables that provide this information for each
printing device installed. When a different device is
selected, as described in the section Changing Output Devices, the matching width table should be
loaded.
To load a different width table, select Load Different Width Table (i.e., Font Metrics.) The Item
Selector appears, and width table files names are
shown. These files have names like XRX4045.WID
and POSTSCPT.WID. Select the width table
desired, and then select OK.
If the width table is for a different printer than the
Device Name currently selected, Quality (shown at
REFERENCE GUIDE

5-157

MENU COMMANDS

Printer info

the bottom of the Set Printer Info Dialog Box) changes from ffitimate to Draft.
Whenever a style sheet is saved, the width table currently in use is stored with that style sheet. This assures that the chapter always prints the same way,
even if you later load another width table.

Draft printer
If you ultimately want to print to a device not connected directly to your computer (perhaps a typesetting machine), but want to create rough draft copies
on your local printer, you have a problem. The
character widths used by your draft printer don't
match the widths used by the ultimate output device.
When printed on the ultimate device with a different
width table, lines, paragraphs, and pages will all contain the wrong number of characters, and the chapter will look totally different from what you originally created.
The solution is to use the ultimate output device
width table with your local printer. While this
produces a chapter on your local printer with the
wrong word spacing, justified text will still look justified, and the number of characters on each line,
paragraph and page will exactly match what gets
printed on the ultimate output device.

Default width table
The width table for the first output device installed
(primary device) is automatically copied during installation to a file called OUTPUT.WID. This is the
default width table. Its purpose is to reconfigure style
sheets which are transferred between systems which
use different printers. As an example, a style sheet
created on a system which uses the Xerox 4045 and
copied to a system which uses a PostScript printer
will automatically adapt correctly to the PostScript

5-158

REFERENCE GUIDE

Printer info

MENU COMMANDS

printer's width table if OUTPUT. WID is loaded
before the style sheet is copied from the 4045 system.
~

Use the width table name which matches the printer
name (e.g., POSTSCPT.WID) if you want the character widths to remain the same regardless of which
printer is used. Use OUTPUT. WID if you want the
character widths to change automatically whenever
the style sheet is copied to a different system.
The style sheets shipped with Xerox Ventura
Publisher use OUTPUT.WID.

Installing new fonts
The other reason to change width tables is to change
to a new set of typefaces. (See Appendix K.) Mter
loading a width table which contains new typefaces
and sizes, you will see the Face, Size, and Style
changed according to the specifications in the new
width table when you next choose any of the Font
Dialog Boxes.
See Appendix K for information on how to generate
width tables for additional typefaces that you purchase for your printer. See the AddlRemove Fonts option for information on how to merge fonts from different width tables into a single width table.

REFERENCE GUIDE

5-159

MENU COMMANDS

Add/remove fonts

Add/remove fonts

ADD/REMOVE FONTS (e: \UENTURA\OUTPUT.WID)
Imm,:

Stule
Light

::::m

,

Bold
HtJlic
N·ltalic
B·ltalic

...........
Download
(oAAand:

I Merge Width Tables." I I ReAove Selected Font I
I Save As New Width Table", I

Figure 5-72

Add / remove fonts Dialog Box

Description
AddlRemove Fonts lets you add additional printer
fonts. It also lets you disable automatic font downloading for each individual font.

Application
• Add typefaces
• Enable or disable automatic font downloading

Operation-Add fonts
Before using this feature to add new fonts, you must:

> Copy all new fonts to the VENTURA directory (or
>
5-160

the directory specified in the CNF file-see AppendixK)
Copy the width table for these new fonts to the
VENTURA directory. (Use the utilities described
REFERENCE GUIDE

i

MENU COMMANDS

Add/remove fonts

in Appendix K to create a width table if the font
supplier did not provide a Xerox Ventura
Publisher width table.)
Once new fonts have been copied to your computer's
hard disk, run Xerox Ventura Publisher and then:
~

~

~

~

~

~

Select Load New Width Table in the Set Printer
Info option, and load the width table for the existing fonts for your printer.
Select the AddlRemove Fonts option in the Options menu. The Add/Remove Fonts Dialog Box appears.
Select Save As New Width Table to save the existing width table under a new name and avoid accidentally modifying an existing width table.
Select Merge Width Tables and select the width
table for the new fonts. These new fonts are added
to those already in the existing width table. The
combined set of faces, sizes, and styles are immediately shown in the AddlRemove Fonts Dialog
Box.
Select any face, size or style which you don't wish
to use, and then select Remove Selected Font.
The font is removed from the combined width
table.
Select Save As New Width Table and save the combined width table under a new name.

All the new fonts are now available for use.
~

The two width tables merged together must both be
for the same printer.

Operation-ResidentJDownload
The word Resident in the style portion of the Dialog
Box means that the font selected is already resident
in the printer prior to running Xerox Ventura
Publisher. The word Download means that Xerox
Ventura Publisher will download the font from the

REFERENCE GUIDE

5-161

MENU COMMANDS

Add/remove fonts

computer's hard disk automatically during the print
operation.
Anytime the fonts used to print a chapter reside on
the computer hard disk, select Download. Anytime
the fonts used to print a chapter have been placed in
the printer and made permanent prior to running
Xerox Ventura Publisher, select Resident.
~

Each font (i.e., each combination of face, size and
style) must be individually set to Download or Resident.
You can decrease print time when using an HP LaserJet or Xerox 4045 by eliminating automatic
downloading. To do this, you must first download the
fonts into your printer, and make them permanent
prior to running Xerox Ventura Publisher. Use the
utilities provided by the printer manufacturer. Although you eliminate the time needed to download
the fonts at the beginning of each print job, Xerox
Ventura Publisher will not free the memory used by ~
the fonts when pages which contain many graphics
and few fonts are printed. Unless your printer contains several megabytes of memory, your printer will
likely produce out of memory error messages.

~

5-162

The novice user should not change the state of the
DownioadlResident configuration from the state
which is automatically set during installation.

REFERENCE GUIDE

MENU COMMANDS

Show/hide side-bar

Showlhide side-bar
Description
The Side-Bar is the left part of the Xerox Ventura
Publisher screen which contains the Function Selector, Assignment List, Current Selection Indicator,
and Page Counter. Hide Side-Bar removes the entire side-bar from the screen, letting you see more of
the page.

Application
• Lets you perform text editing, including
paragraph tagging, with a more complete view
ofthe document.

Operation
Make sure the function you want to use (e.g., Text
Editing) is enabled. Then select Hide Side-Bar in
the Options menu, or press and hold the Ctrl key as
you press W. The Side-Bar disappears.
To show the side-bar, select Show Side-Bar in the
Options menu, or press and hold the Ctrl key as you
press W.
While the Side-Bar is hidden, you can still change between functions using the View menu or the keyboard shortcuts. Paragraphs can also be tagged using
the Function Keys.

REFERENCE GUIDE

5-163

MENU COMMANDS

Show/hide rulers

Showlhide rulers
Description
ShowlHide rulers turns rulers at the top and left
edges of the screen on or off.

Application
On-screen rulers help place pictures and graphics.

Operation
Select Show Rulers to turn rulers on. Select Hide
Rulers to turn rulers off.
When rulers are shown, the mouse cursor's position
is always shown by a thin hairline which moves
across the face of each ruler. These hairlines let you
make accurate frame and graphic placement on the
page. To assure precise frame size and placement,
use the Sizing & Scaling option in the Frame menu.
To make precise graphics placement, use the Grid
Setting option in the Graphic menu.

5-164

REFERENCE GUIDE

Show/hide column guides

MENU COMMANDS

Showlhide column guides
Description
Show Column Guides paints faint dashed lines on
the screen that show the outline of each column.
Application
• See how much space is left at the bottom of the
column.
• Aid in frame placement.

Operation
To tum column guides on, select the Show Column
Guides option in the Option menu. To tum column
guides off, select the Hide Column Guides option
in the Option menu.
Column guides cannot be printed.

REFERENCE GUIDE

5-165

MENU COMMANDS

Show/hide pictures

Showlhide pictures
Description
The Hide Pictures option replaces all line art and
all images with a gray rectangular box.

Application
• Increase the screen drawing speed.
• See the frame margins, if the frame contains a
picture.

Operation
To turn pictures off, select Hide Pictures in the Option menu. To turn pictures back on again, select
Show Pictures in the Option menu. The frame and
the picture it contains can still be moved, sized,
scaled, cut, copied, and pasted while pictures are hidden.
Pictures are always printed, regardless of whether
pictures on the screen are hidden or shown.
When pictures are hidden, a gray box appears within
each frame, covering the exact area occupied by the
picture. The space between this gray box and the
frame edge shows you the current frame margin settings.

5-166

REFERENCE GUIDE

MENU COMMANDS

Show/hide tabs & returns

Showlhide tabs & returns
Description
Show/Hide Tabs & Returns provides visual
markers for tabs, non-breaking spaces, line breaks,
end of paragraph marks, end of file marks, index
points, frame anchors, and discretionary hyphens.
Application
This feature lets you see hidden characters while
editing text.

Operation
To show tabs and returns, select Show Tabs &
Returns in the Options menu. To hide these characters, select Hide Tabs & Returns in the Options
menu. Figure 5-73 shows the symbols used to display
hidden characters. Showing these characters takes
additional space which changes the location of
characters on the screen slightly. This shift in no way
affects how the page is printed.
~

It is recommended that you Show Tabs & Returns

whenever possible to avoid accidentally deleting hidden characters.
Non-breaking and
Discretionary
other fixed
Hyphen
Tab
spaces

Line
Break

....

j

•

U

,

Paragraph

End of
file

I]

Figure 5-73 Tab & return characters. Index and
anchors display as small circle.

REFERENCE GUIDE

5-167

MENU COMMANDS

Turn column snap on/off

Turn column snap on/off
Description
Turn Column Snap On forces all frames to align
with the sides of the underlying page's column
guides.
Application
• Force picture and text frames placed on the
page to align perfectly with the underlying
text columns.

Operation
To turn column snap on, choose Turn Column Snap
On in the Options menu. To turn column snap off,
choose Turn Column Snap Off in the Options
menu. When column snap is on, a frame snaps to a
column guide when it is placed within about 0.1 inch
of that guide.
Turning column snap on does not move frames already in the Chapter until those frames are moved or
re-sized.
When re-sizing a frame already placed on the page,
only the side of the frame currently being moved
snaps to a column guide.
Frames do not snap to the top or bottom of the
column guides. However, if the top margin is an integral multiple of Body Text inter-line spacing, and
Line Snap is turned on, the frame can be made to
align exactly with the top of the column guide. (See
Turn Line Snap On.)

5-168

REFERENCE GUIDE

Turn line snap on/off

MENU COMMANDS

Turn line snap on/off
Description
The Turn Line Snap On option forces frames to line
up exactly with the Body Text inter-line spacing in
the underlying page.

Application
o

o

o

Assure that frames in adjacent columns line
up exactly.
Let you make the top of one frame align with
the bottom of the frame above it.
Force a line or lines of text in a column to
move down by exactly one line by increasing
the height of a frame that has been snapped to
the column.

Description
To turn line snap on, choose Turn Line Snap On in
the Options menu. To turn line snap off, choose Turn
Line Snap Off in the Options menu.
The inter-line spacing for Body Text is used to create
an invisible grid to which frames are snapped. If Line
Snap is turned on or Body Text inter-line spacing
changed after frames have been placed, the top and
bottom of each frame must both be moved in order to
align the frame with the new Body Text grid.

REFERENCE GUIDE

5-169

MENU COMMANDS

Show/hide loose lines

Showlhide loose lines
Description
The Showlhide Loose Lines option highlights lines
which exceed the Maximum Space Width setting in
the Typographic Controls option. Although Letter
Spacing may be turned on to compensate for the loose
line which results when this space is exceeded, the
line will still be flagged as loose.

Application
• Provide a visual aid so the author can edit a
loose line. (Place a discretionary hyphen in the
first word below the loose line to correct the
problem.)

Operation
To show loose lines, select the Show Loose Lines
option in the Options menu. To tum the loose line displayoff, select the Hide Loose Lines option in the
Options menu.
Loose lines are shown in reverse video (i.e., white
text on a black background) on a monochrome display. They are shown in red on a color display.

5-170

REFERENCE GUIDE

~

Multi-chapter

MENU COMMANDS

Multi-chapter
MULTI·CHAPTER OPERATIONS
i;i!Wiimi;;iimm:::i:::::::m:i: C: \ TYP ES ET\&EXAMP LE, PUB
t C:\TYPESET\&BRO·P3,CHP
C:\TYPESET\&MA6·P3,CHP
I-C:\TYPESET\&NEWS·P3,CHP
C:\TYPESET\&NEWS·P2,CHP
C:\TYPESET\&PRPT·P2,CHP
C:\TYPESET\&LST6·P2,CHP
C:\TYPESET\&PHON·P2,CHP
C:\TYPESET\&BOOK·P2,CHP
C:\TYPESET\&BOOK·P1,CHP
C:\TYPESET\&INU·P1,CHP
.. C:\TYPESET\<R1·P1,CHP
C:\TYPESET\&PREL·P1,CHP

Figure 5-74

New
Open

:::mm;;;;;;;;;';"";;;""""'' '

[lose

~

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

'"

'"

'"

'"

'"

'"

Save

Save As",
...............
Add Chapter",
Renon [hap
...............
Print" ,
Make TOC",
Make Index" ,
COpy All",

Multi-Chapter Operation Dialog Box

Description
Multi-Chapter lets you combine a large number of
chapters together into a Publication. You can then
print, generate a table of contents, or create an index
for the entire publication.
Multi-Chapter also includes a file management
utility that lets you copy all files associated with a
chapter or publication.

Application
• Print very large publications, such as books or
technical manuals. Each chapter can be
created separately and can point to its own set
of text, pictures and style sheets.
• Quickly see every file associated with an individual chapter.

REFERENCE GUIDE

5-171

MENU COMMANDS

Multi-chapter

• Automatically create front and back matter
(table of contents and index.)
• Copy every file associated with a chapter or
publication, without accidentally losing a file.
Creating a large publication
Xerox Ventura Publisher can print or copy a publication which consists of up to 128 chapters. The MultiChapter Operations Dialog Box lets you build a list
of chapters, which can then be saved as a Publication. (A publication is nothing more than this list of
chapters.) This list is then used to tell Xerox Ventura
Publisher which chapters to use during a multi-chapter print or copy operation, or which chapters to include in a table of contents or index operation.
To create a publication:
~

Select Multi-Chapter in the Options menu. If you
have made changes since the chapter or style
sheet was last changed, you are prompted to save
them. The Multi-Chapter Operations Dialog
Box shown in Figure 5-74 then appears, and the
current chapter or publication is shown.
~ If you want to create a publication that doesn't include the current chapter, select New. The file
names are removed from the Dialog Box. (The
chapter files removed with this New command are
not altered or deleted.)
~ If you want to retrieve a publication previously
created, select Open. The Item Selector appears,
and you can then specify which publication you
wish to retrieve. Select OK. The Multi-Chapter
Operation Dialog Box reappears, with the publication's chapters displayed.
~ If you want to add additional chapters to the list
displayed, select the Add Chapter option. The
Item Selector appears. After specifying the chapter file name, select OK, and the Multi-Chapter
Operation Dialog Box reappears. Continue
selecting Add Chapter for each additional chapter

5-172

REFERENCE GUIDE

Multi-chapter

MENU COMMANDS

you want to place in your publication. If you make
a mistake and add a chapter that you don't want,
select that chapter name, and then select Remove
Chapter.

Rearrange chapter order
The order in which chapters are placed in the list can
easily be rearranged once you have created a list of
chapters. Simply move the mouse cursor over the
name of the file you wish to move, press and hold the
mouse button, and then "drag" the file name to the
new location. When you release the mouse button,
the file name is inserted at the new location in the
chapter list, and all file names below this point are
pushed down. To move a file name from the bottom to
the top of a long list of chapters, scroll to the end of
the list, move the file to the top of the display area,
then scroll up until the file name is at the bottom of
the display area. Repeat until the file is at the top of
the list.
Once the list of chapters is complete and in the correct order, you should save it by selecting the Save
As option. The Item Selector appears, and you can
then specify the file name. The extension PUB is
automatically added to the file name. Note that you
actually are saving nothing more than a list of chapters. The individual chapters and their associated
text and picture files have already been saved.
Once the publication has been saved, you can create
a table of contents or index for it, print it or copy all
the files associated with every chapter.

See chapter file names
If you want to see what files are associated with any
given chapter, first select the chapter name and then
select Open. The individual files for that chapter are
temporarily displayed. Select Close to return to the
original display.
REFERENCE GUIDE

5-173

MENU COMMANDS
~

Multi-chapter

Selecting Open when a chapter name is selected displays the contents of that chapter. Selecting Open
with no chapter name selected lets you retrieve a previously saved publication.

Multi-chapter print
To print the multi-chapter publication currently displayed, select Print in the Multi-Chapter Operations
Dialog Box. The options are identical to those
described in the To Print option in the File menu,
with one exception: If Output To Filename is
selected in the Set Printer Info option in the Options
menu, you are then asked to select whether you want
to place Each [chapter] in Separate File or All in
One File. If you select Each in Separate File, Xerox
Ventura Publisher automatically creates separate
files for each chapter, with the name you specifY followed by the extensions COO, COl, C02, etc. If you
select All in One File, the entire publication is
placed in one big file with the extension COO.
Table of contents generation
Xerox Ventura Publisher can automatically generate
a table of contents by extracting tagged text from the
publication. For instance, you can create a table of
contents that contains every occurrence of text
tagged as Chapter Head or Sub Headline, along
with the associated chapter and page numbers. This
table of contents is then stored as a text file, which
can later be loaded and formatted just like any other
text file and added to the front ofthe publication file.
To generate a table of contents for the publication displayed in the title bar ofthe Multi-Chapter Operations Dialog Box:
~

5-174

Select Make TOC. The Generate Table of Contents Dialog Box appears (Figure 5-75.) The current publication name is shown on the TOC File:
line, with the last three letters changed to TOC
REFERENCE GUIDE

Multi-chapter

MENU COMMANDS

GENERATE TABLE OF CONTENTS
TOC File:
Title String:
Lml 1:
Lm12:
Lml J:
Level 4:
LevelS:
Level 6:
Level 7:
Level 8:
Level 9:
Level 10:

Inserts:

Figure 5-75

>>>-

C: \UpDOC\UPDOCTOUEN,_ _ _ _ __

Table of Contents,_ _ _ _ _ _ __
[*Chapter Headl
[*Heading 11.. [C'"'~I"·[""P~m-II-----

I Tag Text I ffi[] I Chapter ~ I []ill]]
I Text Attr, I

Table of Contents Dialog Box

and the extension GEN added. This is the name of
the text file which will be created during the Table
of Contents generation process.
Use the text cursor to change this file name as
desired, although you should keep the extension
GEN.
Modify the Title String, if desired. This is the
title that appears at the top of the first Table of
Contents page.
Place the text cursor on the Level 1 line, and then
select Tag Text.

This places the following words on the Level 1 line:

II

[*tag name 1

II
>- Use the keyboard cursor keys to delete the words
tag name and replace them with the first tag
whose text you wish to place in the table of contents.
>- Move the text cursor to the end of the Levell line
>- Select Tab

REFERENCE GUIDE

5-175

MENU COMMANDS

Multi-chapter
~
~

~

Select Chapter # (if you want chapter numbers
included)
Type a dash
Select Page #.

The Level 2 line on your display should look like that
in Figure 5-75. Repeat this procedure for additional
levels.
When finished, select OK. Xerox Ventura Publisher
then automatically creates a table of contents by
placing a copy of each paragraph, tagged with the
tags you specified at each Level, into a text file.
This text file is automatically tagged with different
tags for each level, and another tag for the title.
These tags are called Z_TOCl, Z_TOC2, etc., and
Z_TOC TITLE.
The resulting text file can then be loaded (using the
Load TextlPicture option), formatted with a style
sheet, edited, and printed just like any other text file.
Load this text file using the Generated option in the
Load/Text Picture Dialog Box.
If you save the publication after creating the table of
contents, the options are saved with the publication.
The table of contents for this manual was created
using Xerox Ventura Publisher. &TCHD-Pl is the
style sheet for this manual and includes tags for table
of contents and index entries.

Index generation
Xerox Ventura Publisher can automatically create an
index from the references inserted into the text using
the InsertlEdit Index option in the Edit menu.
To generate an index for the publication displayed in
the title bar of the Multi-Chapter Operations
Dialog Box:
5-176

REFERENCE GUIDE

MENU COMMANDS

Multi-chapter
~
~

~
~

Create a publication file as described earlier in
this section.
Select Make Index. The Generate Index Dialog
Box appears (Figure 5-76). The current publication name, with the last three letters changed to
IDX and the extension GEN added, is shown on
the Index File: line. You can use the text cursor
to change this file name as desired, although you
should keep the extension GEN.
Modify the Title String, if desired. This is the
title that appears at the top of the first index page.
If desired, select Letter Headings: On. This
places an A before the first index entry beginning
with the letter A, a B before the first index entry
beginning with the letter B, and so on. An exclamation point (!) is used as the heading for all
entries which are neither numbers or letters.

The rest of the Dialog Box is automatically filled out
as shown in Figure 5-76, and usually does not need
to be changed. For those wishing to change the
default format:

HtlERATE ItlDEX
Index File: C: \UPDOC\UPDOC IDU EtI_ _ _ _ __
Title String: Index _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
letter Headings: •
Before k
For Each ~:
Between #s:
After #s:
"See ":
"See Also":
Inserts:

Figure 5-76
REFERENCE GUIDE

[]ill

~

[1...(#-;-].....
[ p'"'#];-·--;['""'C#,.-]·......
[P'"'#] . - - - - - - -

, _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
See
See --;al-so-----------

mIll Chapter # I []ill]] I Text

Attr.

I

Generate Index Dialog Box.
5-177

MENU COMMANDS

Multi-chapter

Before #s inserts the text specified before the
chapter and page numbers. The default is one
horizontal tab character. For the index in this
manual, the tab was replaced with a comma
followed by a space.
For Each # describes how the chapter and page
numbers will appear in the index. Placing a
dash as shown in Figure 5-76 will refer to
entries that occur on consecutive pages by
showing the first and last chapter and page
numbers on which they appear, separated by a
dash.
Between #s describes the punctuation that
should be placed between each chapter/page
number referenced. The default is comma,
followed by a space.
After #s describes what punctuation should be
placed after the chapter/page numbers. The
default is no punctuation at all.
See defines the text that should be added for a
cross reference entry. Usually the word See is
used.
See Also defines the text that should be added
for a secondary cross reference entry. Usually
the words See Also are used.
If you save the publication after creating the index,
any changes made to the default settings will be
saved with the publication.
During the index generation process, the actual text
from each index entry is collected from the publication, along with the chapter and page number on
which that entry is currently placed. This text is then
sorted and placed into a text file. Each entry is followed by a line break and horizontal tab character.
The last entry for each letter in the alphabet is followed by a paragraph end (carriage return.)
This manual's index was generated with Xerox Ventura Publisher's index feature.

5-178

REFERENCE GUIDE

Multi-chapter

MENU COMMANDS

Copying chapters & publications
Since both Chapter and Publication files each point
to a large number of different text and picture files,
each of which may be in a different subdirectory,
copying every file in a complete Chapter or Publication using the DOS COPY command is very
laborious. In general, the DOS COPY command does
not work unless every file will ultimately be copied
back to the same disk drive and subdirectory.
~

Do not use the DOS COPY command to copy
chapters.
The Copy All feature automatically copies all files
associated with a chapter or publication (except
hyphenation dictionaries). Each type of file (e.g.,
style sheet, picture, text) can be copied to a different
disk drive and subdirectory. The references in the
chapter (CHP) and publication (PUB) files to these
new drives and subdirectories are automatically updated as these files are copied.
To copy the entire publication:

>

>

>

>

REFERENCE GUIDE

Open a publication file, or build a list of publications using the Add Chapter feature then save
the resulting publication.
Select Copy All. Make sure no chapter name is
selected, or you will only copy that one chapter. (To
de-select a selected chapter, move the mouse cursor to an empty portion of the screen, and then
press the mouse button once.)
The Copy All Dialog Box appears. (Figure 5-76).
The PUB or CHP: line shows the name ofthe publication or chapter to be copied. The destination
lines show the disk drive and subdirectory to
which each file type will be copied.
On each destination line, enter the disk drive
name, followed by a colon, followed by the subdirectory (if any) where you wish to place that file
type. For example, to save all files in the publica5-179

MENU COMMANDS

Multi-chapter

tion to the root directory on the A drive, edit each
line to look like Figure 5-77.
COPY ALL
SOURCE

(fro~

this file)

PUB or CHP: C:\TYPESET\&EXAMPLE,PUB,_ _ _ _ __
DESTINATION (to these directories)
PUB &CHPs:
STYs &WI Ds :
Text Files:
Graphic Files:
hlage Files:
Co~~and:

A:~\-_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

A:\
A:\·-----------A:\_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
A:\._ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

I Hake

I
[][] I Cancel I

All Directories the Sa~e As the First

Figure 5-77 Copy All Dialog Box. Set to copy all files
associated with EXAMPLE. PUB to the A drive.
If all files will be saved to the same disk and direc-

tory, enter information on the first line only, and then
select Make all Directories the Same as the
First. Select OK to begin the copying process. Xerox
Ventura Publisher creates any directory names requested that were not already in existence.
~

Pressing the Enter key does nothing in the Copy All
dialog box in order to reduce the chance of accidentally starting the copy process before you are ready.
If all the files from the publication will not fit on one

floppy disk, the following message appears when the
disk becomes full:

There is not enough space on the target disk. Do
you wish to continue with a new disk or cancel
the archive process?

5-180

REFERENCE GUIDE

Multi-chapter

MENU COMMANDS

To copy only one chapter:

>- Select

that chapter name from the list of files
shown in the Multi-Chapter Dialog Box.
>- Select Copy All and follow the preceding instructions for copying a publication.

Retrieving a publication or chapter
Use the Open option in the Multi-Chapter Dialog
Box to retrieve a publication that has been copied to
another disk drive. Change the disk drive as
described in the Item Selector section. Once the publication is opened and the chapters are shown in the
Multi-Chapter Dialog Box, select Copy All and fill in
the destination lines with the appropriate disk drive
and directories, as described in the preceding
paragraphs. Figure 5-78 shows the Item Selector set
to retrieve a publication that was previously copied
to the A drive. All files are copied to the TYPESET
subdirectory.

(OPY ALL
SOURCE (frolll this file)
PUB or (HP: A:\&EXAMPLE.PUB,_ _ _ _ _ _ __
DESTINATION (to these directories)
PUB & (HPs:
STYs &WIDs:
Text Files:
Graphic Files:
IlIlage Files:

(:\TYPESETI-I_ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
(:\TYPESET
(:\TYPESET---------(: \TYPESET_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
(:\TYPESET _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

(olllllland:

I Make All Directories the Sallie As the First I
DO I (ancell

Figure 5-78 Copy All Dialog Box set to copy EXAMPLE.PUB files from the A drive to the TYPESET
directory.
REFERENCE GUIDE

5-181

MENU COMMANDS

Multi-chapter

To retrieve a single chapter that has been copied
to another disk drive, use the Add Chapter option
in the Multi-Chapter Dialog Box. Change the Directory line in the Item Selector, to change to the correct
disk drive. Once the chapter is shown in the MultiChapter Dialog Box, select the chapter name and
then select Copy All. Then, fill in the destination
lines with the appropriate disk drive and directories.
When retrieving publications or chapters which are
saved on more than one floppy disk, the following
message appears:

This file could not be found: filename. Do you
wish to skip over it, or retry with a new disk,
or cancel the archive process?

Insert the next disk, and then select Retry.

5-182

REFERENCE GUIDE

.4
~

HINTS, TIPS, & TECHNIQUES
This chapter provides a collection of hints, tips, and
techniques developed by users of Xerox Ventura
Publisher.

Frames and pictures
Multiple article chapters
This sub-section describes how to create newspapertype chapters with Xerox Ventura Publisher. A
newspaper format contains multiple articles, each
saved in a different file. These articles can start on
any page and can continue on any later page. Each
portion of each article can be placed in a frame
anywhere in the chapter. Each frame can have its
own set of margin, column, and vertical rule settings.
Text can be placed into a chapter in three ways:
• Into the underlying page, starting on
page one. In this case, text flows automatically from page to page.
• Into specific frames which are placed on
top of the underlying page. In this case,
text flows until the frame is filled. If more text
remains, another frame must be placed somewhere in the chapter, and the next portion of
text from the same file flows into this frame.
Text in the underlying page and in other
frames flows around the frame.
• Into box text, using the Graphics Drawing function. Box text is like a PostIt@ (a
small note temporarily pasted to a page.) Text
does not flow automatically from one box text
to another.

REFERENCE GUIDE

6-1

HINTS, TIPS, & TECHNIQUES

Frames and pictures

A combination of all three approaches can be used.
The first approach works very well for technical
documentation, manuals, books, proposals, and
directories. The second approach is better suited to
newsletters, magazines, and newspapers. The third
approach is used primarily for callouts, tables, and
forms.
Newspaper Layout
Newspapers and newsletters combine a variety of
different typographic styles, column widths, and
margins. This type of complex layout can easily be
generated by placing text into frames.
To compose a newspaper layout, first set up the number of columns desired. Use the Margin & Column
setting to provide column guides to which frames can
be snapped (Figure 6-1.) Turn Show Column Guides
On to show these guides on the screen.
Use the Frame Setting function to place frames
wherever you want text to appear (Figure 6-2).
Then flow text or pictures into each frame by first
selecting the frame, then selecting the file name in
the Assignment List. The frame can be made larger
or smaller to increase or decrease the amount of text
it contains.
To continue a text file from a previous frame into a
new frame (the new frame can be placed on the current or any succeeding page), select the new frame,
and then select the text file name in the Assignment
List. The text continues from the first frame. This
process can continue with as many frames as you
wish, on different pages, until all text from the file is
placed in the chapter.
Once text is placed in a frame, it can be tagged in exactly the same manner as text placed in the underlying page. Tagging text changes text attributes, and

6-2

REFERENCE GUIDE

Frames and pictures

HINTS, TIPS, & TECHNIQUES

Figure 6-1 First step in newspaper layout: Create
underlying grid with Margins & Columns.

changes the placement of text within the frame (e.g.,
right justifY, center.) All tag spacing is measured
from the edge of the frame, not the edge of the page.

Figure 6-2 Second step in newspaper layout: Create
Frames to hold various text files. Set margins and
columns for individual frames.

REFERENCE GUIDE

6-3

HINTS, TIPS, & TECHNIQUES

Frames and pictures

Figure 6-3 Place additional frames on page. Place
text and pictures files in each frame.
Figures 6-1, 6-2, and 6-3 show how to compose part
of the first page of a newsletter.
~

When placing text from the same file into different
frames on the same page, the first part of the text is
always put in the frame which was placed on the page
first, and the last part of the text is put in the frame
which was placed on the page last.
If you cut a frame and then immediately paste it, this
frame becomes the last frame on the page. Use this
technique to re-order text flowing within frames on
the same page.
Also note that if one text frame partially overlaps
another text frame, the last frame created appears on
top of the first frame created. The text in the bottom
frame flows around$the frame on top.
Since no text is placed in the underlying page using
this approach, new pages are not created automatically. Therefore, use the Insert New Page option in
the Page menu to add new blank underlying pages,
as needed. Then continue placing new frames and ad-

6-4

REFERENCE GUIDE

Frames and pictures

HINTS, TIPS, & TECHNIQUES

ding text. Or, you can place the text cursor in the underlying page and create a new text file for the underlying page. The end of file marker will appear in
the underlying page. If the frames placed over the
underlying page completely cover the area bounded
by the column guides, this end of file marker will be
pushed to the next page, thus creating a new page
automatically.
Xerox Ventura Publisher does not require that all
text from a given file be placed in the chapter. This is
useful because newspaper layouts often require that
the end of a story be truncated in order to fit. Xerox
Ventura Publisher allows this. However, the entire
original article is still saved when the chapter is
saved.
Each frame can have its own set of margins, columns,
vertical rules, caption settings, column balance, and
background shading.
Text from different wordprocessors can be placed in
different frames within the same chapter. When the
chapter is saved, each text file is saved under its
original file name, and in its original wordprocessor
format (unless changed with the File TypelRename
option). By placing different text files into different
frames, you can combine multiple text files into one
chapter.
Text can be cut, copied, or pasted from one frame to
another, even if these frames contain text from different wordprocessors.
~

Although text can flow from a frame on page 12 to a
frame on page 27, text cannot be made to flow from a
later page back to an earlier page.

Blank document template
Different issues of a newsletter or newspaper often
use the same layout. Rather than spend the time to
REFERENCE GUIDE

6-5

HINTS, TIPS, & TECHNIQUES

Frames and pictures

place frames in the same place on the same pages for
each new issue, you can create and save a complete
chapter for your first issue. Then use the Remove File
option in the Edit menu to remove each file in the Assignment List from your chapter. For instance, select
the first frame on the first page and then select
Remove File in the Edit menu. Next, select the
Remove from: List of Files option. The file is
removed from each frame in the chapter, but the
frames, and all the frame settings, remain. Mter all
files have been removed in this way, use the Save As
option to save the chapter under a new name. For the
next issue, all you need to do is retrieve this blank
chapter, load the appropriate text and picture files,
place these files in the frames that are already in the
chapter, save the chapter under a new name, and
then print.

Creating identical frames
If the same size frame with identical margins, ruling
lines, captions, and backgrounds is to be used over
and over, make one master frame of the proper size
and add the desired margins, ruling lines and backgrounds. Then copy this frame to the clipboard, go to
each page where you want the frame to appear, and
paste a copy of the frame on the new page.
Pasting a frame onto the page from which it was
copied results in two identical frames being placed on
top of one another. Merely move one of the frames to
another location.

Selecting frame underneath
When one frame is placed entirely under one or more
frames, you cannot select the frame on the bottom in
the normal way. However, if you press and hold the
Ctrl key while you select, you can select each frame
in succession, starting with the currently selected
frame.

6-6

REFERENCE GUIDE

Frames and pictures

HINTS, TIPS, & TECHNIQUES

Precise frame size and placement
Frames can be placed and sized precisely using the
Sizing & Scaling options. (See the Menu Commands chapter.) On the other hand, the mouse provides a much faster way to draw and change the size
of the frame. A good way to take advantage of both
features is to Show Rulers and then use the mouse
to create and place the frame as closely as your eye
and the resolution of the screen allows. Then select
the frame and use the Sizing & Scaling option to
make minor, but exact, adjustments to the frame's
placement and size.

Multiple frame selection
Several frames can be selected at the same time and
then moved, cut, copied, pasted, or re-sized as a
group. To select several frames, make sure the Frame
Setting function is enabled. Then press and hold
either Shift key on the keyboard as you select each
frame. Finally, release the Shift key and then move,
cut, copy or paste the group offrames.
To de-select one of a group of selected frames, hold
down either shift key and select that frame.
Selecting any frame without pressing the Shift key
de-selects all other frames.

Display without selection borders
When using any function other than Paragraph Tagging, a light textured border is displayed around each
picture. This border is used to illustrate the placement of the frame and will not be printed. Select the
Paragraph Tagging function to display the frames
without these selection borders. To add borders that
will print, use the Ruling Lines options in the
Frame menu, as described in the Menu Commands
chapter.

REFERENCE GUIDE

6-7

HINTS, TIPS, & TECHNIQUES

Text editing

Text editing
Copy-fitting
Copy-fitting is the process of making the copy (text)
fit a given space. Xerox Ventura Publisher provides
several copy-fitting tools that can be used individually or together to solve copy-fitting problems. These
tools and their application are described below:
1) Text Editing. The traditional way, and still the
best, to get copy to fit a given space is to add and
delete text. Xerox Ventura Publisher's Text Editing
function gives you a wordprocessor that not only lets
you add and delete text, but lets you see how the page
will look when it is printed.
2) Frame Size. If a frame has been placed on the
page, its size can be increased or decreased. As its
size is changed, more or less text is placed in the underlying page and text is "pushed" or "pulled" from
the next page as needed. If Line Snap is turned on,
you can easily control the number of lines of text in
the underlying page that are pushed or pulled to and
from the next column or page. A variation on this
technique is to add an empty frame, with both
Column Snap and Line Snap turned on. Make the
frame exactly one or two lines high and equal to the
width of either the column or the page, as necessary.
This method is equivalent to the old practice of adding a one line block of lead, when type was set in
lead. Figures 6-4 and 6-5 show how to use this technique.
~

6-8

When using this technique, remember that the
Widow and Orphan control and Keep With Next
settings (in the Breaks option of the Paragraph
menu) may cause several lines of text and any associated heading to move to the next column or page.
If this happens, use one ofthe other copy-fitting techniques instead.
REFERENCE GUIDE

Text editing

HINTS, TIPS, & TECHNIQUES

P.!1!II!fII1P,!Ii1lillll!!!llllil1IIIII!m.::: forms

of equity.
:
the data processing:
throughout the United:

lCD-ROM Breaks New
lGround
!compact Disk Read Only Memory (CD·ROM) is
:rapidly emerging new technology for the retrieval,
:vast amounts of information from an optical dis
;This new peripheral device allows a totally ne'
!functionality in the use of microcomputers.

+
can

be loaded:

flneo!)' of Operation
: Information stored on a CD·ROM can be loade
:into memory (RAM), displayed and printed, as Wi1
:other media. While that data in RAM may be altere
:and stored to a conventional magnetic disk, th
:original information on the CD·ROM is unalterable, a
;.Nays ensuring the original copy is intact.The storag
:capacity, low cos~ and read only feature of C[
:ROM bring an
enormous new capability 1
:microcomputer users .

..~~~.. p'~in!~.~, .. ?-.~.~i!h: .........: .........................................................................

Figure 6-4

Right column one line short

pay, bonus and incen·:
nor not incumbents:
forms of equity.
:
the data processing:
throughout the United:

(CD'ROM) is a:
fo r th e retri ev al o~
an optical disk.:
a totally nev-.-:

:heads of 2,400 organizations throughout the Unite
:States.

CD-ROM Breaks New
lGround
:Compact Disk Read Only Memory (CD'ROM) is
:rapidly emerging new technology for the retrieval,
:vast amounts of information from an optical dis
;This new peripheral device allows a totally ne'
!functionality in the use of microcomputers.

,..""

__

....................................................................
,............... ,..................
.................................................................... ..................................
.........................................................
.

flneo!)' of Operation
: Information stored on a CD·ROM can be loade
:into memory (RAM), displayed and printed, as Wi1
:other media. While that data in RAM may be altere
:and stored to a conventional magnetic disk, th
:original information on the CD·ROM is unalterable, a
ways ensuring the original copy is intact.The storag
:capacity, low cos~ and read only feature of C[
:ROM bring an
enormous new capability 1
..... :l]j~.r.Q.~9mp.~.l~L.W.~.r.~, ......................................... .

Figure 6-5

REFERENCE GUIDE

Frame added. Columns now even

6-9

HINTS, TIPS, & TECHNIQUES

Text editing

3) Add New Tag. You can create a new tag and then
use the Tracking control in the Typographic option to
increase or decrease the space between characters.
When this tag is applied to a paragraph, it will subtly increase or decrease its length.

Tables
Tabular material can be formatted in many ways.
The simplest is to place tabs between each item in the
table. The Tab option in the Paragraph menu is then
used to set the horizontal position for each item following a tab. Tables such as the one shown in Figure
6-6 can be easily formatted in this way.
Honda, , , Toyota, , , ,Volvo "Pontiac
Price $3,163" $11,449"

$10,333 , $14,370

De st

21 0 , , , "

Auto

390 , , . , , 420" , , , ,610 "".455

Air

695 , , , , , 700,., , . . 725 ,.," 750

Figure 6-6
leaders

139 , , , , , ,21 0 ' .... 320

Simple table using horizontal tabs and

Horizontal rules can be added to any table by setting
the tag ruling lines (above or below.)
For more complex tables, type the text directly into
text boxes created using the Graphics Drawing option, and then use the Line Attributes option to draw
lines around these boxes. See the Graphic Drawing
chapter for details on table creation.

6·10

REFERENCE GUIDE

Text editing

HINTS, TIPS, & TECHNIQUES

Automatic conversion to typographic characters
Xerox Ventura Publisher can create documents with
real typographic attributes, including em (-) dashes
and typographic quotes (" ".) Since your computer
keyboard doesn't contain these characters, Xerox
Ventura Publisher lets you enter them using the Alt
key, as described in Chapter Four.
However, these characters can also be entered directly from your wordprocessor by enclosing the decimal
equivalent for the character (see Appendix E) inside
of the appropriate brackets. For instance, a left
typographic quote can be inserted while using a
wordprocessor by typing <169>.
These codes can be entered easily if your wordprocessor supports keyboard macros. Or, you can use the
search and replace function in your wordprocessor.
For instance, search for every occurrence of:
/\

(where /\ is a space), and replace it with <169>. Then
search for every occurrence of" and replace with
<170>.
To create em dashes, which are used to separate
parenthetical statements-such as this one-most
typists type two hyphens in a row like this: --. If you
follow this convention, simply search for every occurrence of two hyphens and replace with <197>.

Page break
Many wordprocessors let you create a new page at
any point in the text. Xerox Ventura Publisher lets
you do this by selecting Page Break After in the
Breaks option of the Paragraph menu. However, you
may want to create a page break while typing, just
like you do with a wordprocessor. This is easy to do:

REFERENCE GUIDE

6-11

HINTS, TIPS, &TECHNIQUES

Style sheet

~

Create a new tag with attributes identical to those
of Body Text.
~ Set Page Break Mter for this new tag.
~ Assign this tag to a special function key.
To create a page break, press this function key while
editing a Body Text paragraph. Text following the
page break is pushed to the next page or frame.

Style sheet
Creating style sheets
A style sheet is a computer file which contains page
layout settings, margin and column settings, and a
series of typographic tags. These tags can be applied
to any paragraph in a chapter. When applied, the tag
name is inserted invisibly into the paragraph, and
the paragraph is reformatted according to the text attributes associated with the tag.
The style sheet approach allows the same typographic formats to be applied to many chapters,
regardless of which wordprocessor was used to create
the chapter and who wrote the chapter. It also lets
you instantly change the format of an entire chapter.
This is useful, for example, if you want to customize
manuals for different customers. Finally, style sheets
let you format large chapters very quickly, and yield
a consistent look from page to page, chapter to chapter, regardless of who uses the style sheet.

Loading a Style Sheet
An existing style sheet is loaded either by choosing
the Load Different Style option in the File menu,
or by opening an existing chapter (which automati- ~
cally loads the associated style sheet.) Once loaded, a
style sheet is modified by:

6-12

REFERENCE GUIDE

HINTS, TIPS, & TECHNIQUES

Style sheet

• Changing the settings in the Paragraph menu
• Changing the Page Layout, Widows & Orphans, Auto-numbering, and Footnote settings
options in the Page menu
• Modifying the Frame Settings for the underlying page
• Loading a new printer width table
If either the style sheet or the chapter is saved, the

changes made are saved in the original style sheet
file. However, if the Save As New Style option in the
File menu is chosen, and a new file name is specified,
then a new style sheet is created.
~

Any modification to the style sheet is saved whenever
the current Chapter is saved. If you don't want these
changes to affect other Chapters which use the same
style sheet, select Save As New Style and enter a
different style sheet name before saving the chapter.

Designing Style Sheets
To design a style sheet, first make a sketch of how the
page should look. If this sketch is done thoroughly,
the style sheet can be prepared very quickly. To
create the style sheet, follow these steps:
~

Load an existing style sheet. Most people find
it easier to modify an existing design than to
create a completely new style sheet. Use the Load
Different Style option in the File menu.
~ Load a text file. Place this text file in the underlying page. This gives you sample text to format as
you make changes to the style sheet.
~ Change the margins and columns. Enable the
Frame Setting function and select the underlying
page. Then select the Margin and Column option
in the Frame menu and enter information for both
the left and right page. If only one page is
specified, Xerox Ventura Publisher automatically
makes the right and left page settings identical. If
the chapter is to be bound, add additional space to
REFERENCE GUIDE

6-13

HINTS, TIPS, & TECHNIQUES

Style sheet

the right margin on left facing pages, and add
more space to the left margin on right facing pages
to allow space for stapling and hole drilling.
~ Change the Page Layout, Widow & Orphan,
Auto-Numbering, and Footnote settings.
These four options in the Page menu are stored
with the style sheet.
~ Set the underlying page's vertical rules.
Select the Vertical Rules option in the Frame
menu, and enter information for both the left and
right page.
~ Modify existing tags. Enable the Paragraph
Tagging function and use the options in the
Paragraph menu to change the attributes of the
tags in the existing style sheet. You may want a
different typeface or size, or perhaps different
spacing between lines. For each tag you want to
modify, it is good practice to examine each option
in the Paragraph menu. Any changes made are immediately reflected in the tagged paragraph. If
you don't like what you see, change it. Pay special
attention to Body Text, since the format for this
tag provides the foundation for the overall design.
~ Create new tags. To create a new tag name,
enable the Paragraph Tagging function and tag a
paragraph with a tag similar in design to the one
you want to create. Then select the Add New Tag
button, shown just below the Function Selector.
When you select OK, the new tag name is added
to the Assignment List, and the new tag is
automatically assigned to the selected text.
~ Delete unwanted tag names. Use the Remove
Tag option to get rid of any tags not needed.
~ Save the style sheet. Select the Save as New
Style option in the File menu. Type a new name
on the Selection: line if you want to create a new
style sheet. Otherwise, select an existing name in
the Item Selector, and then select OK.
~

6-14

Any modifications made to the style sheets supplied
with Xerox Ventura Publisher should be saved under
a different name. This assures that your documents

REFERENCE GUIDE

Style sheet

HINTS, TIPS, & TECHNIQUES

always look like the sample documents in Appendix
L. If a style sheet should inadvertently be modified,
simply copy the original file from the Examples disk
supplied with Xerox Ventura Publisher back to your
computer hard disk.

Menu Options Stored With Style Sheet
The following are stored with the style sheet:
• All paragraph tag settings
• Margin and column settings for the underlying
page. (Margin and column settings for each individual frame are stored with the chapter.)
• Page layout settings
• Widow and orphan settings
• Auto-numbering settings
• The printer width table name

Tag Names
Most good designs use very few different tags. Although Xerox Ventura Publisher lets you define up to
128 different tags, most design experts agree that
you should use only one or two typefaces per chapter,
and should only use three or four combinations of
sizes (e.g. 10 point, 14 point) and weights (e.g., bold,
italic.) Therefore, most style sheets consist of only a
few tag names.
Pick tag names that are short, so they can be easily
entered by the author in the original wordprocessor,
if desired. (See Appendix D for a description on how
to enter tag names directly in your favorite wordprocessor.)
Choose tag names that make it easy for the user to
see the hierarchy between related tags when looking
at the Assignment List. For instance, the names
Heading and Sub Heading definitely reflect a
hierarchy, but the two names will appear in different
parts of the alphabetized Assignment List. Also, both
REFERENCE GUIDE

6-15

HINTS, TIPS, & TECHNIQUES

Style sheet

require the author to type many keystrokes. A better
choice is Head I and Head 2, or even HI and H2.
Choose identical tag names as you design different
style sheets. This lets you instantly reformat old text
with new style sheets, and also reduces training as
new style sheets are designed.
The name Body Text cannot be changed or removed.

I@f

Tags previously placed in the text which do not match
the tag names in the current style sheet are placed,
in capital letters, in the Assignment List and assigned Body Text attributes.
For this reason, always enter tag names in lower
case, or with initial capitals. This allows you to see
whether the style sheet in use matches the tags already in the text. If a mismatch occurs, either select
the correct style sheet, or modify the upper case tag
attributes, as appropriate. If you do modify the uppercase tags, it's a good idea to use the Rename Tag
function to convert the name to lowercase or initial
capitals.

Generated Tags
When you create a header, footer, caption, automatic
section number, table of contents, or index, a tag is
automatically created with the name Z_HEADER,
Z_FOOTER, Z_CAPTION, etc. The initial tag attributes for these Generated Tags are taken from
the current definition of Body Text. However, these
generated tags can be modified and changed, like any
other tag. For instance, to put a ruling line under
each header, first enable the Paragraph Tagging
function, then select the header and, finally, use the
Ruling Line Below option in the Paragraph menu
to add the ruling line.
Generated Tags are always preceded by the capital
letter Z. These tags are usually not shown in the As6-16

REFERENCE GUIDE

~

~

HINTS, TIPS, & TECHNIQUES

Style sheet

signment List because they are not generally assigned to any other paragraph. However, they can be
shown in the Assignment List by selecting Show
Generated Tags in the Set Preferences option.
The number of tags in the current Style Sheet, plus
the number of non-matching tags in all current text
files, plus the number of generated tags, cannot exceed 128.

Vertical tabs
The Tab option in the Paragraph menu defines
simple horizontal tab stops. This feature can be used
to format simple text for tables. However, if more text
is available then fits between two tab stops, the
whole line is pushed to the right, beyond the right
margin edge if necessary. In such cases, you may
want text to flow automatically within a temporary
column, as shown in Figure 6-7. This is known as a
Vertical Tab.
A vertical tab is different from a column in the follow-

•
Figure 6-7

REFERENCE GUIDE

Vertically tabbed text

6-17

HINTS, TIPS, & TECHNIQUES

Style sheet

ingways:
A column is a predefined Xerox Ventura
Publisher function. A vertical tab is simply an
effect created with a series of Tag attributes.
• The "column" length in a vertical tab is equal
to the length of one paragraph, whereas a real
column has a fixed length.
Vertical tabs are not generated by placing tab characters in the text. Instead, to create vertical tabs, follow these steps:

>- When typing text using your wordprocessor, make
each block of text to be vertically tabbed a separate
paragraph.
>- Create a tag for each vertical tab column. For each
tag, use the In From Left and In From Right settings in the Spacing option to define the left and
right boundaries of each column.
>- Set the Line Break Before for the first vertical tab;
Line Break After for the last vertical tab; and No
Line Break for any vertical tabs in between.
>- Set Keep With Next to Yes for each vertical tab tag
except the last one.
>- Set Allow Within to No.
The &TBL2-Ll style sheet in Appendix L provides a
good example of how to design vertical tabs.
Color separations

The offset printing color separation process requires
a separate black and white page for each primary
color. Through the use of style sheets, Xerox Ventura
Publisher can automatically produce a separate
black and white document for each color to be
printed.
For example, suppose you want to print all
paragraphs tagged as a HEADING in blue, and print
all paragraphs tagged as a SUBHEADING in red. To
6-18

REFERENCE GUIDE

HINTS, TIPS, & TECHNIQUES

Style sheet

do this
~

Set the font attribute to WHITE for every tag except HEADING. Leave this tag black.
~ Save as a new style sheet called BLUE.
~ Next, set the font attributes to WHITE for every
tag except SUBHEADING. Leave this tag black.
~ Save as a new style sheet called RED.
~ Finally, set HEADING and SUBHEADING to
WHITE, and every other tag to BLACK.
~ Save this style sheet as BLACK.
To print separations for any chapter formatted with
the original style sheet, you need only load the BLUE
style sheet, then print the chapter; load the RED
style sheet, then print the chapter; and finally load
the BLACK style sheet, and then print the chapter.

REFERENCE GUIDE

6-19

HINTS, TIPS, & TECHNIQUES

Style sheet

This page intentionally left blank.

6-20

REFERENCE GUIDE

APPENDIX A
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
Xerox Ventura Publisher is contained on eleven
separate disks. These disks contain all files needed to
create a version of the program which is customized
for your particular combination of computer,
graphics board, mouse, and printer. Typefaces
designed for your particular display and printer are
also included on these disks.
To install your software, follow the instructions
below exactly. Installation is accomplished by selecting printer and display options from menus on the
screen. These selections are made by typing a single
letter in either upper- or lowercase. If you make a
mistake and type the wrong letter, simply type the
correct letter. (You do not need to press backspace or
delete.) Press Enter to complete each entry. In most
cases, the following setup should only take 15-20
minutes.
If you have ordered a printer, but have not yet installed it, you can install Xerox Ventura Publisher
and connect the printer at a later time.

Installation with other programs
It is recommended that background utilities such as
Sidekick not be installed when running Xerox Ventura Publisher. These utilities reduce the amount of
space available, resulting in slower operation. If installed, activation ofthese background utilities while
running Xerox Ventura Publisher is not recommended.

REFERENCE GUIDE

A-l

APPENDIX A-INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

Hard disk space required
You need the following amount of space on your hard
disk to install Xerox Ventura Publisher:
• 700K bytes for Xerox Ventura Publisher, display driver, and hyphenation dictionaries.
plus
• 260K bytes for example files. These can later
be deleted, if desired.
plus
• Between 140K bytes and 2200K bytes for each
printer driver and associated fonts as follows:
- Epson Dot Matrix - 350K bytes
- HP LaserJet - 220K bytes
HP LaserJet Plus - 2200K bytes
- JLaser, AST TurboLaser, Cordata - 1200K
bytes
- PostScript, Interpress - 240K bytes
- Xerox 4045 - 2200K bytes
- ~erox 4020 - 340K bytes
For example, to install Xerox Ventura Publisher for
the 4045 laser printer and the Xerox 4020 color ink
jet printer requires (600 + 260 + 2200 + 340) = 3400K
bytes.
Most of this space is used for printer fonts.

Updating from version 1.0
If you previously installed an earlier version of Xerox
Ventura Publisher, read this section. Otherwise, skip
the rest of this section and proceed to the next section, Software Installation.

A-2

REFERENCE GUIDE

~

APPENDIX A-INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

If you modified the HYPHUSER.DIC file, copy
this file to a new subdirectory called VENTURA
prior to installation of version 1.1 as follows:
MD \ VENTURA Enter
CD \ GEMAPPS \ VPSYS Enter
COPY \HYPHUSERDIC \ VENTURA \ HYPHUSERTMP Enter

Anew HYPHUSER.DIC file is created during installation. Mter installation, execute the following:
CD \ VENTURA Enter
COPY HYPHUSERTMP HYPHUSERDIC Enter
DEL HYPHUSERTMP Enter

If you added any additional fonts to version 1.0,
these new fonts and associated width tables must be
copied to the VENTURA directory.

Finally, if you have not installed any other GEM
programs, and have not copied any files to the following directories, delete all files in the GEMSYS,
GEMBOOT, GEMDESK, and GEMAPPS directories as follows: (Respond with Y anytime the computer asks Are You Sure?)
CD \GEMSYS Enter
DEL *.* Enter
CD \GEMBOOT Enter
DEL *.* Enter
CD \GEMDESK Enter
DEL *.* Enter
CD \GEMAPPS\ VPSYS Enter
DEL *.* Enter
CD \GEMAPPS Enter
DEL *.* Enter
RD VPSYS Enter
CD \ Enter
RD GEMAPPS Enter
RD GEMSYS Enter
RD GEMBOOT Enter
RD GEMDESK Enter

REFERENCE GUIDE

A-3

APPENDIX A-INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

Software installation

Software installation
~

Note: The installation process can be aborted at any
time by pressing and holding the Ctrl key and then
pressing the Break key.

~

~

Load DOS according to the instructions in your
Microsoft or IBM DOS manual. Mter loading DOS,
you will see the following on your computer screen:

II
You may see a different letter, depending on the letter your computer uses to designate the hard disk.
Insert the disk labeled Xerox Ventura Publisher
Application Disk into the "A" floppy disk drive.
(This is usually the top or left drive in a computer
with two floppy disk drives.) Close the drive door. ~
Then type A:VPPREP Enter
~

If you install from any drive other than A, type
n:VPPREP n: where n is replace with letter of the
floppy disk drive.
In a few seconds, the following message appears:

Welcome to Xerox Ventura Publisher Prep!
Is your hard disk drive C? Y

Most systems use the letter "c" as the drive designation. To install Xerox Ventura Publisher on drive "C",
press Enter. If your computer uses a different letter,
or you have more than one hard disk drive and want
to install on other than the "c" hard disk, type:
N Enter
A-4

REFERENCE GUIDE

Software installation

APPENDIX A-INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

If you answer N, the computer asks you to: Type your
hard disk drive letter ( A-Z )?
Respond by typing the appropriate letter. For instance, to install for the D drive, type:
DEnter

Xerox Ventura Publisher next asks:

Are you installing this version for the first
time? Y

Press Enter. If you have already installed version 1.1.
To change only part of the installation, press:
N Enter
Once you have decided which hard disk drive to use,
Xerox Ventura Publisher displays the message:

Creating Ventura Publisher Directories

You are then instructed to:

Remove the
from drive
Insert the
drive A.
Press Enter

Ventura Publisher APPLICATION DISK
A.
SCREEN DEVICE DRIVER DISK (#3) into
to continue.

Remove the Application Disk and insert the disk
labeled Ventura Publisher Device Driver Disk #3 into
the A drive. Close the drive door and press Enter.
In a few seconds you will see the following display:
REFERENCE GUIDE

A-5

Software installation

APPENDIX A-INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

Which graphics card and display do you have?
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I

IBM Color Card / Color Display (640x200)
IBM Enhanced Card / Color Display (640x200)
IBM Enhanced Card / Enhanced Display (640x350)
IBM Enhanced Card i Monochrome PC Display (640x350)
IBM New Enhanced Card / New Color Display (640x480)
IBM 3270 Pc / Monochrome PC Display (640x350)
Hercules Card / Monochrome PC Display (720x348)
Xerox 6065 / AT&T 6300 (640x400)
MDS Genius Full Page Display (720 x 1000)
J
Xerox Full Page Display (720 x 992)
K Wyse WY-700 Display (1280 x 800)
L ---THE FOLLOWING DRIVERS SHOULD ONLY BE USED WITH
COLOR PRINTERS--M IBM Enhanced Card / Color Display 16 Colors 640x200
N IBM Enhanced Card / Enhanced Display 16 Colors
640x350
o AT&T Display Enhancement Board (640 x 400) 16 colors
Type the letter of the graphics card you have:

Your computer must have one of these graphics
cards, or else a card that emulates one of these
products, in order to run Xerox Ventura Publisher.
Xerox Ventura Publisher does not work with a textonly monochrome graphics board. If you aren't certain what type of board you have, consult your computer dealer.
In order to maximize performance, do not install for
color operation unless you own a color printer.
Type the letter that corresponds to the type of
graphics board installed in your computer, and then
press Enter.
Xerox Ventura Publisher then asks:

A·6

REFERENCE GUIDE

Software installation

APPENDIX A-INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

Which mouse do you have?
A
B
C
D

E
F

G
H

No Mouse
PC Mouse or Mouse Systems Compatible / SummaMouse
Xerox, AT&T, Microsoft Buss Mouse ( Uses MOUSE.COM
Microsoft Serial Mouse ( RS232
SummaSketch 1201 with Stylus
SummaSketch 1201 with Cursor
SummaSketch 961 with Stylus
SummaSketch 961 with Cursor

Type the letter of the mouse you have:

If you have a Logitek Logi-Mouse, Summagraphics
Summa-Mouse, Torrington Mouse, or Microage
Mouse, type the letter B.
If you are installing for a Microsoft Bus Mouse, Xerox
6065 or AT&T 6300, type the letter C. If your bus
mouse does not function, consult the mouse
documentation for information on proper configuration of the jumpers on the mouse plug-in board.
~

Other bus mice not listed, and serial mice which require a MOUSE.COM file should also be installed as
option C.
If you answered the last question with anything
other than C, Xerox Ventura Publisher then asks:

Which communication port are you using for the mouse?
A
B

Communication Port #1
Communication Port #2

Type the letter for the communication port you're
using.

REFERENCE GUIDE

A-7

APPENDIX A-INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

Software installation

If you don't know the answer, select A and press
Enter. If the mouse doesn't work when you have
finished with installation, reinstall it as B. (Answer
No to the question Are you installing this version
for the first time?)
Xerox Ventura Publisher then asks:

Which printer do you have?
A
B
C
D
E
F
G

H
I
J
K

L

EPSON MX/FX
HP LJ, w/92286F Font
HP LJ+, 150dpi
HP LJ+, 300dpi
POSTSCRIPT
INTERPRESS
JLASER
CORDATA
AST TURBO
XEROX 4045, 150dpi
XEROX 4045, 300dpi
XEROX 4020

Type the letter of the of printer you have:

Select the letter of the first printer you want to install
and press Enter. (If you are installing for the IBM
Proprinter, select A.)
Check Appendix F to verify your printer's switch settings, cabling, and other setup information. Additional important information for selected printers is summarized in the following pages.

Xerox 4045
The Xerox 4045 must have at least 450K RAM installed in order to use the 150 dpi driver, and at least
1.0 Megabyte RAM in order to use the 300 dpi driver.
The status sheet which prints whenever you turn on
A-8

REFERENCE GUIDE

APPENDIX A-INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

Software installation

the printer tells you the amount of RAM in your
printer, and shows the current configuration switch
settings. Check these switch settings with those
shown in Appendix F. If you have less than 1.0
megabytes in your 4045, install the 150 dpi printer
driver. If you have more than 1.0 megabytes, install
the 300 dpi driver.

Apple LaserWriterlPostScript printers
Note that the Apple LaserWriter, LaserWriter Plus,
and other PostScript printers are installed by typing
E. Consult Appendix F for important cabling and
setup information for Postscript printers. The Apple
LaserWriter can be connected directly to the PC, if
the proper cable is used.

JLaser printer
The JLaser printer requires certain changes to the
CONFIG.SYS file. Consult the JLaser reference
manual, or call Tall Tree Systems for assistance.

HPLaserJet
Note that the HP LaserJet (selection B) is different
from the HP LaserJet Plus (selections C and D.) If
you own an HP LaserJet, you need to purchase either
the 92286F font cartridge or the LaserJet Plus
upgrade kit from Hewlett-Packard. The 92286F font
cartridge is the only HP font cartridge that works
with Xerox Ventura Publisher, and it only works with
the standard LaserJet.
When installing the HP LaserJet Plus, install both
the 150dpi and the 300 dpi drivers. Install the 300
dpi driver first. You can then switch to the 150 dpi
driver if the LaserJet displays an Error 20 message
in its status display during printing to indicate that
it has run out of memory. The HP LaserJet II is installed as option D.

REFERENCE GUIDE

A-9

APPENDIX A-INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

Software installation

Cordata and AST TurboLaser
The Cordata and AST TurboLaser printers require
certain changes to both the AUTOEXEC.BAT and
CONFIG.SYS files. Install these printer for serial
port one or two. Consult Appendix F for details.
Mter you have selected a printer, Xerox Ventura
Publisher then asks:

Which printer port are you using?
A
B

C

D
E

Printer
Printer
Printer
Printer
Printer

Parallel Port #1
Parallel Port #2
Parallel Port #3
Serial Port #1
Serial Port #2

Type the letter of the printer port you are
using:

Consult your computer dealer if you are not certain
which option to choose.
Type the appropriate letter and press Enter.
~

Make sure the cable you use matches the wmng
diagrams in Appendix F, and that you don't have two
serial ports both configured as serial port #1. These
are the two most common causes of printer problems.
Xerox Ventura Publisher then asks:

Do you want to select another printer? N

You can install up to five printers simultaneously.
The printer driver, fonts, and width tables for each
printer are loaded onto the hard disk. However, since
A-10

REFERENCE GUIDE

Software installation

APPENDIX A-INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

these are big files, only install the printers you will
be using.
The first printer selected should be your final output
device, not your draft printer.
If you are installing more than one printer, type:
Y Enter

and answer the printer questions for every printer
you wish to install. When finished installing
printers, simply press Enter when asked: Do you
want to select another printer?
Xerox Ventura Publisher then places a message on
the screen, similar to the following.

Your screen device choices are:
Xerox 6065 / AT&T 6300 (640x400)
Xerox, AT&T, Microsoft Buss Mouse
(Uses MOUSE.COM )
No communication port selected
Your printer device choices are:
XEROX 4045,
LPT1:

l50dpi

Are these the correct screen and printer choices? Y

If the choices are correct, press Enter. Otherwise,
type N Enter. You are then given another chance to
answer all the above questions correctly.
You are then asked to insert a series of disks, depending on which choices you made for graphics card,
mouse, and printer. Messages similar to the following are displayed:

REFERENCE GUIDE

A-11

APPENDIX A-INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

Software installation

Insert the disk with the following label in drive A.
EPSON DRIVER/FONT DISK (#5)
Press Enter to continue.

Don't be surprised if some disks are never used, and
others inserted more than once. This is normal.
Installation time varies, depending primarily on the
number and type of printers and the speed of your
computer. The HP LaserJet Plus and Xerox 4045
take the longest (10-15 minutes); PostScript and Interpress take the least amount of time.
Do not be alarmed if the message "Expanding Font
Files" remains on the screen for 5-10 minutes or
more. All fonts supplied with Xerox Ventura
Publisher are stored on floppy disk in compressed
form in order to reduce the number of disks, and it
takes time to expand these back to their original size.
When the installation process is completed successfully, the following message appears on the screen:

This Concludes Ventura Publisher Prep.
If you wish to use Ventura Publisher.
Type VP at the DOS prompt and then press the Enter key.

A-12

REFERENCE GUIDE

APPENDIX A-INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

Post-installation

Post-installation
If you chose the Xerox, AT&T, or Microsoft bus mouse
(option C in the mouse menu), the following message
appears near the end of the installation process:

You have chosen a mouse which requires a resident
Mouse Driver.
You will need to add MOUSE into your autoexec.bat file.
You will also need to copy MOUSE.COM from the disk
which came with your mouse, onto your hard disk.

This message is a reminder to do two things after the
installation process is complete:

> Copy the file
>

MOUSE.COM from the floppy disk
that came with your mouse to the root directory of
the hard disk that contains Ventura Publisher
Add the word MOUSE to the AUTOEXEC.BAT file
in your root directory.

Any modification to the AUTOEXEC.BAT file should
be done with the ASCII text function of your
wordprocessor. Alternatively, if your system does not
have an AUTOEXEC.BAT file, you can create one
and add the word MOUSE to it by typing the following from the DOS prompt:
COPY CON: C:\AUTOEXEC.BAT Enter
MOUSE Enter
Ctrl Z Enter
where Ctrl Z means "press and hold the Ctrl key and
then type the letter Z."
~

REFERENCE GUIDE

To get the maximum performance from Xerox Ventura Publisher, you must add the following statement to the CONFIG.SYS file contained in the root
A-13

APPENDIX A-INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

Post-installation

directory of your computer (use the ASCII text function of your wordprocessor):
BUFFERS=15
FILES=15
Numbers greater than 15 may provide slight performance improvement. However, larger numbers
reduce the amount of memory available for the chapter text files.
If CONFIG.SYS doesn't exist, you can create it by
typing the following directly from the DOS prompt
(assuming your hard disk is C):
COPY CON: C:\CONFIG.SYS Enter
BUFFERS=15 Enter
FILES=15 Enter
Ctrl Z Enter
where Ctrl Z means "press and hold the Ctrl key and
then type the letter Z."

A-14

REFERENCE GUIDE

APPENDIXB
HYPHENATION DICTIONARY
Xerox Ventura Publisher automatically hyphenates
text whenever Hyphenation is selected in the
Alignment option. The place within a word where
these hyphens are placed is determined by a combination of a computer algorithm and a small dictionary (contained in the file HYPHEXPT.DIC, located in
the VENTURA directory.) This dictionary overrides
the algorithm for words where the algorithm fails.
Since the algorithm fails on only a few words, only a
few words are actually looked up in the dictionary.
The result is very fast hyphenation.
However, while this combination of algorithm and exception dictionary seldom inserts incorrect hyphens,
it may occasionally miss opportunities to insert
hyphens. Also, you may want to suppress hyphenation for certain words. Therefore, Xerox Ventura
Publisher also provides a User Hyphenation Dictionary in the file called HYPHUSER.DIC, also located in the VENTURA directory. This dictionary
overrides both the algorithm and the system exception dictionary. Thus, you not only can add hyphens
that might otherwise be missed, but you can also
force Xerox Ventura Publisher to hyphenate at a different point than the system would otherwise choose.
To add words to the dictionary, modify the file called
HYPHUSER.DIC using your wordprocessor. (Read
this file into your wordprocessor as an ASCII text
file.) Add the words with the hyphens inserted, as
shown on the next page, and then save the file back
to disk as an ASCII text file. Words can be inserted
in upper- or lowercase. Several words are already included in HYPHUSER.DIC to get you started.
If you want to suppress hyphenation for a particular
word-perhaps your company's name-you can enter
REFERENCE GUIDE

B-1

APPENDIX B-HYPHENATION DICTIONARY

that word into the HYPHUSER.DIC file with no
hyphens.
~

Failure to store this file as an ASCII file will result in
incorrect hyphenation.

Foreign language hyphenation algorithms
Xerox Ventura Publisher provides six hyphenation
algorithms:
• American English (fast)
• American English (exhaustive)
• French
• Italian
• Spanish
• UKEnglish
Any two algorithms can be installed at anyone time
and any two can be used within the same document.
This lets you create multi-lingual, justified and
hyphenated documents.
When you first install Xerox Ventura Publisher, both
hyphenation choices are set to American English
(fast.) To install different hyphenation algorithms,
copy the appropriate hyphenation algorithm from
the Utilities Disk to the VENTURA directory.
Hyphenation algorithms are found in files with the
extension HYl. Rename the extension from HYl to
HY2 if you want the algorithm to be the second
hyphenation choice in the Alignment option. If only
one hyphenation algorithm exists on the VENTURA
subdirectory, it is the only algorithm used. Only one
file with the extension HYl and one file with the extension HY2 should exist in the VENTURA directory
at anyone time.
The standard algorithm used for American English is
very fast and quite accurate, but it may miss some
hyphenation opportunities. When creating documents with narrow columns, this may result in an excessive number of loose lines. For critical applicaB-2

REFERENCE GUIDE

APPENDIX 8-HYPHENATION DICTIONARY

tions, a second algorithm for American English
provides more complete, equally accurate hyphenation, but takes somewhat longer to insert hyphens
when text files are loaded and when text is added
during text editing. This algorithm is contained in
the file USENGLS2.HYl in the Utility Disk. Install
as described in the previous paragraph. You should
typically only have one English language algorithm
installed at one time. Delete or rename the UK
English or American English (fast) algorithm if
necessary.
Only one exception dictionary is used for all languages. To enter words for languages which use
characters not available on your computer keyboard,
use the < > codes, as described in Appendix D. For instance, to enter the French word kaleidoscope, with
appropriate hyphens, type the following into the
HYPHUSER.DIC dictionary:

ka-I<130>i-do-scope
Example of hyphenation dictionary entries
in-de-fat-i-ga-ble
moth-er-hood
plu-ral-i-ty
ventura
xerox

REFERENCE GUIDE

8-3

APPENDIX 8-HYPHENATION DICTIONARY

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

8-4

REFERENCE GUIDE

APPENDIXC
COMMON PROBLEMS
Commonly asked questions
Consult the Index under the heading "Problems" to
find references to common problems, along with the
recommended solutions to these problems.

Can I buy additional fonts for my printer and
use them with Xerox Ventura Publisher?
• Yes. Consult Appendix K for details.

How can I send the printer output to a disk file
instead of to the printer? How can this disk file
then be printed?
• Read the Set Printer Info section in the
Menu Commands chapter.

How do I copy all the files associated with a
chapter? The DOS COpy command does not
work.
• Read the Multi-Chapter section of the Menu
Commands chapter. In particular, read the
sub-sections that deal with the multi-chapter
COPY command.

My printer doesn't print.
• Check that the cable is connected.
• Check that the cable is attached to the correct
connectors on the computer.
• If you are using a serial cable check the wiring
diagrams in Appendix F.
• If you are using a serial cable and your computer contains more than two serial ports,
REFERENCE GUIDE

C-1

APPENDIX C-COMMON PROBLEMS

make sure these ports are not configured identically (e.g., both set to COM1:.)
• Check Appendix F for other important information specific to your printer.

Does Xerox Ventura Publisher work on a network?

• Xerox Ventura Publisher is neither licensed for,
nor will it operate when run from a central file
server. Separate copies of the program, running on individual computers, can print over
the network to a shared printer in some network configurations. However, the network
software which runs on the local computer
may occupy so much RAM in some networks
that very little space remains for Xerox Ventura Publisher. This decreases performance.
I cannot get text to appear in a frame (or in
footnotes, box text, captions, footers, or
headers.)
• This generally occurs when the tag for a given
paragraph type (e.g., Z_BOXTEXT) is first
generated. Since this tag's attributes are
copied from Body Text, the Above, Below, In
From Left, or In From Right space applied to
the text may exceed the space available in the
frame, footnote, box text, caption, header or
footer. The solution is to:
Show Tabs & Returns.
Temporarily make the frame, box text, etc.
larger until the end of paragraph or end of
file mark is displayed.
Select the end of file mark, then select the
Spacing option in the Paragraph menu, and
finally reduce the Above, Below, In From
Left, or In From Right spacing, as necessary.

C-2

REFERENCE GUIDE

APPENDIX C-COMMON PROBLEMS

The picture exceeds the boundaries of the
frame; the picture appears too big for the
frame; the text is too big or too small compared
to the picture.
• These are all caused by the differences between Xerox Ventura Publisher and other
graphics programs. The solution in each case
is to use the Sizing & Scaling option to reduce
the picture fit the frame. In some cases,
making the frame slightly larger or smaller
may also help.

A chapter file was created and saved. When
Xerox Ventura Publisher was re-Ioaded, I
couldn't find the chapter.
• Remember to use the Open Chapter command, not the Load TextlPicture command,
when trying to retrieve the chapter. Also,
when saving a chapter, do not specify a file extension. Xerox Ventura Publisher looks for the
CHP file extension when retrieving a chapter.
If you saved the chapter with a file extension
other than CHP, you will have to change the
file filter in the Item Selector when you execute the Open Chapter command.

I can't see both pages of the document at once.
• Select Double-sided in the Page Layout option of the Page menu.

I cannot see pictures I placed into a frame.
Why?
• This usually occurs when large pictures are
placed into relatively small frames. The picture is actually in the frame; however, the portion displayed happens to be all white. The
solution is to use the Alt key and mouse to pan
a black portion of the picture into the frame.

REFERENCE GUIDE

C-3

APPENDIX C-COMMON PROBLEMS

Alternatively, choose Fit in Frame in the
Sizing and Scaling menu.
My color PC Paintbrush image only displays
and prints in one color.
• Multiple colors are not retained when PC
Paintbrush images are converted into Xerox
Ventura Publisher. Only the black color is
retained and printed.
Why doesn't the text cursor appear in the middle of a blank page when I try to place it there?
• Xerox Ventura Publisher is designed to format
text within a given frame, starting at the
upper left comer. If you want text to appear in
the middle of a blank page, draw a frame at
this point, placing the upper left comer of the
frame at the position where you wish to start
typing. Then either placethe cursor inside this
frame and begin typing, or attach a box text to
this frame and place the text in it.
When should I place text directly into a frame,
and when should I use box text?
• Place text directly into a frame when:
the text originates in an external
wordprocessor
the text must continue into another frame
(e.g., a newspaper article)
the text must be formatted into more than
one column
• Use box text in all other situations.
Which scanners does Xerox Ventura Publisher
support?
• Xerox Ventura Publisher supports any scanner
that converts its images into GEM image,
C-4

REFERENCE GUIDE

APPENDIX C-COMMON PROBLEMS

Halo DPE, or Z-soft's PC Paintbrush (version
2.5 or above) format.

Can I make text flow around irregular shaped
images like circles and triangles?
• Yes. See the Frame Setting Function section in the Functions chapter.

I can't get my PC Paint files to load. Why?
• PC Paint is a different product from PC
Paintbrush, and is not compatible with Xerox
Ventura Publisher.

When I try to print a document, I get a message
"device not receiving power." What is wrong?
• Check to see if:
the printer is turned on
cables are attached and secured
the cable you are using is the correct one for
this printer
• If this problem is encountered when first using
Xerox Ventura Publisher, an incorrect cable is
the most likely cause of the problem. Check
the cable with a continuity tester or similar
device in order to verifY correct wiring.

REFERENCE GUIDE

C-5

APPENDIX C-COMMON PROBLEMS

Error messages and alerts
The following is an alphabetical listing of error messages that can appear in Xerox Ventura Publisher,
along with an explanation of what they mean and
what to do when they occur.

A file by that name already exists. Do you wish
to choose a new name or overwrite the existing
file?
[New Name I Overwrite]
• This message lets you know that you are about
to destroy an existing file. You can either save
the file under a new name, or overwrite the existing file.

A tag by that name already exists. Therefore, a
new one by that name can't be created.
[OK]
• This message appears when trying to add a
tag with the same name as one already shown
in the Assignment List. Pick a different name,
or remove the tag from the Assignment List.

Abandon changes to this chapter and revert to
the previously saved version?
[OKI Cancel]
• You have selected the Abandon operation.
Select OK to throwaway all changes and open
the previously saved chapter.

C-6

REFERENCE GUIDE

APPENDIX C-COMMON PROBLEMS

All 6 of your repeating frames are already in
use.
[OK]

Xerox Ventura Publisher allows up to six
repeating frames per chapter. To fix this
problem, you must make one of the existing
six repeating frames a normal frame.

Are you sure you wish to delete all files that
match: filename
[Delete ICancel]
• This message appears during DOS File Operations as a reminder that you are about to erase
a file or files. Select Cancel if you don't want to
continue with the delete operation.

Couldn't find overlay file.
[OK]

• One or more files in the VENTURA subdirectory has been modified or deleted. Re-install
Xerox Ventura Publisher.

Currently, there is nothing on the clipboard.
Therefore, you can't insert any text at the current cursor location.
[OK]

• You must cut or copy text before you can paste
(i.e., insert.)

REFERENCE GUIDE

C-7

APPENDIX C-COMMON PROBLEMS

Do you want to save or abandon the changes
you made to this width table by removing
fonts?
[Save IAbandon]
If you remove fonts using the AddlRemove
Font option, you should Save these changes if
you want to create a new width table, or
Abandon if you decide not to make any changes.

Do you wish to stop or continue printing?
[Stop IContinue]
• This message appears when you press the
ESC key while printing. Select Stop to abort
the printing operation. Select Continue to go
ahead with printing.

Do you wish to remove the text from the ~
selected frame or cancel the request?
[Remove Text ICancel]
• When you type text directly into a frame
(rather than using the Load Text/Picture option to load text into a frame), this text is
stored in the chapter's caption file, along with
all other captions, box text, and text typed into
other frames. If you later try to assign a picture or text file to this frame, this message appears, warning you that the text in this frame
will be permanently lost.

C-8

REFERENCE GUIDE

APPENDIX C-COMMON PROBLEMS

Do you wish to re-anchor just this page's
frames, or all page's frames, or cancel the request?
[This Page IAll Pages ICancel]
• If you select This Page, Xerox Ventura Publisher looks through all the text on this page
for anchor entries, and then moves frames
throughout the document to these anchor
points. If you select All Pages, this process is
carried out across the whole document.

Fatal Error! The VP.RSC file couldn't be found
or would not fit in memory.
[Abort]
Fatal Error! The GEM VDI screen driver
couldn't be loaded.
[Abort]
• The VP.RSC or screen driver files in the VENTURA subdirectory have been modified or
deleted. Re-install Xerox Ventura Publisher.

Fatal Error! There wasn't enough memory for
the screen graphics buffer.
[Abort]
• You may be running a background utility that
interferes with the screen graphic buffer.
Remove this background utility and try again.
• You may be trying to run in a system which
has less than 512K RAM.

REFERENCE GUIDE

C-9

APPENDIX C-COMMON PROBLEMS

File name collision: filename. Do you wish to
rename this file, ignore the collision & copy
over, or cancel the archive process?
[Rename I Ignore I Cancel]
• During the Multi-Chapter Copy process, this
message appears if two files with the same
name, but located in different directories, are
to be archived to the same place.
filename already exists on the target drive. Do
you wish to overwrite the old version, keep the
old file, or cancel the archive process?

[Overwrite I Keep Old I Cancel]
• This message appears if a file with the same
name, but a different date and time, is found
on the target disk drive. Choose the option
desired. If the file has the same name and the
same date and time, Xerox Ventura Publisher
assumes that they are identical and does not
bother to re-copy the same file.

Headers, Footers, and other Repeating Frames
can't be cut or copied to the clipboard.
[OK]

• You cannot cut, copy, or paste frames which
are placed automatically by Xerox Ventura
Publisher. This includes headers, footers, and
footnotes.

C-10

REFERENCE GUIDE

APPENDIX C-COMMON PROBLEMS

If you intend to type text on an empty page,
choose New File and enter the name and select
the type of the file that will hold that text.
Otherwise, choose Cancel.
[New File I Cancel]
• This message appears when you place the text
cursor into a blank underlying page. Select
New File to create a new text file. Select Cancel to abort the operation.

Only text files can be renamed and retyped
using this command.
[OK]

• This message appears when creating a new
text file. Select New File to create a new text
file. Select Cancel to abort the operation.

Index entries can't be inserted inside of a footnote entry.
[OK]

• You cannot place an index entry into footnote
text placed at the bottom of a page.

Internal System Error! 1. Note what you just
did. 2. Use Save As ... to save your work. 3. Call
Tech. Support.
[Sorry]
• This message indicates that memory may have
been corrupted. Do not make any further
changes to your chapter. Us the Save As option and save the chapter under a different
name than shown in the Title Bar.

REFERENCE GUIDE

C-11

APPENDIX C-COMMON PROBLEMS

No directory can be removed until all the files
it contains have been deleted.
[Cancel)
• You must first delete all files within a subdirectory before the directory itself can be
deleted.

No file by the name you've typed exists. Therefore, it can't be removed or have its file type
changed.
[OK}

• You probably typed the wrong name. Spaces
within the name make a difference. For example, Heading land Headingl are two different names.

No files that match: filename were found.
[Cancel}
• You probably typed the wrong name or wrong
file extension.

No tag by the name you've typed exists. Therefore, it can't be renamed, removed, or converted to.
[OK1

• Check the tag name as shown in the Assignment List and try again. You probably typed
the wrong name. Remember, spaces within the
name make a difference. For example, Heading land Headingl are two different names.

C-12

REFERENCE GUIDE

I

APPENDIX C-COMMON PROBLEMS

Not enough memory to run the program. Either
add memory to your system or check your
CONFIG.SYS andAUTOEXEC.BAT files for any
drivers or resident applications that can be
removed.
[Abort]
You may be trying to run in a system which
has less than 512K RAM.
You may be running a background utility that
takes up memory space. Remove this background utility and try again.
Check the CONFIG.SYS file to see if any commands have been given which restrict the
space available.

o

o

o

Only text files can be renamed and retyped
using this command.
[OK]
o

The File TypelRename option is only available
for frames which contain text.

Output file already exists.
[Overwrite I Cancel]
o

The file you are trying to create has already
been created. You can either overwrite, or cancel the operation and save the file under a different name.

Over 95% of internal memory has been used.
You need to reduce the number of pages,
frames, files, or paragraphs in this chapter or
divide this chapter into two chapters.
[OK]
o

REFERENCE GUIDE

This message appears when the combination
of text, number of frames, number of
C-13

APPENDIX C-COMMON PROBLEMS

paragraphs, and number of tags exceeds the
amount of memory available. If your computer
has more than 640K memory, this does not
help. The message itself provides the recommended solution.

Save or Abandon changes to this chapter?
[Save IAbandon]
• This message appears if you have changed the
chapter since it was last saved. Choose Save
or Don't Quit, or else lose all changes made
since the chapter was last saved.

Save or Abandon changes to this publication?
[Save IAbandon]
• When you select Done in the Multi-Chapter
Operations Dialog Box, Xerox Ventura
Publisher reminds you to save the Publication ~
if any changes have been made since it was
last saved. Table of contents and index settings are saved with the publication.

Save or Abandon changes to this style sheet?
[Save IAbandon]
• This message appears just before you Quit, if
you have changed the style sheet since it was
last saved. Choose Save or Don't Quit, or else
lose all changes made since the style sheet was
last saved.

C-14

REFERENCE GUIDE

APPENDIX C-COMMON PROBLEMS

The current width table & the merge width
table are set for different devices: What should
be done?
[Ignore ICancel]
• You cannot merge width tables intended for
different printers (e.g. HP LaserJet Plus and
Xerox 4045).
The directory name you've specified already
exists, or the disk is full. Therefore no new
directory could be created.
[Cancel]
• You have attempted to create a directory that
already exists. Either choose a new name, or
else place this subdirectory name in another
directory path.
The file by the new name you just typed already exists. Do you wish to overwrite it or cancel the rename.
[Overwrite ICancel]
• If you attempt to rename an existing text file,
but specify a file name that already exists, you
can either cancel the File TypelRename operation, or else overwrite the existing file.
• You have selected a file which is not a standard publication file. You probably renamed or
copied an incorrect file; edited a PUB file and
saved it as something other than an ASCII
file; or specified the wrong file name.

REFERENCE GUIDE

C-15

APPENDIX C-COMMON PROBLEMS

The file named: filename referenced in the
chapter or publication you are currently loading, could not be found.
[OK]

• A text, picture, or chapter file has been deleted
or moved to another subdirectory.
The file you just tried to load doesn't exist.
Therefore, it can't be loaded.
[OK]

• A text or picture file has been deleted or
moved to another subdirectory.
The file you're trying to open as a Ventura
Publisher CHP file is not in the standard chapter file format.
[Cancel]
• You have selected a file which is not a standard chapter file. You probably renamed or
copied an incorrect file; edited a CHP file and
saved it as something other than an ASCII
file; or specified the wrong file name.
The file you're trying to open as a Ventura
Publisher PUB file is not in the standard publication file format.
[Cancel]
• You have selected a file which is not a standard style sheet file. You probably renamed or
copied an incorrect file, or specified the wrong
file name.

C-16

REFERENCE GUIDE

APPENDIX C-COMMON PROBLEMS

The file you're trying to load as a Ventura
Publisher STY file is not in the standard style
sheet file format.
[Cancel]
• You have selected a file which is not a standard style sheet file. You probably renamed or
copied an incorrect file, or specified the wrong
file name.

The file you're trying to use as a Ventura
Publisher WID file is not in the standard width
table file format.
[Cancel]
• You have selected a file which is not a standard width file. You probably renamed or copied
an incorrect file, or specified the wrong file
name.
• The new width table you created using the
utilities on the Utilities Disk has not been
created correctly. Make sure you placed the
fonts in the correct order (i.e., Normal, Italic,
Bold, Bold Italic.)

The HYPH*.DIC and/or *.HYI and/or *.HY2 files
couldn't be found or were too large. These files
are used to make sure that all words are correctly hyphenated.
[OK]

• At least one hyphenation dictionary and one
algorithm must be located in the VENTURA
subdirectory. To fix, copy the appropriate files
from the UTILITIES DISK #11 to the VENTURA subdirectory.

REFERENCE GUIDE

C-l?

APPENDIX C-COMMON PROBLEMS

The new Width Table file couldn't be loaded.
You may wish to try reloading this width file
after doing a NEW. For now, we are using the
current file instead.
[Okay]
• Whenever a style sheet file is loaded, either
directly or by opening a chapter, the style
sheet file automatically loads the width table
that was in use when the style sheet was last
saved. If that width table has been deleted, or
if the style sheet has been copied to another
system using the DOS COpy command, Xerox
Ventura Publisher will not be able to find the
width table. The current width table (e.g.,
OUTPUT. WID, located in the VENTURA subdirectory) will be used instead.
• To prevent this problem, always use the MultiChapter Copy command rather than the DOS
COpy command, when copying chapters to
floppy disk. To fix the problem, look at the contents of the style sheet file using the DOS
TYPE command. While most of what appears
on the screen will not be readable, you will see
the name of the width table and the disk drive
and subdirectory in which the width table file
should be placed. Copy the width table to this
directory.

The paragraph you are trying to tag/edit is
made up of text that was automatically
generated. This text can't be tagged or edited
directly.
[OK]

• You cannot use the Text Editing function to
edit a caption, header, or footer. You must instead select the appropriate option in the Page
or Frame menu and then edit the text from
within the Dialog Box.

C-18

REFERENCE GUIDE

APPENDIX C-COMMON PROBLEMS

The picture file you tried to load couldn't be
converted. Either it wasn't in the proper format or there wasn't enough disk space for the
conversion.
[Cancel]
• You have selected a file which does not match
the picture file format for the type of file you
specified. (e.g., You selected AUTOCAD, but
loaded a LOTUS file.) This message also occurs if your disk is almost full, and the picture
file is large. In this case, delete some files to
make room on your hard disk.

The style sheet file you requested could not be
found. Therefore, it was not loaded.
[OK]

• The style sheet file has been deleted or moved
to another subdirectory.

The tabs you have defined for this tag won't
show up since the tag is marked as Justified. To
make them show up, choose Left Aligned in the
Alignment dialog.
[OK]

• Justification overrides tab settings. Therefore,
you must turn Justify off in the Alignment option in order for tab settings to take effect.

The text file you're trying to load is not stored
in the wordprocessing format that you just
specified or that the CHP file indicates.
[Cancel]
• You have selected a file which does not match
the file format for your wordprocessor. You
probably renamed or copied an incorrect file;
REFERENCE GUIDE

C-19

APPENDIX C-COMMON PROBLEMS

edited a file and saved it as a different
wordprocessor file type; or specified the wrong
file name.
The values you're setting for margins and
columns exceed the width or height of the
frame.
[OK]

• To keep you from accidentally specifying margins that are larger than the page itself, Xerox
Ventura Publisher constantly monitors the
values you are entering and places this alert
on the screen if an incorrect value is entered.
Select OK, press ESC to clear the line, and
then type the correct value. If the message
reappears, check again to make sure you are
using the correct units (e.g., picas.)
There is not enough space on the target disk to
save the file. Do you wish to continue with a
new disk or cancel the archive process?
[Continue ICancel]
• This message indicates you've run out of room
on the floppy disk during a multi-chapter copy
operation. Insert the next floppy disk and then
select Continue to continue the archive
process.
There isn't enough memory to merge these two
width tables into one width table.
[OK]

• You must delete files on your hard disk to
make room for the new, merged width table.

C-20

REFERENCE GUIDE

APPENDIX C-COMMON PROBLEMS

There was not enough memory to begin the archive process.
[Cancel]
• Terminate the Multi-Chapter Operations by
selecting Done, then select NEW in the File
menu to remove the existing chapter from
memory. Finally, select the Multi-Chapter option and resume the archive process.
There wasn't enough memory to load and
hyphenate all of the text file you requested.
You may have to split this chapter & file into
two parts and try again.
[OK]

• In a 640K system, Xerox Ventura Publisher
can load approximately 500K bytes of text
which can contain up to 48,000 paragraphs.
These figures are approximate and depend on
what version of DOS you are running; on what
screen driver you installed (higher version of
DOS, and the color EGA driver reduces the
amount of text); on the size of your width
table; on the number of paragraphs in your
text; and on the number of tabs in your text.
To fix this problem, use your wordprocessor to
break the text file into several smaller files,
and then create two or more chapters instead
of one large chapter. When publishing data
from a database, you may be able to eliminate
this error message by replacing paragraphs
with line breaks.

REFERENCE GUIDE

C-21

APPENIt)D( C-COMMON PROBLEMS

There wasn't enough space for all the requested font fil~s. Some fonts may not display
or print correctly.
[OK]

• When load.ing a large number of new screen
fonts using the Screen Fonts option in the
Printer Info option, Xerox Ventura Publisher
may not be able to load all the fonts. Reduce
the number of fonts which match the screen
font extension.
• If you merge too many fonts into a width table,
Xerox Ventura Publisher may not be able to
load all these fonts. Use the AddlRemove fonts
option to reduce the number of fonts in this
width table.

This file could not be found: filename. Do you
wish to skip over it, or retry with a new disk, or
cancel the archive process?
[Skip IRetry ICancel]
• This message appears when retrieving a large
publication from several floppy disks. Insert
the next floppy disk, and select Retry. If you
can't find the file, but want to continue the archive process, select Skip.

This frame is too complex to completely format.
Try splitting it into two frames or reducing the
number of columns, tabs, leaders, and lines of
text.
[OK]

• If this error message appears, try to format

the page with fewer attributes, fewer columns,
fewer tabs, fewer frames or fewer paragraphs.
You can also create several frames on the
page. Then manually place text into each
frame by selecting the frame and then selectC-22

REFERENCE GUIDE

APPENDIX C-COMMON PROBLEMS

ing the file name in the Assignment List. See
the Repeating Frame option in the Menu section for information on how to create these
manually drawn frames automatically.
Unable to find Anchor Frame: frame name. Do
you wish to ignore, rename, or delete this unresolved anchor frame reference?
[Ignore I Rename I Delete]
• If no frame can be found in this chapter which

has an anchor name which matches the
anchor name specified in the text, then this
message appears. If you select Ignore, Xerox
Ventura Publisher continues with the anchoring process. If you select Rename, you are
then asked to specify a new text anchor name.
If you can remember the correct name which
you specified for the frame, enter that name. If
this name is correct, this new name replaces
the old name in the text, the frame is reanchored, and the frame anchoring process
continues. If you select Delete, the anchor
name in the text is deleted.
Using the fA=memory command line switch
may allow you to run but could cause some
printers not to work. Read more about the fA=
switch in the manual.
[Abort]
• If your computer contains less than 640K

RAM, or if you are using background utilities,
or if you are using network software which
uses more than 50K of RAM, you may not be
able to run Xerox Ventura Publisher. In some
cases, you can still run if you start Xerox Ventura Publisher by adding fA=n to the end of
the second line of the VP.BAT file, where n is
replaced with a number between 1 and 32.

REFERENCE GUIDE

C-23

APPENDIX C-COMMON PROBLEMS

This number represents the number of K bytes
to subtract from memory allocated to the
printer and graphics buffers and reallocate to
text files. The second line in the VP.BAT file
will then look something like this (depending
on which mouse and display are installed):
DRVRMRGR VP %1 IS=SD_X6655.EGAIM=321A=32

Note, however, that the Cordata, AST, and
JLaser printers may not work if you specifY a
large number. Therefore these printers may
not be usable in your system unless you
upgrade to 640K RAM, eliminate background
utilities, or run with a non-networked version
of DOS. Also, larger numbers may degrade the
drawing speed of graphic images on the
screen.

You can't merge a width table with itself.
[OK]

• When using the AddlRemove Fonts option, you
must merge a width table which is different
from the width table currently loaded.

You can't remove or rename the default Body
Text tag.
[OK]

• Body Text is the one tag name that cannot be
removed or renamed.

C-24

REFERENCE GUIDE

APPENDIX C-COMMON PROBLEMS

You can't remove a tag and then convert the
paragraph back to the same tag.
[OK]

• The name on the Tag Name to Remove and
Tag Name to Convert to lines cannot be the
same.

You can't remove every face, size, and style font
from a width table.
[OK]

• You must leave at least one font in a width
table.

You have to select a specific location for the
text entry cursor before you can paste any text.
[OK]

• This message appears if the text cursor is not
placed anywhere on the page and you attempt
to paste text. You must first place the text cursor at the location you wish to paste text, and
then select paste.

You must select some text before you can cut or
copy it to the clipboard.
[OK]

• This message appears if you attempt a cut or
copy operation without first selecting text.

REFERENCE GUIDE

C-25

APPENDIX C-COMMON PROBLEMS

Your disk is full. The file named: filename has
not been saved. Before trying to save it again,
delete enough files to make room.
[OK]

• You have run out of room on your hard disk.
Use the DOS File Operations to delete enough
files to make room for the chapter or style
sheet you are saving. If you Quit from Xerox
Ventura Publisher at this point without deleting some files and then saving, all changes
made since the chapter or style sheet was last
saved are lost.
You're out of memory. Save your document and
quit the program as soon as possible.
[OK]

• If you add a large number of frames or add
text to a large chapter, you may run out of ~
memory. Save the chapter and then quit from
Xerox Ventura Publisher. To correct the
problem, you must reduce the amount of text
in one or more of the text files in the chapter.
You're about to overwrite an existing caption.
You won't be able to recover the caption text. Is
that OK?
[OK I Cancel]

• If you don't want to overwrite the file, select
Cancel.

C-26

REFERENCE GUIDE

APPENDIX C-COMMON PROBLEMS

You've used 128 tags, files, or chapters. There
are no more available. If possible, remove those
that are no longer in use and try again.
[OK.]

• The combination of tags in the style sheet,
plus generated tags, and tags in the chapter
text files that don't match the style sheet, cannot exceed 128. This error message usually occurs when loading a text file which contains
tags which don't match the style sheet currently loaded. The usual solution is to select
New, load the correct style sheet, and then
Load the desired text file(s.)

REFERENCE GUIDE

C-27

APPENDIX C - COMMON PROBLEMS

This page intentionally left blank.

C-28

REFERENCE GUIDE

APPENDIXD
TEXT FROM OTHER PROGRAMS
Xerox Ventura Publisher can read text directly from
many popular wordprocessors. It can also read text
from many other programs which save text as a
standard ASCII file. Text is read using the Load
TextlPicture function. Text is saved automatically
when saving a chapter using the Save or Save As options. Once saved, text can be edited using a
wordprocessor. It can also be checked for spelling errors using a wordprocessor's spelling checker. Finally, text originally loaded into Xerox Ventura Publisher in one wordprocessor format can be converted
to another wordprocessor format using the File
TypelRename option in the Edit menu.
The two-way communication between a wordprocessor and Xerox Ventura Publisher lets you combine
the familiar user interface and advanced text
processing capability of your favorite wordprocessing
program with the graphics and typesetting features
of Xerox Ventura Publisher. Thus, you can add and
delete text in Xerox Ventura Publisher, while still
using a wordprocessor for spell checking, search and
replace, and moving large blocks of text.
This section explains how to prepare text from
various wordprocessors, Lotus 1-2-3, and dBase III
for use by Xerox Ventura Publisher.
~

The information in this appendix can also be used by
a programmer to convert text from a wordprocessor
or other program into text which can be read by Xerox
Ventura Publisher as an ASCII or Wordstar file.

Scope of text translation
Since Xerox Ventura Publisher provides its own margins, indents, hyphenation, page breaks, bullets,
REFERENCE GUIDE

0-1

APPENDIX D-l'EXl' FROM OTHER PROGRAMS

page numbering, headers and footers, footnotes, tab
settings, font information, table of contents, index,
and section numbering, this information does not
need to be entered when typing text in your favorite
wordprocessor. In fact, this information is not transferred to Xerox Ventura Publisher. Since it is not
transferred, and since Xerox Ventura Publisher
saves text files under their original file names, the
format information from the original wordprocessor
is eliminated as soon as a chapter containing the text
file is saved. If you want to retain the original
wordprocessor formatting, save the text file under a
different name before loading it into Xerox Ventura
Publisher.
~

Information other than text attributes, is lost when
Xerox Ventura Publisher saves a chapter containing
wordprocessor text.
However, text attribute information used by the
author to convey meaning is used. All attributes used
in Xerox Ventura Publisher's Text Editing function
(e.g., underline, boldface, font settings) can be transferred to and from any wordprocessor or any ASCII
file as described in the sections which follow.

Tags
Xerox Ventura Publisher's paragraph format tags
can be inserted at the beginning of any paragraph as
follows (the @ must be the first character in the line):

where TAGNAME is replaced by the name of the tag
assigned to the paragraph. (The A symbol indicates
that you should insert a space.) Thus, whether
tagged originally by the author, or whether entered
in the wordprocessor or in Xerox Ventura Publisher,
these tags can be inserted into the text as shown in
Figure D-l.

D-2

REFERENCE GUIDE

APPENDIX D-TEXT FROM OTHER PROGRAMS

@CHAPTER HEAD =APPENDIX CCOMMON PROBLEMS
@HEADING 2 =Commonly asked questions
Consult the Index under the heading <169>Problems<170> to find
references to common problems, along with the recommended
solutions to these problems.
@MESSAGE = <$IFonts;Adding new>Can I buy additional fonts for
my printer and use them with Xerox Ventura Publisher?
@LIST 2 = Yes. Consult Appendix K for details.
@MESSAGE = <$IFile;Print to file><$IPrinting;To a file>How can I
send the printer output to a disk file instead ofto the printer? How
can this disk file then be printed?
@LIST 2 =Read the Set Printer Info section in the Menu
Commands chapter.
Figure D-1 Text for Appendix C, as it appears in a wordprocessor.
Note index entries, line break, typographic quotes (<169> and <170»
and tag names.
Non-keyboard characters

Additional characters not found on the keyboard can
be inserted into text by enclosing the ASCII decimal
equivalent within brackets. (See Appendix E.) For instance, to insert a trademark symbol (TM), you type:
<191>
To use the characters without having them interpreted as part of a character attribute code, type two
brackets in a row. For instance, to produce the following:


REFERENCE GUIDE

D-3

APPENDIX 0-TEXT FROM OTHER PROGRAMS

type:

«text in brackets»
Tabs
Any time you press the Tab key on the keyboard, you
insert a tab character into the text. The wordprocessor then moves the cursor to the next tab stop setting
for that paragraph. Remember, however, that the tab
settings in the style sheet are at different locations
from the tab settings in the wordprocessor. This may
lead to incorrectly formatted tables, as shown in
Figure D-2. To avoid this problem, use tab settings in
the wordprocessor that are similar to the style sheet
to be used.

Tab Stop Matching
Wordprocessor
Tab Stops

2

3

4

5

6

!

!

!

!

!

//

This is text in column 1 [TABliTABI
Short text [TABI[TABliTABI

This is text in column 2
This is more text in column 2

2

Ventura Publisher
Tab Stops

3

!!
/

./

This is text in column 1 [TABlIT..(s]
Short text[TABI[TABliTABI

/This is text in cOlumn 2
.
This i~ more text in column 2

"'

....

Text Does
Not Align!

Make the tab stop settings in your word processor similar to the tab stops
in the style sheet you will be using.

Figure D-2 Tab stops in Ventura Publisher set differently from those in a wordprocessor causes text to
misalign
0-4

REFERENCE GUIDE

APPENDIX D-TEXT FROM OTHER PROGRAMS

Tab check list
• Turn justify off for any paragraph that contains tabs.
• Certain wordprocessors (such as Words tar)
when configured incorrectly, add spaces rather
than tabs. Make sure the wordprocessor is
configured to insert tabs.
• Text which includes tab characters does not
automatically wrap around frames.

Text attributes
Xerox Ventura Publisher correctly translates, displays, and prints text attributes, such as boldface
and underline, from each wordprocessor supported.
Similarly, any text attributes added using Xerox Ventura Publisher's Text Editing function are stored
back in the wordprocessor's native file format.
However, because Xerox Ventura Publisher can
create a much wider range of text attributes than any
wordprocessor, and because combinations of these attributes are treated differently within Xerox Ventura
Publisher, many attributes are stored back into the
original file using the codes shown below. For instance, the beginning of medium italic text is set by
inserting the following directly before the text to be
italicized:


In general, attributes native to the wordprocessor,
such as boldface, when used alone, are translated
back to the original attribute when a chapter is saved
in Xerox Ventura Publisher. When used in combination with other attributes, they are translated back,
using combinations of the codes shown on the following pages.

REFERENCE GUIDE

D-5

APPENDIX D-TEXT FROM OTHER PROGRAMS

Attribute

Code

Light weight type
Medium weight type
Bold weight type
Italics
Underline
Double underline
Overscore
Strikethrough
Small
Superscript
Subscript




<1>

<=>
<0>


<">


Color index

Replace nnn with one of the following numbers:
o
White
1
Black
2
Red
Green
3
4
Blue
Cyan
5
6
Yellow
Magenta
7
255
Reset to tag color
Typeface

Replace nnn with one ofthe following numbers (if
additional typefaces have been added, the
typeface ID assigned during the font addition
process---explained in Appendix K- is used):
Courier
1
Swiss (Helvetica)
2
Dutch (Times)
14
New Century Schoolbook
20
Palatino
21
Garamond
22
Bookman
23
Lubalin
24
Souvenir
25
Benguiat
26
Glyph a
27

D-6

REFERENCE GUIDE

APPENDIX D-TEXT FROM OTHER PROGRAMS

Friz quadrata
Zapf chancery
Trump Medieval
Melior
Galliard
New Baskerville
Goudy
Park Avenue
Bodoni
Bodoni Poster
Century Old Style
Cheltenham
Helvetica Narrow
Avant garde
Optima
Korinna
Helvetica Light
Helvetica Black
Franklin Gothic
Franklin Gothic Heavy
Helvetica Condensed Light
Helvetica Condensed
Helvetica Condensed Black
American Typewriter
Machine
Prestige Elite
Orator
Letter Gothic
Symbol
ZapfDingbats
Sonata
Reset to tag font

28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
100
101
103
104
105
128
129
130
255

Point Size

where the variable nnn is replaced by the type
size, measured in points (1 point equals 1/72 inch.)
nnn=255 resets to point size specified by the
paragraph tag.
Base Line Jump

where the variable nnn is replaced by the amount
of vertical offset, measured in 1/300 of an inch.

REFERENCE GUIDE

D-7

APPENDIX D-TEXT FROM OTHER PROGRAMS

nnn may range from -127 to +127 (about ± 1;2
inch. The measurement -001 is reserved and used
to reset the Base Line Jump to zero.
Begin Kerning

where the variable nnn is replaced by the amount
of left horizontal shift, measured in 11700 of an
inch. nnn may range from -127 to +127. The
measurement -001 is reserved and used to reset
the kerning to zero.
Resume Normal
~

All attributes are terminated at the end of a paragraph, even if the Resume Normal character «D»
is not encountered. Also, all previous attributes are
terminated any time new attributes are set.
Examples:
1) Attributes can be grouped together into sequences.

For example, to set Bold, Italic, Blue, the code is
. Any new text attribute sequence encountered
cancels all previous attributes.
2) Attributes native to the wordprocessor and the
codes described on the previous pages can be intermixed. For example to create the following effect
using Wordstar
airplane automobile
where the first word is boldfaced and underlined, and
the second word is boldface only, would require the
following within Words tar:
AUABairplaneAU automobileAB
This same effect can be produced using the codes
described on the previous pages as follows:
airplane automobile
0-8

REFERENCE GUIDE

APPENDIX D-TEXT FROM OTHER PROGRAMS

The author can choose either to use the attribute set
shown above, or continue to place attributes in the
text using the wordprocessor's own commands.

Other inserted text
In addition to paragraph tags and text attributes,
Xerox Ventura Publisher also inserts other characters into the wordprocessor text, including line
breaks, discretionary hyphens, non-breaking spaces,
frame anchors, index references and footnotes. These
are always stored back into the wordprocessor file as
shown below. Some wordprocessors support discretionary hyphens and non-breaking spaces, in which
case Xerox Ventura Publisher stores these in the
wordprocessor's native file format.

Line Break
The paragraph will have a line ending placed at the
location of this code. A line break only begins a new
line. It does not begin a new paragraph.

Discretionary Hyphen

<->

A discretionary hyphen presents an additional
hyphenation opportunity to Xerox Ventura
Publisher's hyphenation algorithm. If a word does
not get placed at the end of a line, no hyphen is
shown.
Placing a discretionary hyphen at the beginning of
the word disables hyphenation for the one occurrence
of that word.

Non-Breaking Space



This places a space at this point, but no break (line
break, page break, etc) may occur at this point. This
is used to keep words together on the same line.

REFERENCE GUIDE

D-9

APPENDIX D-TEXT FROM OTHER PROGRAMS

Thin Space
Figure Space
En space
Em space
Footnote
<$Ftext>
where text is the footnote text.
Picture anchor (same page) <$&anchor name>
anchor name is the frame reference name, as
specified in the Anchors & Captions option.
Picture anchor (below)
<$&anchor name[v]>
anchor name is the frame reference name, as
specified in the Anchors & Captions option.
Picture anchor (above)
<$&anchor name[I\]>
anchor name is the frame reference name, as
specified in the Anchors & Captions option.
Hidden text
<$!text>
where text is the text to be hidden. This text will
not show in the Xerox Ventura Publisher chapter
Index
<$IPrimary[Primary sort];Secondary[Secondary sort]>

Primary is replaced by the primary index entry;
Secondary is replaced by the secondary index entry;
and Primary sort and Secondary sort are
replaced with the two sort keys. For See references,
$1 is replaced with $S. For See Also references, $1 is
replaced with $A.
If no sort keys are specified, the correct code is:
<$IPrimary;Secondary>
If only a primary reference is used, the correct code

is:
<$IPrimary>

D-10

REFERENCE GUIDE

APPENDIX 0-TEXT FROM OTHER PROGRAMS

Index references can easily be entered directly into
your favorite wordprocessor. Simply locate the point
you wish to index and type the index references. For
instance, this paragraph was indexed within
Wordperfect by typing:

<$IWordprocessor;Developing index in>
at the beginning of the paragraph.

Deleting null paragraphs
Each time you press the Enter key when using the
wordprocessor, you create a new paragraph. If you
type Enter twice in a row in order to place a blank line
between paragraphs, Xerox Ventura Publisher
creates a null paragraph, complete with all the space
normally placed between paragraphs. If this is not
desireable, you can delete all extra carriage returns
by using your wordprocessor to place the following
tag at the beginning of the text file:
@PARAFILTR ON =
This must be added from within your wordprocessor,
not from within Xerox Ventura Publisher. The extra
paragraphs will be eliminated the next time you load
this text file or open a chapter containing the text file.

ASCII text
This section describes how to produce ASCII text files
from several popular application programs, and how
to insert text attributes (boldface, underline, etc.)
within this text.
Most wordprocessors, spreadsheets, and database
programs save information in their own file format,
usually identified by a unique file extension. For instance, Lotus 1-2-3 saves worksheets in WKS files,
and dBase III saves databases in DBF files. Text can
REFERENCE GUIDE

0-11

APPENDIX D-TEXT FROM OTHER PROGRAMS

be moved to and from many of the popular programs
as standard ASCII text files. You can load ASCII files
using either the ASCII option or Wordstar option.
Loading as an ASCII file requires two carriage
return-line feed combinations to create a new
paragraph. Loading as a Wordstar file treats single
carriage returns as a new paragraph.

Characters not used in ASCII text
ASCII characters below decimal 32 and above
decimal 127 do not print. The characters used and
their decimal equivalents are shown in Appendix E.
When you are transferring ASCII text from other
sources, the ASCII codes above decimal 127 will be
converted into the characters shown in Appendix E,
if they are enclosed in < > brackets.

Text from mainframe computers
Some ASCII files, especially those transferred via a
communication program to your PC from mainframe
computers, do not have two pairs of carriage return
(decimal 13) and line feed (decimal 10) characters at
the end of each paragraph ([CR][LF][CR][LF].) Additional carriage returns without a matching line feed
(or vice versa) will cause unpredictable results.

Publishing Lotus 1·2·3 spreadsheets
Lotus 1-2-3 spreadsheets can be saved as ASCII files
using the PRINT FILE option (IFF.) The file name
chosen automatically has the extension PRN added.
However, Lotus 1-2-3 places spaces, not tabs, between each column and cannot be configured to automatically insert TAB characters between columns.
Therefore, when using proportionally spaced fonts on
Xerox Ventura Publisher, the columns will not align,
unless you manually place tabs between each
column, as described on the next page.

D-12

REFERENCE GUIDE

APPENDIX D-TEXT FROM OTHER PROGRAMS

To create a table using a Lotus 1-2-3 print file, first
set the tab stops for Body Text to the desired positions. Then, use the Load/Text Pictures option to load
the 1-2-3 PRN file as a WORDSTAR file. (Because
each row is separated by a single carriage return, and
because Xerox Ventura Publisher ignores single carriage returns in ASCII text, loading as an ASCII file
would cause each line to run directly into the next
line. Xerox Ventura Publisher treats single carriage
returns as paragraph breaks in Wordstar files.)
Finally, use the Text Editing function to delete all
spaces and then insert tabs between each column in
each row.
Another solution which doesn't require inserting tabs
is to select a font (if available with your printer)
which is not proportionally spaced. For example,
spreadsheet files can be tagged with Courier font
(which is not proportionally spaced), and the columns
will then align properly. Set the Normal Space Width
in the Typographic Controls option to 1.0 in order to
get the columns to align perfectly.

Publishing dBase III data
Dbase III generates ASCII text using the dBase III
TO FILE option with commands such as REPORT
and LABEL. The extension TXT is automatically
added to the file name you choose. Appendix H contains an application note on how to publish a phone
directory from dBase III.

Sidekick note files
Sidekick Note Files can be read directly as ASCII
text. Note, however, that if Sidekick is loaded in
memory while running Xerox Ventura Publisher,
performance is degraded. Also, any attempt to activate Sidekick will interfere with Xerox Ventura
Publisher's graphics and cause unpredictable
results, possibly leading to loss of information.
REFERENCE GUIDE

D-13

APPENO.IX D-TEXT FROM OTHER PROGRAMS

DCA (Displaywrite III and IV)
Xerox Ventura Publisher can read and write standard DCA version 2.0 files. Displaywrite III and Displaywrite IV can save and retrieve DCA files.
Xerox Ventura Publisher automatically converts
standard DCA text attributes to Xerox Ventura
Publisher text attributes.
All other attributes, attribute combinations, footnotes, index references, and text characters must be
entered into DCA using the < > commands outlined
at the beginning of this chapter.

Microsoft WordlWindows Write
Xerox Ventura Publisher can read and write standard Microsoft Word version 3.1 files. Other versions
of Word may also work. Microsoft Word style sheets
are not usable by Xerox Ventura Publisher.
Xerox Ventura Publisher automatically converts
standard Word text attributes to Xerox Ventura
Publisher text attributes.
MSWord
Attribute
Begin/End Bold
Altb
BeginlEnd Superscript
Alt +
Begin/End Subscript
Alt Begin/End. Strikethrough
Alts
Underline
Altu
CtrlDiscretionary Hyphen
Non Break Space
Ctrl Spacebar
All other attributes, attribute combinations, footnotes, index references, and text characters must be
entered into Microsoft Word using the < > commands
outlined at the beginning of this chapter.

0-14

REFERENCE GUIDE

APPENDIX D-TEXT FROM OTHER PROGRAMS

Multimate
Xerox Ventura Publisher can read and write standard Multimate version 3.31 files. Other versions of
Multimate may also work.
Xerox Ventura Publisher automatically converts
standard Multimate text attributes to Xerox Ventura
Publisher text attributes.
Multimate
Attribute
Begin/End Bold
AltZ
AltQ
BeginlEnd Superscript
BeginlEnd Subscript
AltW
Begin/End Strikethrough
AltQ
Shift
Underline
Discretionary Hyphen
Shift F7
Non Break Space
Alt S
All other attributes, attribute combinations, footnotes, index references, and text characters must be
entered into Multimate using the < > commands outlined at the beginning of this chapter.

Wordperfect
Xerox Ventura Publisher can read and write standard Wordperfect version 4.1 or 4.2 files. Other versions of Wordperfect may also work.
Xerox Ventura Publisher automatically converts
standard Wordperfect text attributes to Publisher
text attributes.
Wordperfect
Attribute
Begin/End Bold
F6
Shift F1, 1
BeginlEnd Superscript
Begin/End Subscript
Shift F1, 2
Begin/End Strikethrough
AltF5,4
Underline
F8
Discretionary Hyphen
Ctrl, Non Break Space
Home, Space bar
REFERENCE GUIDE

D·15

APPENDIX D-TEXT FROM OTHER PROGRAMS

All other attributes, attribute combinations, footnotes, index references, and text characters must be
entered into Wordperfect using the < > commands
outlined at the beginning of this chapter.

Wordstar
Xerox Ventura Publisher can read and write standard Wordstar 3.3, 3.4 and 4.0 files. Other versions of
Wordstar may also work.
Xerox Ventura Publisher automatically converts
standard Wordstar attributes to Xerox Ventura
Publisher text attributes.
Attribute
Wordstar
AB
Start/Stop Bold
AT
Start/Stop Superscript
AV
Start/Stop Subscript
AX
Start/Stop Strikethrough
AS
Start/Stop Underline
Discretionary Hyphen
Soft hyphen
AO
Non Break Space
All other attributes, attribute combinations, footnotes, index references, and text characters must be
entered into Wordstar using the < > commands outlined at the beginning of this chapter.
Foreign characters entered in Wordstar 3.4 which
are not available in both the Xerox Ventura Publisher
and the IBM character set will not display or print.

Wordstar tabs
When you press the tab key, Wordstar does not always place a tab character into the text, but instead
inserts multiple spaces. As described earlier in this
chapter, Xerox Ventura Publisher requires the actual
tab character in order to correctly format tabular information. To assure that Wordstar inserts real tab

0-16

REFERENCE GUIDE

APPENDIX D-TEXT FROM OTHER PROGRAMS

characters, turn the Vari-Tab feature within
Wordstar Off.

Xerox Writer
Xerox Ventura Publisher can read and write standard Xerox Writer version 2.0 files.
Xerox Ventura Publisher automatically converts
standard Writer text attributes to Xerox Ventura
Publisher text attributes.
All other attributes, attribute combinations, footnotes, index references, and text characters must be
entered into Xerox Writer using the < > commands
outlined at the beginning of this chapter.

Xywrite
Xerox Ventura Publisher can read and write standard Xywrite II and Xywrite III files.
Xerox Ventura Publisher automatically converts
standard Xywrite text attributes to Xerox Ventura
Publisher text attributes.
All other attributes, attribute combinations, footnotes, index references, and text characters must be
entered into Xywrite using the < > commands outlined at the beginning of this chapter.

REFERENCE GUIDE

0-17

APPENDIX D-TEXT FROM OTHER PROGRAMS

This page intentionally left blank.

0-18

REFERENCE GUIDE

APPENDIXE
CHARACTER SETS AND CODES
Xerox Ventura Publisher includes two character sets:
• An international character set which includes
characters for many languages, including
English, Spanish, French, and Italian

• A symbol character set which includes
mathematics and greek characters which can
be used for simple formulas and equations.
Not all ofthese characters can be typed directly from
the keyboard. Characters not available on your keyboard can be entered by holding down the ALT key
and then typing the Decimal equivalent for that
character on the numeric keypad. The tables on the
following pages show these decimal equivalents.
When using your word processor to enter foreign
characters and other characters above decimal 127,
you must enter these characters by using the < >
codes, as explained in Appendix D. For wordprocessors which support foreign characters, Xerox Ventura Publisher will accept these characters without
placing numbers inside of < >. However, the decimal
equivalent of these characters must be less than 169.
Also, the foreign characters in your wordprocessor
must have the same decimal equivalents as those
shown on the following pages.
For users of the Apple Laserwriter Plus and other advanced PostScript printers, dingbat characters are
shown in the following table. Dingbats do not display
on the screen unless you purchase matching screen
fonts from Adobe Systems. (The international character set displays instead.) They will print, however,
if you own an advanced PostScript printer. (Dingbats
are not provided with Xerox Ventura Publisher.)
REFERENCE GUIDE

E-1

APPENDIX E

pn.

Inter- Sym- Dingmal nat'l
hoI
hat
not used
1-31
32 space space space
:;,.33
!
"
:?<
'\I
34
~
#
35
#
::J
~
36
$
1l"
%
37
%
(f)
38
&
&
,
39
.3
®
(
40
(
[!;J
)
)
41
c. .
42
*
*
~
43
+
+
44
,
,
~
b
45
~
46
©>
47
/
/
~
48
0
0
~
1
49
1
50
2
2
*
51
3
3
.!
4
4
52
V
X
53
5
5
54
6
6
55
7
7
X
)(
8
56
8
57
9
9
+
.
58
+
59
,
,
+
60
-:<
<
t
61
=
=
11
62
>
>

,

'*

•

E-2

fui. Inter- Sym- Ding-

mal nat'l
63
?
@
64
A
65
B
66
67
C
D
68
E
69
F
70
71
G
72
H
I
73
74
J
K
75
76
L
77
M
78
N
79
0
P
80
81
Q
82
R
83
S
84
T
85
U
86
V
87
W
88
X
Y
89
Z
90
[
91
\
92
]
93
A
94

hoI

hat

?

t

-

ffi

A
B
X

¢

~

E


r
H
I
~

K
A
M

N
0
II
8

+
+
+
+

•

j


0
0

**
3$

*~~

*
*
•*
",

~*

0

•
0

0
0

.
0

T

•.:.

,
I
I
I

•

I

I

~

}

}

"

-

REFERENCE GUIDE

-

~

Deci- Inter- Sym- Dingmal nat'l
hoI
bat

127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158

C
ii

e

a
a

a
0

Y

,

~

/
00

~

••
••

•

•

a

f

C

oJ,

~

•
•

+

e
e

e

•

~

•.,
~

1:

H

]'

~

CD

1

i

@

A

--*

@

A

-!-

@

E

0

@

®
®
®
®

re

±

JE

"

0
0

~

<>

x
oc

~

U

a

0

U

•

@

Y
6
tJ

+

8)

*-

0

-

()

;:::;


=>

®
®
@

<

ct.

f}

>

"
"

0

i

c
c

«

E

8
0
0

»

E

(3

Ii
6

L

0
~

®
©

0
0
CD

00

TM

-+

(E

IT

-+

A

V

~

+--+

-,

......

1\

-+

v

..

A
6
§
:j:

t
'II
©
®

@

t

¢::>

<=

11
:::::>

.If

~

--t

.....

~ Inter- Sym- Dingmal nat'l hoI
hat
TM
JJ,
,,'*
191
0
192
"
193
...
(
~
194 %0
®
195
>
©
•
TM
196
~
197 L
(
198
199
A
I
200
A
l
c::)
201
E
I
202
E
I
<>
~
203
E
L
~
I
204
r
0
205
f
i
L)
I
206
l
0
I
207
I
208
0
0
)
209
6
:)
210
0
J
»l»
(
S
211
212
S
I
:»+
213
U
J
~
214
U
1
215
U
~
I
»+
)
216
Y
217
B
l
218
Z
219
220
221
222

III.

0

..,..

••

.,.

.

REFERENCE GUIDE

APPENDIX E

Text codes
The following table is provided for quick reference. A
complete description of the text codes is provided in
Appendix D.

Description
Text attributes
Base Line Jump
Begin Kerning
Bold weight type
Color index . .
Double underline
Italics . . . .
Light weight type
Line Break
Medium weight type
Non-Breaking Space
Overscore
Point Size
Resume Normal
Small
Strikethrough
Subscript
Superscript
Underline
Spaces
Em space
En space
Figure Space
Thin Space
Typeface
Inserted text
Discretionary Hyphen
Footnote . . . . .
Hidden text . . . .
Picture anchor (below)
Picture anchor (same page)
Picture anchor (above)

REFERENCE GUIDE

Code
. 

. . 

<=>
<1>




<0>







<->
<->
<+>

. 
<->
<$Ftext>
. <$Htext>
<$&anchor name[v]>
. <$&anchor name>
<$&anchor name[ A]>

E-5

APPENDIXE

This page intentionally left blank.

E-6

REFERENCE GUIDE

APPENDIXF
PRINTER INFORMATION
This appendix provides information about how the
features of your particular printer work with Xerox
Ventura Publisher. Detailed set up and configuration
information is also provided. Information on how to
add additional fonts to your printer is provided in Appendix K.
Speed, resolution, maximum picture size, character
set, and dead space at the edge of the page are different for each printer. To see the limitations of your
printer, open the chapter called CAPABILI and
print.

IEF

Check the section within this chapter that pertains
to your printer for information on limitations of your
printer.

IEF

On printers which do not use a page description language (e.g., PostScript), the fonts which appear in
line art can only be the discrete sizes. Therefore,
when the picture is scaled, the fonts may be slightly
too large or slightly too small for the picture. Solution: Make the picture slightly larger or smaller.

Printer troubleshooting
The following general troubleshooting guidelines
apply to all printers.

If you can't get anything to print, first try pressing the self test button on the printer, if your printer
has one, to see if the basic printer mechanism is
working. This causes the printer to print one page,
filled with individual characters. If nothing happens
in this self-print mode, consult your printer manufacturer or dealer for further help.

REFERENCE GUIDE

F-1

APPENDIX F-PRINTER INFORMATION

Ifthe printer has just been installed, and doesn't
print correctly using other software, the problem
may very well be the printer cable. Disconnect the
cable from the printer and count the number of pins.
If the connector has 36 pins, it is a parallel cable,
and the cable is probably not the cause of your
problems. If the connector has 25 pins, it is a serial
cable, and you may not have the correct cable. Many
people try to connect the laser printers to their computer with a standard serial cable that has the right
set of connectors, but is not wired as required by a
laser printer. Both the HP LaserJet and Apple LaserWriter use similar cables. The correct wiring
diagrams for these cables are shown in the section for
each printer, along with manufacturer's part numbers. Also, check the printer configuration switch settings.
If the printer prints correctly from other
programs, but does not print from Xerox Ventura
Publisher, you have probably specified the wrong
printer or wrong printer port during installation.
Select the Printer Info option in the Options menu,
and try a different printer or printer port. The
printer selection is shown at the top of the Dialog
Box. The printer port is shown on the Output To:
line. If, in the test above, you found a 25 pin cable,
you can select between printer ports COM1: and
COM2:. If, in the test above, you found a 36 pin cable,
you can select between LPT1:, LPT2:, and LPT3:.
Try printing one page with each ofthese options until
the page prints correctly. The configuration switch
settings within the printer should also be examined.
Different programs work with different switch settings from those required for Xerox Ventura
Publisher. Check the section within this chapter that
pertains to your printer for information on the correct switch settings. Also, check the CONFIG.SYS
file. Certain device drivers such as GEMPRINT.8YS
will keep Xerox Ventura Publisher from printing correctly. These must be removed.

F-2

REFERENCE GUIDE

Xerox 4045 laser printer

APPENDIX F-PRINTER INFORMATION

Xerox 4045 laser printer
Xerox 4045-Paper Size
The 4045, when driven by Xerox Ventura Publisher,
handles 8.5 X 11 inch, 8.5 X 14 inch, and A4 (21.0 X
29.7 centimeters) paper. You can always print a
smaller page on a larger paper size by increasing the
page margins in the Margins & Columns option.
The 4045 cannot print to the edge of the page. This
means that text and pictures placed near the edge of
the page will show correctly on the computer screen,
but may not print as displayed. Remember, therefore, to set a large enough margin using the Margins
& Columns option in the Frame menu. To see the
amount of blank space around the edge of the page,
print the CAPABILI.CHP chapter in the TYPESET
directory

Xerox 4045 configuration switches
The 4045 configuration switches are found on the
101S04200 Cartridge. The settings for various configurations are shown in Figures F-1 through F-4.
The switch settings to use depend upon:
• Whether your printer is connected with a
parallel or serial cable
• Amount of memory installed (450K or 1.5
megabytes)
• 4045 ROM revision
The Bytes Available (memory installed) and ROM
revision # is printed on the 4045 Configuration
Sheet shortly after the machine is first turned on.
At least 450K bytes of DRAM and ROM revision 2.x
or above must be installed in the 4045 in order to
print Xerox Ventura Publisher documents. Installing
even more DRAM allows larger pictures to be
REFERENCE GUIDE

F-3

APPENDIX F-PRINTER INFORMATION

••

••••••

Xerox 4045 laser printer

••

••

••••

87654321

87654321

B

o

A
C

•• •••••

••••••••

87654321

87654321

•

OFF

t

ON

Figure F-1 Xerox 4045 switch settings for version 2.0, 450K RAM,
parallel interface. Turn DB OFF for version 2.1 ROM.

••

••••••

••

••

• •••

87654321

87654321

B

o

A
C

• •••••

•••••••

• •

87654321

•

OFF

t

ON

87654321

Figure F-2 Xerox 4045 switch settings for version 3.1.1, 1.5M RAM,
parallel interface

F-4

REFERENCE GUIDE

Xerox 4045 laser printer

••

••••••

APPENDIX F-PRINTER INFORMATION

••

••

• ••

•

87654321

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

B

A
C

D

•••• •
• ••
87654321

•••

••

OFF

t

ON

••

•

876 5 4 3 2 1

Figure F-3 Xerox 4045 switch settings for version 2.0, 450K RAM,
serial interface

••

••••••

••

••

• ••

•

876 5 4 3 2 1

876 5 4 3 2 1

B
D

A

• •• •
• • ••
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

OFF

t

C

•

••

••

ON

••

•

876 5 4 3 2 1

Figure F-4 Xerox 4045 switch settings for version 3.1.1, 1.5M RAM,
serial interface

REFERENCE GUIDE

F·5

APPENDIX F-PRINTER INFORMATION

Xerox 4045 laser printer

printed. At least 1.0 megabytes of DRAM and
revision 3.x must be installed to use the 300 dpi
driver.
The Xerox 4045 Laser Printer can be set up as either
a parallel or serial printer. To use it as a serial
printer, consult your 4045 manual, and set the 4045
cartridge switches as shown in either Figure F-3 or
F -4, depending on which ROM version and memory
is installed.
Xerox 4045-Resolution
Xerox Ventura Publisher lets you print both text and
pictures on your 4045. Text prints with a resolution
of300 dots per inch, and pictures print with a resolution of 150 or 300 dots per inch, depending on which
driver is installed.
Xerox 4045 fonts
The 4045 prints most of the Xerox Ventura Publisher
character set shown in Appendix E. Print the
CHARSET.CHP chapter (in the TYPESET directory) to see what characters the 4045 can print.
The following is a complete list of sizes and weights
available for each 4045 typeface:
Typeface Sizes
Courier (not proportionally spaced)
• 12 point medium (10 characters to the inch)
Swiss (Helvetica) san-serif
• 6, 8 point medium
• 10,12 point medium, bold, medium italic
• 14,18,24 point bold

F-6

REFERENCE GUIDE

Xerox 4045 laser printer

APPENDIX F-PRINTER INFORMATION

Dutch (Times Roman) serif
• 8 point medium
• 10,12 point medium, bold, medium italic
• 14,18,24 point bold
Symbol (greek, mathematics)
• 10 point medium
These fonts are loaded by Xerox Ventura Publisher
into the 4045 as needed for each page. The space
taken by these fonts decreases the space available for
pictures. If a page contains many big pictures, and a
large number of different fonts, especially larger size
fonts, the 4045 runs out of memory and prints an
error page. The remaining pages should print correctly, unless a similar problem exists on those pages.
To correct the problem, do one of the following:
~

~
~

Select the 150 dpi driver instead of the 300 dpi
driver. (If the 150 dpi driver is not already installed, use VPPREP, as described in the Setup
and Installation section.)
If this doesn't work, reduce the size or number of
fonts used on the problem page.
If this doesn't work, reduce the number or size of
pictures on the problem page.

Additional type sizes and type faces can be added.
See Appendix K

Limitations
Pictures which contain text which is rotated at an
angle to the text on the page will not print correctly.
The 4045 cannot print white text on a black background.
A maximum of four images is allowed per page.
REFERENCE GUIDE

F-7

APPENDIX F-PRINTER INFORMATION

Xerox 4020 color ink jet printer

Xerox 4020 color ink jet printer
Xerox Ventura Publisher can print color documents
directly on the Xerox 4020 Color Ink Jet Printer. Up
to eight colors can be printed.
Xerox 4020 color ink jet printer-Paper size

I

Xerox Ventura Publisher can print to a Xerox 4020
Color Ink Jet Printer on 8.5 inch wide paper.

Xerox 4020 Color Ink Jet Printer-Switch settings

I

The 4020 switch settings required for proper operation are shown in Figure F -5.

Xerox 4020 color ink jet printer-Resolution
Xerox Ventura Publisher lets you print both text and
pictures on your Xerox 4020 Color Ink Jet Printer .
Both text and pictures print at a resolution of 120
dots per inch.

••• ••

•

•

7 6 5 4 3 2 1

B

• •••

OFF

t

ON

4 3 2 1

A
Figure F-5 Xerox 4020 switch settings. Settings are
for parallel interface.

F-8

REFERENCE GUIDE

I

HP LaserJet, LaserJet Plus, LaserJet II

APPENDIX F-PRINTER INFORMATION

Xerox 4020 color ink jet printer fonts
Not all characters shown in Appendix E are available
on the Xerox 4020 Color Ink Jet Printer. Print the
chapter called CHARSET (contained in the
TYPESET directory) to see which characters are
available. The typefaces available are Helvetica and
Times Roman, in the following sizes:
• 8 point normal; 10, 14 point normal, bold,
italic; 18, 20, 28, 36 point bold

Limitations
You cannot create new colors by overlapping two
transparent graphics. The colors will not mix.
Greek and math symbol characters are not available.

HP LaserJet, LaserJet Plus, LaserJet II
The first part of this section refers to the LaserJet
and LaserJet Plus. The last parts refer to the standard LaserJet only, or the LaserJet Plus only. The
LaserJet II functions identically to the LaserJet
Plus.

HP LaserJetlLaserJet Plus-Cabling
The HP LaserJet is sold by Hewlett-Packard with a
serial (25 pin) interface. The HP LaserJet Plus is
sold with a serial or parallel (36 pin) interface. The
cable required for the parallel interface is HP part
number 24542D. The HP part number for the RS232C serial cable is part number 92219J (5.0 meters)
or 17255D (1.0 meter.) Connection of this serial cable
to the IBM AT (9 pin) requires the IBM Serial Device
Adapter Cable (IBM part number 6450217 or
6450242.) For the IBM AT (9 pin) you can alternatively purchase a single cable from Hewlett-Packard,
part number 24542G.
REFERENCE GUIDE

F-9

APPENDIX F-PRINTER INFORMATION

HP LaserJet, LaserJet Plus, LaserJet II

25 pin to 25 pin
Adaptor Cable

Computer

FemO.

•

M.. Co"",,, M

Co,_,

."~~I_=~

Female Connector
Chassis Gnd
TO

RD
CTS
DSR
Signal Gnd

Male Connector

1-

1 Chassis Gnd

2 ------------3-----

3 RD

~

Printer

2TO

-.::J ------------ 20 DTR

7 -------------------- 7 Signal Gnd

Figure F-6

HP Laserjet 25 pin to 25 pin cable

Computer

Printer
Female

Male

9 pin to 25 pin
Adaptor Cable

Chassis Gnd
TO

RD
CTS
DSR
Signal Gnd

3----- -- 2

Figure F-7

Male

25 pin to 25 pin
Printer Cable

Female' Mal
NC--------- 1
2----- --8----- --6
5 - -------

Female

3
5
6
7

Female
1---2 ---3
3 ---2
--- 20

Male
Chassis Gnd
RD
TO

~.::J

DTR

7 --------- 7

Signal Gnd

HP Laserjet 9 pin to 25 pin cable

If you want to build your own cables, Figures F-6 and
F -7 show the correct wiring diagram for both PC (25
pin connectors) and AT (9 pin) machines.

F-10

REFERENCE GUIDE

HP LaserJet, LaserJet Plus, LaserJet II

APPENDIX F-PRINTER INFORMATION

HP LaserJetlLaserJet Plus-Paper size
Xerox Ventura Publisher and the HP LaserJet
handles 8.5 X 11 inch, 8.5 X 14 inch, and A4 (21.0 X
29.7 centimeters) paper. However, the LaserJet cannot print to the edge of the page. This means that text
and pictures placed near the edge of the page will
show correctly on the computer screen, but may not
print as displayed. Remember, therefore, to set a
reasonable margin using the Margins & Columns
option in the Frame menu.
To see the amount of blank space around the edge of
the page, print the CAPABILI.CHP chapter in the
TYPESET directory
HP LaserJetlLaserJet Plus-Configuration switches
Xerox Ventura Publisher requires that the internal
configuration switch be set to the original factory settings. For the serial interface, the switch SW1 settings are 1-0FF, 2-0N, 3-0FF, 4-0N, 5-0FF, 6-0FF,
7-0FF, 8-0N. For the parallel interface, the settings
are 1-0N, 2-0N, 3-0FF, 4-0N, 5-0FF, 6-0FF, 7-0FF,
8-0N.
HP LaserJetlLaserJet Plus-Resolution
With both LaserJet models, text prints with a resolution of300 dots per inch. With the standard LaserJet,
pictures and graphics print with a resolution of 75
dots per inch. With the LaserJet Plus, pictures print
with a resolution of either 150 or 300 dots per inch,
depending on which Xerox Ventura Publisher option
you installed. Text within line art pictures print at
either 300 dots per inch, depending on the text size.
Standard HP LaserJet
The standard HP LaserJet only prints Xerox Ventura
Publisher documents with the HP 92286F font
cartridge installed. It does not accept the downloaded
REFERENCE GUIDE

F-11

APPENDIX F-PRINTER INFORMATION

HP LaserJet, LaserJet Plus, LaserJet II

fonts that are included with Xerox Ventura Publisher
for the LaserJet Plus. The characters available with
this cartridge are a subset ofthe standard Xerox Ventura Publisher font set shown in Appendix E. The actual characters available can be shown by printing
the CHARSET chapter located in the TYPESET
directory. The math symbol set is not included in this
cartridge.
HP LaserJet Plus
The HP LaserJet Plus uses the downloadable fonts
supplied with Xerox Ventura Publisher. Xerox Ventura Publisher ignores the HP font cartridges when
printing to the LaserJet Plus. The character set for
the HP LaserJet Plus is the same as shown in Appendix E, and is available in the following typefaces
weights and sizes:
Typeface Sizes
Courier (fixed pitch)
• 12 point (10 characters to the inch) medium
Swiss (Helvetica) san-serif
• 6, 8 point medium
• 10,12 point medium, bold, medium italic
• 14, 18, 24 point bold
Dutch (Times Roman) serif
• 8 point medium
• 10,12 point medium, bold, medium italic
• 14,18,24 point bold
Symbol (greek, mathematics)
• 10 point medium

F-12

REFERENCE GUIDE

HP LaserJet, LaserJet Plus, LaserJet II

APPENDIX F-PRINTER INFORMATION

Fonts are loaded by Xerox Ventura Publisher into the
HP LaserJet Plus as needed for each page. The space
taken by these fonts decreases the space available for
pictures. If a page contains many big pictures, and a
large number of different fonts-especially larger
size fonts-the LaserJet runs out of memory and displays error 20 in the status display. To continue
printing, press the CONTINUE button on the front
of the LaserJet, and place the printer back on-line, if
necessary. The LaserJet attempts to print at least a
portion of the page. Unless a similar problem exists
on the following pages, the remaining pages should
print correctly.
Once an error 20 has occurred, you must simplify the
page that caused the problem in order to print the
problem page. To simplify the page, do one or more of
the following:
~

Reduce the size or number of fonts used on the
problem page
~ Reduce the number or size of pictures on the
problem page
~ Make sure that no other program, run prior to
Xerox Ventura Publisher, downloaded fonts and
made them "permanent". If this is the case, these
fonts, which are not used by Xerox Ventura
Publisher, reduce the LaserJet memory space
available to print each page. To remove permanent
fonts, tum off the LaserJet and then tum it back
on again.
If you installed for 300 dots per inch, and you frequently encounter the error 20 message, you may
want to install both the 150 and 300 dot per inch
drivers (to install both drivers, run VPPREP-see
Setup and Installation.) You can then choose the
150 dot per inch HP LaserJet Plus option in the Set
Printer Info option and print the problem pages. This
doubles the size of the graphic that can be placed on
any given page before an error 20 message will occur.
When the page has printed, you can go back to the

REFERENCE GUIDE

F-13

APPENDIX F-PRINTER INFORMATION

HP LaserJet, LaserJet Plus, LaserJet II

Set Printer Info menu and choose the 300 dot per
inch HP LaserJet driver.

Permanent fonts
You can choose to download fonts to the HP LaserJet
Plus prior to running Xerox Ventura Publisher. This
reduces printing time by eliminating the need to
transfer font files to the printer during the print
operation. However, it does increase the chance of
getting an out of memory error message.
To make fonts reside permanently in the HP LaserJet Plus:
~

Download the fonts to the printer prior to running
Xerox Ventura Publisher (use the utilities supplied by HP) and make them permanent (i.e., fonts
cannot be removed except by turning the printer
off)

~

~

~

Record the HP font ID number for each font
downloaded
Create an ASCII file which associates each font ID
number with each font. Save this file under the
name HPLJPLUS.CNF and store it in the VENTURA directory.
Select the AddlRemove Fonts option. Change each
font (i.e., each combination of face, size, and style)
which has been pre-downloaded from Download
to Resident.
The format for each entry in the CNF file is:

permfont(n FONT)
where n is replaced with the HP font ID number
created with the HP utilities and font is replaced
with the font file name. For example:

permfont(l CENTURY.SFP)
permfont(2 CENTURY.SFL)
The word permfont must be in lower case.

F-14

REFERENCE GUIDE

JLaser

APPENDIX F-PRINTER INFORMATION
~

If you save the changes made in the AddlRemove
Font option, the fonts must always be resident in
your printer prior to running Xerox Ventura
Publisher.

Additional type sizes and type faces can be added.
See Appendix K.
Limitations
Pictures which contain text which is rotated at an
angle to the text on the page will not print correctly.
The HP LaserJet Plus cannot print white text on a
black background.
The HP LaserJet Plus can print a maximum of four
images per page.
The HP LaserJet Plus cannot print Courier fonts in
landscape orientation.

JLaser
The Tall Tree System's JLaser board plugs into your
computer and lets you print Xerox Ventura Publisher
documents on laser printers not specifically supported by Xerox Ventura Publisher. For the current
list of laser printers and compatible computers, contact Tall Tree Systems at 1120 San Antonio Road,
Palo Alto, California, 94303.
JLaser-Paper size
The JLaser can print on paper up to 8.5 X 14 inches.
However, the JLaser cannot print to the edge of the
page. The actual characters available can be shown
by printing the CHARSET chapter located in the
TYPESET directory.

REFERENCE GUIDE

F-15

JLaser

APPENDIX F-PRINTER INFORMATION

JLaser-Resolution

I

Text and pictures print with a resolution of 300 dots
per inch.

JLaser fonts
The character set for the JLaser is the same as shown
in Appendix E, available in the following typefaces,
weights and sizes:

Typeface Sizes
Swiss (san-serif)
• 6, 8 point medium
• 10,12 point medium, bold, medium italic
• 14,18,24 point bold
Dutch (serif)
• 8 point medium
• 10,12 point medium, bold, medium italic
• 14,18,24 point bold
Symbol (greek, mathematics)
• 10 point medium
These fonts are loaded by Xerox Ventura Publisher
as needed for each page. Additional type sizes and
type faces can be added. See Appendix K.
The JLaser card creates each page in an un-compressed, bitmap format. This means that each page
is represented by a one megabyte file which is transferred directly from the JLaser card to the printer at
extremely fast, video speeds. While this results in
very fast printing, the fact that each page takes up
one megabyte makes storage of each page on disk impractical. Therefore, no Print To File option is available for the JLaser card.
F-16

REFERENCE GUIDE

APPENDIX F-PRINTER INFORMATION

Dot matrix printers

No error message is given when the JLaser printer
runs out of paper. It simply stops printing until you
put more paper in the tray.
JLaser limitations
The JLaser card requires that certain jumpers on the
card be installed correctly, and the DEVICE=\S
statement be placed in the CONFIG.8YS. If only portions of the page print, or if the page contains
horizontal white lines, these configuration settings
may be conflicting with your computer's display or
disk drive. Contact Tall Tree Systems in Palo Alto,
California for information on how to reconfigure the
JLaser card to avoid these problems.

Dot matrix printers
Xerox Ventura Publisher supports the Epson MX-80,
FX-80, and RX-80 dot matrix printers, and the IBM
Proprinter. The Epson LQ 1500 and Hewlett-Packard Thinkjet print legible text and pictures, but in
the wrong aspect ratio. 24 pin printers are not supported.
Dot matrix printer-Paper size
Xerox Ventura Publisher can print to a dot matrix
printer on 8.5 X 11 inch paper. Dot matrix printers
having a larger width paper capacity can also be
used, but only 8.5 X 11 inch (Letter) printing is supported.
Dot matrix printer-Resolution
Xerox Ventura Publisher lets you print both text and
pictures on your dot matrix printer at a resolution of
120 X 144 dots per inch.

REFERENCE GUIDE

F-17

APPENDIX F-PRINTER INFORMATION

PostScript, Interpress

Dot matrix printer fonts
The character set for dot matrix printers is the same
as shown in Appendix E, and is available in Helvetica
and Times Roman fonts, in the following sizes:
• 8 point normal; 10, 14 point normal, bold,
italic; 18, 20, 28, 36 point bold
Greek and math symbol characters are not available.
The font height is different when text is printed in
landscape rather than portrait. A maximum of four
images per page is allowed.

PostScript, Interpress
Xerox Ventura Publisher can print on various PostScript and Interpress printers and typesetters. PostScript printers include the Apple LaserWriter and
LaserWriter Plus; TI Omnilaser, DEC PrintServer
40, IBM 4216 printer; Dataproducts LZR 2660 and
LZR 2665 laser printers; QMS PS 800, 1200, and
2400 laser printers; and the Linotype Linotronic 100,
300 typesetters. Interpress printers include the
Xerox 2700 and 9700 printers.

Resolution
Text and graphics print at different resolutions, depending on the capability of the specific device. For
instance, you will get 300 dots per inch resolution
with the laser printers listed above, 1270 dots per
inch for the Linotronic 100, and 2540 dots per inch
for the Linotronic 300.

Fonts
The actual characters available can be shown by
printing the CHARSET chapter located in the
. TYPESET directory.
F-18

REFERENCE GUIDE

PostScript,lnterpress
~

APPENDIX F-PRINTER INFORMATION

You can't print all fonts shown in the PostScript font
menus unless you purchase new fonts from Adobe
Systems.
For your reference, the following fonts come standard
with the Apple Laserwriter: Helvetica, Times
Roman, Symbol, Courier. Adding new fonts is covered
in Appendix K.

Cabling
Any PostScript printer or typesetter can be connected directly to an IBM PC (or equivalent) using
the same RS-232C cable used for the HP LaserJet.
This cable can be purchased from Hewlett-Packard.
The HP part number for the RS-232C serial cable is
part number 92219J or 17255D. Connection of this
serial cable to the IBM AT (9 pin) requires the IBM
Serial Device Adapter Cable (IBM part number
6450217 or 6450242.) Some devices (such as the
Linotronic typesetters) may require a different sex
connector at the printer end than provided with the
HP cable. In this case you must build your own cable.
If you want to build your own cables, Figures F-8 and
F -9 show the correct wiring diagram for both PC (25
pin connectors) and AT (9 pin) machines.
If the cable is not wired correctly, you will get an error
message on your computer screen when you attempt
to print.

The baud rate switch on the PostScript printer
should be set to 9600 baud.
Cabling for Interpress printers is shown in the instruction manuals for these printers.

Printing a PostScript or Interpress file
You may find it useful to print to a disk file and then
later send this disk file to the printer or typesetter.
REFERENCE GUIDE

F-19

APPENDIX F-PRINTER INFORMATION

Computer

PostScript,lnterpress

25 pin to 25 pin
Adaptor Cable
Female Connector
Male Co,"_

Printer

1m

. . . . . . . .r-~~--'-I_=~~
.

Female Connector
Chassis Gnd

TO
RD
~~~

Signal Gnd

Male Connector

1 .................... 1 Chassis Gnd

2···················· 3 RD
3 ..................... 2 TO

: ..J.............. 20 DTR
7

Figure F-8

....... 7 Signal Gnd

Apple Laserwriter 25 pin to 25 pin cable

Computer

Printer
Female

Male

Female

9 pin to 25 pin
Adaptor Cable
Chassis Gnd
TO

RD
CTS
DSR
Signal Gnd

F-20

25 pin to 25 pin
Printer Cable

Female Mal
NC········ 1
3···· .... 2
2······· . 3
8··· .... 5
6
6
5········· 7

Figure F-9

Male

Female
I·

2······
3

:~:J
7·-

3
2
··20
7

'-~I =~

Male
Chassis Gnd
RD
TO

DTR
Signal Gnd

Apple Laserwriter 9 pin to 25 pin cable

REFERENCE GUIDE

I

PostScript, Interpress

APPENDIX F-PRINTER INFORMATION

The method for doing this is covered in the Set
Printer Info section of the Menu Commands chapter.
Printing over an Apple network
If the PostScript file is to be printed via an Apple
network, use the ASCII function in your wordprocessor to modify the POSTSCPT.CNF file, located in the
VENTURA directory. Change the line which says:
eoftype(PC)
to:
eoftype(MAC)
This suppresses the printing of AD characters which
are read by Apple network software as an end of file
character. The POSTSCPT.CNF file must be
modified prior to printing the PostScript file.
Reducing PostScript file size
PostScript files can become quite large when printing pages which contain images. To reduce the size of
this type of PostScript file, use the ASCII function of
your wordprocessor to add the following line to the
POSTSCPT.CNF file:
irngtype(COMPACT)
It may take much longer to print this file, but the file

usually be smaller.
Downloadable fonts
Standard fonts, such as Helvetica and Times Roman
are resident in all PostScript printers. However,
Xerox Ventura Publisher lets you use additional
fonts which are stored on the computer hard disk.
(See Appendix K, and see the AddlRemove Fonts opREFERENCE GUIDE

F-21

APPENDIX F-PRINTER INFORMATION

PostScript, Interpress

tion.) These fonts should be stored in a directory
called \PSFONTS (for PostScript.) If you want to
place these fonts in a different directory, use the
ASCII text function of your wordprocessor to modify
the POSTSCPT.CNF file in the VENTURA subdirectory.
For instance to place PostScript fonts in a directory
called MYFONT, modify the POSTSCPT.CNF file to
read:

psfonts(C: \MYFONTS\)
PostScript prologue
At the beginning of every PostScript print operation,
Xerox Ventura Publisher sends subroutines
(prologue) to the printer. These subroutines are contained in the file called PS2.PRE. Advanced users
may want to load these subroutines permanently
into the printer or typesetter and thus avoid the time
required to load the prologue. To do this:

>- Copy the file called PERMVP.PS (which contains
the permanent version of these subroutines) from
the POSTSCPT directory on the Utility Disk to the
VENTURA directory.
>- Download this file to your printer by using the
DOS COPY command as described in the Set
Printer Info option for the DTR.TXT file. Unlike
DTR.TXT, however, this file must be downloaded
each time your printer is turned on.
>- Delete the PS2.PRE file from the VENTURA
directory.
~

F-22

When creating PostScript files (by printing to a file)
to be printed on another printer or typesetter, always
include the prologue (i.e., do not delete the PS2.PRE
file.)

REFERENCE GUIDE

PostScript, Interpress

APPENDIX F-PRINTER INFORMATION

Ruling line around images
Because PostScript cannot print transparent overlapping images, a ruling box around an image will
not print. The solution is to set the frame margins
equal to the overall ruling box height.

PostScript bug
Version 23 of PostScript implemented for the Apple
LaserWriter below version 2 had a communications
handling error described by Adobe Systems Incorporated as follows:
"During serial input, if the input buffer becomes full
and the Apple LaserWriter sends XOFF to stop transmission from the host, it occasionally fails to send
XON to restart transmission ... This bug occurs only
under unusual circumstances that are difficult to
describe ... "
This bug does not generally manifest itself on small
jobs consisting of several pages. However, when more
than twenty pages are printed as a single job, the
computer may lock up. Reason: The PC will be waiting for the LaserWriter to indicate that it is ready for
input, but the LaserWriter will believe it has already
made that indication.
Adobe Systems, Incorporated has released a
downloadable patch which fixes this bug. The patch
is provided in the file called PSt.PRE. This file is
contained in the Utilities Disk in the POSTS CPT
directory. To use this patch, simply copy this file from
the Utilities Disk to the VENTURA directory. Xerox
Ventura Publisher automatically sends this patch to
the printer each time you print a chapter.

REFERENCE GUIDE

F-23

APPENDIX F-PRINTER INFORMATION

AST TurboLaser and Cordata printers

AST TurboLaser and Cordata printers
The AST TurboLaser and Cordata printers are connected directly to the computer with their own
cables. They print at 300 dpi for both text and
graphics. Follow the installation instructions which
come with each printer for important information
about modifications to the AUTOEXEC.BAT and
CONFIG.SYS files.
For both the AST TurboLaser and Cordata printers,
select serial port number 1 (or serial port 2 if the
mouse is connected to port 1) during VPPREP.
For the Cordata printer, you should place the following command in the CONFIG.SYS file, using the
ASCII text function of your wordprocessor:

DEVICE=LLD.syS
Also, for the Cordata printer, the RIM.EXE program
should be run prior to running Xerox Ventura
Publisher.
For the AST TurboLaser, execute the following command prior to running Xerox Ventura Publisher:

LPLOAD COMn ASTLASER.LNG
where n is replaced with 1 or 2 depending on which
COM port you installed during VPPREP.

AST TurboLaser and Cordata Fonts
The character set for the AST TurboLaser and Cordata printers is the same as shown in Appendix E,
available in the following typefaces, sizes:

F-24

REFERENCE GUIDE

AST TurboLaser and Cordata printers

APPENDIX F-PRINTER INFORMATION

Typeface Sizes
Swiss (san-serif)
• 6, 8 point medium
• 10,12 point medium, bold, medium italic
• 14, 18, 24 point bold
Dutch (serif)
• 8 point medium
• 10,12 point medium, bold, medium italic
• 14, 18, 24 point bold
Symbol (greek, mathematics)
• 10 point medium
These fonts are loaded by Xerox Ventura Publisher
as needed for each page. Additional type sizes and
type faces can easily be added. See Appendix K.

Cabling
The AST TurboLaser and Cordata printers are connected with the special cable that comes with the
printer. Make sure this cable is connected securely.
No error message will print if the cable is disconnected.The AST TurboLaser and Cordata printers
create each page in an uncompressed, bitmap format.
This means that each page is represented by a one
megabyte file which is transferred directly from the
computer to the printer at extremely fast, video
speeds. While this results in very fast printing, the
fact that each page results in one megabyte makes
storage of each page on disk impractical. Therefore,
no Print To File option is available for either the AST
TurboLaser or the Cordata printers.
A maximum of four image files is allowed per page.

REFERENCE GUIDE

F-25

APPENDIX F-PRINTER INFORMATION

AST TurboLaser and Cordata printers

This page intentionally left blank.

F-26

REFERENCE GUIDE

APPENDIXG
PICTURES
This appendix describes limitations inherent in the
process of converting from a variety of different
graphic formats into Xerox Ventura Publisher's internal graphic format. This chapter also includes
other important information about pictures.

AutoCAD pictures
Xerox Ventura Publisher converts slide files from
AutoCAD. AutoCAD SLD files are created using the
AutoCAD ADE-2 (Advanced Drafting Extension)
package. The AutoCAD MSLIDE command is used.
The use of this command is covered in the AutoCAD
User Reference manual. Look in the AutoCAD
Reference Manual index under Slides. Better resolution can be obtained by converting AutoCAD files to
HPGL.
CGM

Xerox Ventura Publisher converts CGM files. Key
features and limitations include:
•
•
•
•

128 vertices for polygons
All typefaces are converted to Helvetica
Color is converted
Pattern fills are converted based on the GSS
CGI definition.

DXF
AutoCAD and other CAD programs store files in DXF
format (Drawing Interchange Format.) To convert
these files to GEM format, which can be read by
Xerox Ventura Publisher, use the DXFTOGEM
utility. This utility is contained in the Utilities Disk
REFERENCE GUIDE

G-1

APPENDIX G-PICTURES

(Disk #11). To convert a file, insert the Utilities Disk
into the A drive and type the following:

A:DXFTOGEM filename Enter
If the filename has no extension, the extension DXF
is assumed.
A file with the same name but with the extension
GEM is created. This file can then be loaded as a line
art GEM file using Xerox Ventura Publisher's Load
TextlPicture option.
The following DXF graphic attributes are not converted:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Shape entity
Text mirroring
Tapering widths in polylines
Underscore and overscore in text strings
Text expansion factors
Backward text obliquing and arbitrary forward obliquing
Symbol characters (e.g., plus/minus, circle
dimension) in text strings
Curve fitting
3D rendering
Ellipses which are not X-Y aligned

EPS
Xerox Ventura Publisher converts EPS files. Key features and limitations include:
• EPS files do not display on screen. Instead a
large X is placed in the frame.
• EPS files can only be printed to PostScript
printers.
• Any single page printed to a disk by Xerox
Ventura Publisher (using the PostScript
driver) can be read back into a frame using the
EPS converter. However, this file is not a true
G·2

REFERENCE GUIDE

APPENDIX G-PICTURES

o

EPS file and therefore cannot be read by other
programs which read EPS files.
When generating print files to be read by the
VP EPS converter, you can create smaller files
if you temporarily rename or remove the
PS2.PRE file contained in the \ VENTURA
directory. Remember to put this file back
before printing to the printer.

HPGL
Xerox Ventura Publisher converts HPGL files. Key
features and limitations include:
Arcs, lines, and text are converted
Text size is converted
o
It is possible to have picture rotated on page,
depending on how it's printed. If you don't
want the picture rotated, pick a different
orientation from the graphics program which
generated the HPGL file.
• Color is not converted.
o
Fonts are all converted to Helvetica.
• Filled areas are made up of vectors, so it is
possible that gaps will appear in the fill patterns. You may also see rounded ends on lines
if you enlarge the picture. Therefore, if at all
possible, enlarge the picture within your external graphics program before saving as an
HPGL file.
o

o

Lotus 1·2·3 pictures
Lotus 1-2-3 .PIC files are created using the 1-2-3
SAVE option, which is found in the 1-2-3 Print menu.
The keystrokes required within 1-2-3, once a graph
has been created on the screen, are:
/GS filename
Filename is replaced by the name of the 1-2-3 picture file you wish to create.
REFERENCE GUIDE

G-3

APPENDIX G-PICTURES

Macintosh Paint
Xerox Ventura Publisher converts Macintosh Paint
files. You transfer files between the Macintosh and
the PC using a network. Key features and limitations
include:
• Pictures always transfer as a full 8 x 10 page.
Therefore, a small image on a white page must
be enlarge considerably within the frame.

Macintosh PICT
Xerox Ventura Publisher converts Macintosh PICT
files. You transfer files between the Macintosh and
the PC using a network. Key features and limitations
include:
• Bit images within PICT files do not convert
• Text fonts are usually converted into Times
Roman. They somtimes convert into Helvetica.

PC Paintbrush pictures
PC Paintbrush files are created using the Save as
option in PC Paintbrush. These files are stored with
the extension PCX.
• Color is not converted from PC Paintbrush or
GEM Paint pictures.

Video Show
Xerox Ventura Publisher converts General
Parametric Video Show files. Key features and
limitations include:
• Color is not converted. Color is instead turned
into shades of gray.
• Polygons with more than 128 vertices are
truncated.
• The 3D bar function is not implemented.
G-4

REFERENCE GUIDE

APPENDIX G-PICTURES

Text to PCX conversion
Any text file of up to twenty-five lines or less can be
converted to a graphic PC Paintbrush file. This file
can then be loaded as a PC Paintbrush image file and
placed in a frame. This utility is used to print the
computer screen as you see it, complete with ruling
lines and other text effects which don't normally
print when importing text data from the screen into
programs like Sidekick.
To convert a text file that has been captured from the
screen using Sidekick or some other background
utility, and save to a file, type the following:

TXTTOPCX filename /% Enter
where filename is replaced with the name of the file
to convert, and % is replaced with the type of display
in use
EGA with Enhanced Monitor use: C
EGA with Monochrome Monitor use: M
Color Card or EGA with Color Monitor use: 0
AT&T 6300 or Xerox 6065 use: A
A file with the same name but an extension of PCX
is converted.
This utility does not work with a Hercules card.
~

REFERENCE GUIDE

Reverse video and boldface text are not converted by
this utility.

G-5

APPENDIX G-PICTURES

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

G·6

REFERENCE GUIDE

APPENDIXH
APPLICATION NOTES
Publishing a database
This application note describes how to extract, preformat, and ultimately publish information from a
database program.
Example: Phone directory
This example assumes some knowledge of dBase III,
although the concepts apply to any database
program. Suppose you want to publish a phone directory using information from a dBase III mailing list
database. This simple directory contains last name,
first name, and phone number. A typical structure for
such a database is shown below.
Example database structure
Field

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

8
9

10
11

13

Field name
DATE
CaMP_NAME
MISTER
FIRST_NAME
LAST_NAME
TITLE
ADDRESS
CITY
STATE
ZIP
PHONE
CaMP_TYPE

I¥pe
Date
Character
Character
Character
Character
Character
Character
Character
Character
Character
Character
Character

Width

08
31
04
12
12
25
34
20
02
06
12
15

To publish a directory, create a style sheet with three
tag names: Body Text, FN, and Phone. Set page
layout to single sided. The relevant settings for
each of these three tags is shown on the next page:
REFERENCE GUIDE

H·1

APPENDIX H-APPLICATION NOTES

Publishing a database

Body Text Font

10 point, bold

Alignment
Spacing
Break

Left, Hyphen off
Inter-line and Interparagraph: 1 pica
Line Break Before

FNFont

10 point, normal

Alignment
Spacing
Break

Left, Hyphen off
Inter-line and Interparagraph: 1 pica
In From Left: 1 inch
No Line Break

Phone Font

10 point, normal

Alignment
Spacing

Right, Hyphen off
Interline and Interparagraph: 1 pica
Line Break After

Break

The dBase III LABEL command can be used to extract the information from this database, insert the
FN and PHONE tags, and save the resulting information into an ASCII text file.
The following assumes some familiarity with dBase
III, and assumes that the database has already been
created with the structure shown above.
First, generate a dBase label file called
PHONEGEN by typing modi label phonegen
On the first page of the label form, enter the followingvalues:
Width of label:
•• 80
Height of label:
3
o
Left margin:
.....
Lines between labels:
o
Spaces between labels:
o
Number of labels across: . 1
H-2

REFERENCE GUIDE

APPENDIX H-APPLICATION NOTES

Publishing a database

On the second page of the label form, enter the following values:

1 trim(last_name)+','
2 '@FN = '+trim(first_name)
3 '@PHONE = '+trim(phone)
Save the label by pressing and holding the Ctrl key
and then pressing W.
Next, either index or sort the database on the field
last_name.
Finally, to create an ASCII text file called
PHONEl.TXT that can be read directly by Xerox
Ventura Publisher, type the following command:

. label form phonegen to phonel
Read the file PHONEl.TXT into Xerox Ventura
Publisher as a Wordstar file. Load the style sheet
you created earlier. The phone list will already be formatted and ready to print.

Example: Product listing
The &LSTG-P2.CHP example in Appendix L
provides a simple example of a product listing. A portion of the text contained in this chapter is
reproduced on the next page.
This example is similar to the previous phone listing
example, except that line breaks (created with the
 code) are used to separate fields which appear
on different lines, but which are formatted with the
same typeface. When publishing a database, use line
breaks instead of paragraphs to create new lines
whenever possible.
I@f

REFERENCE GUIDE

The general rule of thumb is that a line break should
be used, when publishing a database, between any
two lines which are typographically identicaL
H-3

APPENDIX H-APPLICATION NOTES

Publishing a database

@CATEGORY = Digitizers
@COMP = Chorus Data Systems (603) 424 2900
@MODEL = PC-Eye
Video capture image digitizer450.00IBM PC 256K, long
slot
@COMP = Datacopy (415) 9657900
@MODEL = Model 900 Imaging System
35-mm digitizing camera with computer
interface11945.00IBM XT/AT

Figure H-l Text generated by database report generator. Note
 used to generate line breaks.

Digitizers
Chorus Data Systems (603) 424 2900
• PC-Eye
Video capture image digitizer
450.00
IBM PC 256K, long slot
Datacopy (415) 965 7900
• Model 900 Imaging System
35-mm digitizing camera with computer
interface
11945.00
IBMXT/AT

Figure H-2 Text from Figure H-l formatted with the style sheet
used for this Reference Guide.
H-4

REFERENCE GUIDE

APPENDIX H-APPLICATION NOTES

Publishing a database

The reason for using line breaks is that they consume
far less internal memory than paragraph endings.
This lets you create larger chapters and improves formatting speed.

Tabs
Another technique for separating fields in a database
is to use tab characters between fields. This is especially useful for inserting leaders between fields, for
example:
Smith, John
Turner, Fred

(408) 555-1234
(408) 555-1111

Tabs should be used sparingly, however, because they
consume internal memory. If too many tab characters
are used, you may encounter the following error message:

This frame is too complex to completely format.
Try splitting it into two frames or reducing the
number of columns, tabs, leaders, and lines of
text.

If you cannot create the document with fewer

leadered tabs and if you cannot increase the space between lines, then draw one or more frames on the
page, and flow the text into the first frame and then
into the second frame. Select each frame individually and make it a repeating frame. These frames will
automatically repeat on each page until the entire
text file has been placed in the document. Some text
must still flow into the underlying page in order to
force Xerox Ventura Publisher to automatically
create new pages.

REFERENCE GUIDE

H·5

APPENDIX H-APPLICATION NOTES

Publishing a database

This page intentionally left blank.

H-6

REFERENCE GUIDE

APPENDIX I
GLOSSARY
ASCII Text Files - American Standard Code For Information Interchange. ASCII text is stored in exactly the same order as you see it on a printed page, with
no additional characters added or deleted. ASCII files
are often called "print" files.
Ascender - The part of a lower case character which
rises above the height of the lower case "x."
Assignment List - The list of files, tags, or attributes that can be transferred to the selected
frame, paragraph, or selected text. Shown in the
Side-Bar on the left side of the screen.
Attribute - Any style used to enhance readability of
text. Typical attributes include boldface, underline,
and italic. Font changes assigned to selected text are
also considered attributes. Examples of these font attributes include 14 point, blue, and kern.
Base Line - An imaginary line on which type rests.
Descending characters hang below the baseline.
Binding Margin - The additional space added to the
side of the page that will be drilled or punched prior
to insertion into a binder. Use different margins for
left and right pages to create binding margins.
Body Text - The text of the main part of the document.
Box Text - A box created using the Graphic Drawing
function which contains text. Box text does not flow
around frames, and can have graphics (e.g., arrows)
directly attached to it. Use box text for tables and callouts. Use frames containing text files for
newspaper-type make-up.
REFERENCE GUIDE

1-1

APPENDIX I - GLOSSARY

Break - An interruption in the flow of text from one
paragraph to the next. Normally each paragraph continues directly below the previous paragraph or, ifno
more room is left on this column or page, it continues
at the top ofthe next column or page. This is called a
line break. If a paragraph always begins at the top of
a new column, this is called a column break. If a
paragraph always begins at the top of a new page,
this is called a page break.
Chapter - A combination of text and picture files,
formatted with a style sheet. A chapter file consists
of pointers to each of these files, along with instructions on how to combine them together on the computer screen or on the printer.
Clipboard - A temporary, invisible holding place for
text, pictures, and graphics. Any text block or picture
placed on the clipboard using a cut or copy operation
can be placed anywhere else in the chapter. The clipboard can independently hold one text block, one picture, and one graphic.
Crop - Eliminate unwanted portions of a picture.
The portions not displayed in the document are still
stored in the original picture file.
Crop Marks - Alignment marks which delineate the
outside edges of the printed page. Also sometimes
called trim marks or register marks. Crop marks can
be automatically added at print time or you can draw
your own using the Graphic Drawing function.
Dialog Box - The set of choices presented on the
screen for each menu option selected.
Discretionary Hyphen - A hyphen, placed in a
word, which only prints if the word appears at the
end of a line. Used to add hyphens beyond those
produced by the hyphenation algorithm. Discretionary hyphens always take precedence over any hyphens inserted by Xerox Ventura Publisher.
1-2

REFERENCE GUIDE

APPENDIX I - GLOSSARY

Em Dash - An em dash (decimal 197) is used to
separate parenthetical statements-such as this
one-from the surrounding text.
Em Space - An em space equals the width ofthe letter M in current point size. An em space is created by
pressing and holding both the Ctrl and Shift keys
and then pressing M.
En Dash - An en dash (decimal 196) is used between
numbers. For example: Figure 5-35.
En Space - An en space equals one halfthe width of
an em space. An en space is created by pressing and
holding both the Ctrl and Shift keys and then pressingN.
Extension - The part of the file name to the right of
the period. For instance, the extension in the file
name "DOC2.WP1" is WPI. Extensions are used by
Xerox Ventura Publisher to differentiate between
files of different types.
Figure Space - A figure space equals the width of a
number in the current point size. Use figure spaces
between numbers in tables to keep tabular information aligned properly. A figure space is created by
pressing and holding both the Ctrl and Shift keys
and then pressing F.
File - A unit of information stored on hard disk. Different types of information are stored in files with different extensions, and are treated differently. The
different file types recognized by Xerox Ventura
Publisher are Style Sheet (STY), Chapter (CHP),
Publication (PUB), Width Table (WID), Caption
(CAP), Graphic (VGR), text, image, and line art.
Filter - The specification on the Directory line in the
Item Selector that determines which files are displayed. The character "*,, indicates that any set of
characters can be displayed; the character "?" indi-

REFERENCE GUIDE

1-3

APPENDIX I - GLOSSARY

cates that any single character can be displayed in
that position. For instance, *.STY will display any
file name with the extension STY. GRAB????.IMG
will di~play all eight character file names starting
with the letters GRAB having the extension IMG.

Font - A unique combination of typeface, type size,
type style, and type weight. For instance, Swiss
(typeface), 12 point (type size), bold (type weight) is
one font; Swiss, 14 point, bold is another.
Font Metric - The width and height information for
each character in each font. This information is
stored in a width table.
Footer - Text which appears at the bottom of every
page in the document.
Footnote - Explanatory information at the bottom of
the page which is referenced on the same pages.
Frame - A rectangular box used to hold text or pic- ~
tures. Underlying pages are special frames which
Xerox Ventura Publisher automatically creates as
needed to accommodate all text in a file.
Greeking - The act of representing text by dummy
type having no meaning, or by a series of straight
lines. Within Xerox Ventura Publisher, greeking is
used to increase screen drawing speed when the text
is too small to be legible. Does not affect what gets
printed.
Image - A picture which is composed of individual
dots created with a "paint" program or with a scanner. See also Line Art.
Indent - The blank space at the beginning of the first
line of a paragraph.
Inter-line Spacing - The space between lines in a
paragraph. See Leading.

1-4

REFERENCE GUIDE

~

APPENDIX I - GLOSSARY

Interpress - A language used to describe how to
print a page which consists of both text and pictures.
This description is completely independent of the
printing device. This means that the page can be
printed on printers which use Interpress, and the
page will be printed at the full resolution that each
printer or typesetter can produce.
Justification - Text aligns evenly with both the
right and left margins.
Kerning - Space reduction between specific letter
pairs. Even when proportionally spaced, certain letter pairs should be placed more closely together
eliminate excessive white space. This space is especially noticeable with larger type sizes. For instance,
an upper case V which follows an upper case A should
be placed closer to the A. For example:

AV.
This is kerned: AV.
This is not kerned:

Landscape - A page printed so that as you read it,
the width of the page is greater than its height.
Layout - The arrangement of text and pictures on
any given page.
Leaders - Characters placed in the blank space between items in a list. For example:
Table Item 1 .... .Item 2 .... .Item 3 .... .Item 4
Leaders

~

____________

- L_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _~_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _~

Leading - The distance in points from the baseline
of one line of type to the next.
Line art - A picture which is produced on the computer and stored as mathematically defined objects.
Any picture not produced using a paint program or

REFERENCE GUIDE

1-5

APPENDIX I - GLOSSARY

scanner is probably line art. Contrast line art with
the definition of Image.

Line Break - The blank line which separates two
paragraphs. If no line break is set between two
paragraphs, the second paragraph will begin at the
same vertical point as the first line in the first
paragraph (Next Y Position: Normal); or at the same
vertical point as the last line in the first paragraph
(Next Y Position: Beside Last Line of Previous
Paragraph.)
Line Length - The length of a line of type. Usually
expressed in picas and points.
Monospaced - An equal amount of character width
for each character. Most typewriters and printers are
monospaced, whereas most typeset material is
proportionally spaced. See Proportional Spacing.
Mechanical - A finished "camera ready" piece of
artwork, generally one or two pages.
Orphan - One or more lines of text left at the bottom
of a column or page. Also, see Widow.
Outdent - Text on the first line of a paragraph which
prints to the left of the paragraph margin.
Paste - The act of moving text or a picture from the
clipboard to the page.
Paragraph - Any line or lines of text ended by pressing the Enter key. A single letter, word, or line is considered a paragraph if the Enter key is pressed at the
end ofthe letter, word, or line.
Pica - Typographic unit of measurement equal to 1/6
inch. Twelve points equals one pica.

Picture - Any drawing or illustration placed in a
frame. A picture can be either image or line art.

1-6

REFERENCE GUIDE

APPENDIX I - GLOSSARY

Point - Typographic unit of measurement equal to
1172 inch.
Proportional Spacing - Different space is given to
each character in a font. When proportionally spaced,
the letter i gets less space than the letter w.
Port - The connection point in the computer for
peripherals such as a printer or mouse.
Portrait - A page printed so that, as you read it, the
width of the page is less than its height.
PostScript - A language used to describe how to
print a page which consists of both text and pictures.
This description is completely independent of the
printing device. This means that the page can be
printed on any printer or typesetter that uses PostScript, and the page will be printed at the full resolution that each printer or typesetter can produce.
Publication - A combination of chapter files. Each
chapter file can have its own set of text, picture, and
style sheet files.
Reflect - Reflected settings place a mirror image of
that setting on alternating pages. For example, if a
picture is placed at the left side of a left page and then
reflected using the For All Pages Left & Right in
the Repeating Frame option, the picture will then be
placed on the right side of right pages.
Ruling Line - Any horizontal or vertical line used to
separate text or frames from the surrounding layout.
Run around - Text which follows the outline of a picture.
Scale - Increasing or decreasing the size of a picture.
Scanner - A device which converts a paper drawing
into a computer image.

REFERENCE GUIDE

1-7

APPENDIX I - GLOSSARY

Select - Point to something on the screen and press
the mouse button.
Style Sheet - A file which is stored separately from
text, but which controls the typographic format of
that text.
Tag - The format applied to a particular paragraph.
Thin Space - A thin space is the width of a period.
Typeface - The style of type e.g., Bookman, Palatino,
Avant Garde, Zap! Cfiancery.
Typeset - The act of producing a document on a
typesetting machine. Xerox Ventura Publisher can
produce documents on a laser printer that have near
typeset quality.
Underlying Page - The frame defined by the Page
Layout option. Additional frames are placed on top of
this page. The page counter on the screen shows the
number of underlying pages in the document.
Widow - One or more lines of text left at the top of a
column or page. Note: A widow also refers to a single
word on the last line of a paragraph. While this is
considered poor form, Xerox Ventura Publisher does
not attempt to prevent this kind of widow. Also, see
Orphan.
Width Table - A file which contains font metric information.
WYSIWYG - What You See Is What You Get
(printed.) Refers to the ability to display on the computer screen a close representation of what is
printed. A word processor which uses special characters to mark the beginning and end of underlined
text, rather than showing text with an underline is
an example of a program which does not have
WYSIWYG.

1-8

REFERENCE GUIDE

APPENDIXJ
COMPLETE FEATURES LIST
Document formats
Up to eight columns per page or frame. Multiple
frames on same page can create more than eight
columns. Columns can be unequal width.
Different column widths and indents for left and
right pages.
Text flows automatically across page boundaries if
placed in underlying page.
Vertical rules between columns, plus two vertical
rules per frame.
Portrait or landscape format. Set globally for entire
chapter.
Ruling lines (up to three) of different widths can be
placed above, below, or around each frame.

Document content
Multiple, non-contiguous articles per document.
Up to 128 chapters can be chained together when
printing, generating a table of contents or index.
Documents up to 9,999 pages can therefore be handled.

Document views
•
•
•
•
REFERENCE GUIDE

Facing (Two full pages.)
Reduced (Full page.)
100% (Normal size.)
200% (Enlarged view.)
J-1

APPENDIX J - FEATURES

Style-sheet Format Control
Style sheets control each paragraph's format through
paragraph tags. In each chapter, a 640K system
can handle up to 128 tags;. up to 500K bytes of text;
and up to 8,000 paragraphs.
Style sheets control the following on a paragraph by
paragraph basis:
• Typeface and font
Fonts available depends on printer
- Any integer size between 1 and 254 point
available for page description languages
• Text alignment within column
• Hyphenation (two different languages can be
hyphenated within the same document)
• Justification
• Indent/outdent for any number oflines
• Line to line spacing (leading)
• Paragraph spacing
Temporary margins (using spacing in from
left, in from right)
• Page, line, or column breaks
• Large first letter of paragraph
• Automatic bullets
• Tabs
Sixteen horizontal tabs per paragraph
- Left, center, right, decimal point aligned
- Leaders
• Automatic kerning (if kerning information is
in printer width table)
• Automatic letterspacing (flags loose lines)
mInImUm
and
maximum
- Normal,
spaceband settings
• Letter space adjustment
• Single/double underline, overs core , and
strikethrough thickness and position settable
• Horizontal ruling lines
• Up to three ruling lines, each of different
thickness and spacing above, below, or around
text
J-2

REFERENCE GUIDE

~

APPENDIX J - FEATURES

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Pre-set options: Rule length equal to text,
margin, column or frame
Customized options: Rule length and indent
settable
Eight textures and colors available
Text within ruling line allowed
Ruling lines the width of text, margin, column,
or custom width
Margins & Columns
Portrait, landscape, paper size
Widows & Orphans
Vertical tabs
Automatic section numbering
Up to ten levels
- Can be used for manuals, outlines, lists

Page controls

Automatic headers/footers.
• Separate headers/footers for left and right
pages
• Left, center, right aligned text in each header.
Two lines each
• Automatic page numbering and section headings in header or footer
Page numbering in choice of:
•
•
•
•

Arabic numbers (1,2,3)
Upper or lower case roman numerals
Upper or lower case letters (A,B,C) (A-Z only)
Alphabetic (One, Two, Three)

Page counter: 1-9999.
Automatic footnotes.
• Footnote text appears at the bottom of the
page
Column balance on last page of chapter.
REFERENCE GUIDE

J-3

APPENDIXJ - FEATURES

Chapter headings forced to same page as next
paragraph.

Editing
Accepts text from and stores text (and formatting information) back to standard wordprocessors:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Displaywrite III and N (DCA)
Microsoft Word
Multimate
Wordperfect
Words tar
Xerox Writer
Xywrite
Any wordprocessor or other program that
generates a standard ASCII file

Real-time re-format during editing
Files from different word processors can be mixed in
same document.
Text insert or delete at any point.
Text blocks can be deleted, moved, or copied
Any letter, word or group of words can be changed to:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
J-4

Boldface
Italic
Small caps
Strikethrough
Subscript
Superscript
Underline
Double underline
Overscore
All lower case
All upper case
All initial caps
Any available font
REFERENCE GUIDE

APPENDIX J - FEATURES

Selected text can be moved:
• Horizontally (manual kerning.)
• Vertically (base line jump)
Pictures
Accepts pictures generated by:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

AutoCAD SLD
GEM Draw, GEM Graph
Lotus 1-2-3
Mentor Graphics
PC Paintbrush, GEM Paint
Any program that can save files in General
Parametric's Video Show format (e.g., Lotus
Freelance)
Any program that can save files in CGM format
Macintosh PICT files
Macintosh Paint files
Encapsulated PostScript files
HPGL
Images scanned from Microtek, Dest,
Datacopy, or other scanner which saves files in
PC Paintbrush PCX format
CAD pictures stored in DXF format

Handles text around irregular pictures using text
flow around and multiple frames.
Any picture can be automatically repeated
throughout the document.
Picture scaling: Stretch to fit picture frame, maintain
original aspect ratio, or scale by factors
Picture cropping: Pictures larger than frame can be
cropped as desired.
Captions.

REFERENCE GUIDE

J-5

APPENDIX J. FEATURES

•
•
•
•

Attached to pictures
Abovelbelow/leftlright of picture
Automatic figure or table numbering
Rules above, below, around each caption

Anchored Pictures.
• Picture can be anchored relative to a position
in the text
• Picture can move to the same page as the text,
below the text, or above the text when ReAnchor Frame command is given

Printing
Single- or Double-sided formatting (start on left or
right side.)
Print left pages or right pages only (for manual
duplex printing)
Paper type:
•
•
•
•

81/2X 51/2
81/2 X 11
81/2 X 14
11X17
- Shingle feature lets you print multiple 8 1/2
x 11 pages to achieve one 11 x 17 page
- Shrink feature lets you print an 11 x 17
page on 81/2 x 11 paper (PostScript only)
• 18 x 24 (Broadsheet)
- Shrink
- Strips output for typesetters
• A4
• B5
Collating and printing order control.
Multiple paper trays
Print all, current, or selected pages.
J·6

REFERENCE GUIDE

APPENDIX J - FEATURES

Frontlback matter
Automatic table of contents, table of figures, table of
tables, generation by searching for paragraph tags
Automatic index generation by searching for index
entries.

Printers
Up to five printers installed simultaneously.
Additional printer and screen fonts can be added
using utilities supplied
See Appendix F for list of printers supported.

REFERENCE GUIDE

J-7

APPENDIX J - FEATURES

This page intentionally left blank.

J-8

REFERENCE GUIDE

APPENDIXK
ADDING FONTS
The Utilities Disk contains programs which let you
add additional printer and screen fonts to Xerox Ventura Publisher. Fonts can be purchased from many
companies. They must be designed for your printer.
(Exception: Fonts for the HP LaserJet Plus can be
converted for use by the AST TurboLaser, Cordata,
and JLaser printers.)

What is a font?
Every printed character is defined by a combination
of attributes that give that character its unique
shape, size, and look. A combination of characters
forms a character set. Xerox Ventura Publisher contains two character sets (Appendix E):
• An international character set
• A symbol character set

Other character sets, such as Dingbats, are available
from various font vendors.
A set of characters that are designed to look similar
constitute a typeface. Xerox Ventura Publisher
provides three standard typefaces for the international character set (not all typefaces are available
for each printer):
• Helvetica (or equivalent)
• Times Roman (or equivalent)
• Courier (or equivalent)
Xerox Ventura Publisher provides one typeface for
the symbol character set.

REFERENCE GUIDE

K-1

APPENDIX K-ADDING FONTS

How are fonts used by the printer?

Within a typeface, each character can be printed in
different sizes. The size of a character is measured
in points, where one point equals 1172 inch.
Each character can also have a different style, where
a style can be:
•
•
•
•

Normal
Bold
Normal italic
Bold italic

Finally, each character can be printed in one of two
orientations:
• Portrait
• Landscape.
Each combination of typeface, size, style, and orientation defines a font. Many people use the word font
when they really mean typeface. However, throughout this manual, font means the unique combination
of typeface and size, style, and orientation.

How are fonts used by the printer?
Within a graphic printer (such as a laser printer or
typesetter), each character in each font is ultimately
drawn as a series of individual dots. The printer
creates these dot-by-dot drawings from information
contained in font files. Font files are stored on either
the computer's hard disk or in the printer's memory,
depending on the type of printer you have. Xerox
Ventura Publisher works with three different types
of printers:
• Type 1: Printers that manage font files within
the printer (e.g., HP LaserJet Plus, Xerox
4045)

K-2

REFERENCE GUIDE

How are fonts used by the computer display?

APPENDIX K-ADDING FONTS

• Type 2: Printers that let the PC manage the
font files (e.g., AST TurboLaser, Cordata,
JLaser)
• Type 3: Printers that use a page description
language to generate font sizes from font outlines (e.g., Apple LaserWriter, IBM 4216, other
PostScript printers; Interpress printers.)
If you want to print characters in fonts different from
those supplied with Ventura Publisher, you must
purchase fonts from a font supplier which are
designed for your particular printer. You then store
these fonts on your computer's hard disk or within
the printer's memory, depending on the printer type.
Once they are stored, you then create tables which
provide Xerox Ventura Publisher with information
about each individual character in the new fonts. The
procedure for creating these tables, called Width
Tables, is described in the following sections. In addition, width tables also contain information which
configures Xerox Ventura Publisher's Font Dialog
Boxes to display the font name and sizes correctly.

How are fonts used by the computer display?
Because the display on your computer has a much
lower resolution and different aspect ratio from your
printer, the fonts you purchase for your printer cannot be used to show new fonts on your computer display. You can, however, purchase new screen fonts
(which are separate files from the printer fonts.)
These screen fonts will not match the printer font
widths and style, unless purchased with the printer
fonts as part of a matched set.
Since matching screen fonts are not always available, Xerox Ventura Publisher lets you add printer
fonts while still using the screen fonts already installed. When a screen font is used which does not
match the printer font, Xerox Ventura Publisher adjusts the space between words on the screen as necesREFERENCE GUIDE

K-3

APPENDIX K-ADDING FONTS

Adding new screen fonts

sary to compensate for the differences in widths between the new printer font and the generic screen
font. This assures that each line and paragraph ends
at the correct location. While this may make each
word appear either too close or too far from its neighbor on the computer screen, the line and paragraph
endings will be correct, arid the page will look correct
when it is printed.
If you add printer fonts for characters other than
those shown in Appendix E, Xerox Ventura Publisher
will not display the corresponding fonts on the screen
unless you add the appropriate screen fonts.

Adding new screen fonts
Screen fonts must be provided by the font vendor in
Xerox Ventura Publisher format, and they must
match the resolution for your computer display.
Screen fonts for the IBM Enhanced Graphics Display
(91 x 72 dpi resolution) will work with all displays
shown in the VPPREP installation menus, except the
IBM Color Display (options A and B.)
To add new screen fonts:
~
~

Copy the fonts to the VENTURA directory
Type the three letter file extension on the Screen
Fonts line in the Set Printer Info Dialog Box if different from EGA.

The new screen fonts are loaded and immediately
displayed.
If the fonts are a different resolution from EGA, then
the extension must be different from EGA, and the
new fonts must contain both Helvetica and Times
Roman fonts. The maximum file size for anyone
screen font is 35K bytes. You can add up to 500 screen
fonts.

K-4

REFERENCE GUIDE

Adding new printer fonts-General instructions

APPENDIX K-ADDING FONTS

If you purchase PostScript screen fonts from Adobe
Systems, these must first be converted to Xerox Ventura Publisher format before loading them. These
fonts have different resolution (75 x 75 dpi) than EGA
fonts, so they you must include both Helvetica and
Times Roman fonts in the following conversion. To
convert these fonts:
~
~

~

Copy the font files to the VENTURA directory.
Rename the font files, if necessary so that they all
have the extension ABF.
Copy the ABFTOFNT converter from the
POSTSCPT directory on the Utilities Disk (Disk
#11) to the VENTURA directory by typing the following:
COpy A: \POSTSCPT\ABF. * C: \ VENTURA
Enter

~

Convert the fonts by typing the following:
ABFTOFNT *.ABF

Enter

The fonts are all converted to Xerox Ventura Publisher format, and the file extensions are all changed
to PSF. To load these fonts, see the Set Printer Info
secion in the Menu chapter.
If you have several different printers installed and
each has its own set of matching screen fonts, make
the extension for each printer's matching screen
fonts unique to that printer.

Adding new printer fonts-General instructions
To add new printer fonts, follow these instructions.
~

REFERENCE GUIDE

Copy all font files from floppy disk to the VENTURA directory on your computer hard disk (PostScript fonts are copied instead to a directory which
you create called PSFONT)
K-5

APPENDIX K-ADDING FONTS

~

~

Adding new fonts to the HP LaserJet Plus

Copy the width table for these fonts to the VENTURA directory. If the font vendor did not supply
a width table for these new fonts, you must create
one. Width Table creation is different for each
printer and is described in the following sections.
Use the AddlRemove Font option to merge the
width table for these new fonts into the width table
for the fonts already in use.

Consult the appropriate section later in this chapter
for additional information on your particular printer.

Adding new fonts to the HP LaserJet Plus

I

To add new fonts to the HP LaserJet Plus, follow the
general directions for adding new printer fonts.

Creating an HP LaserJet Plus width table
If the font vendor did not supply a Xerox Ventura
Publisher width table for your HP LaserJet Plus, you
must create one. To create a width table for new fonts
which have already been copied to your computer
hard disk:
~

~

Use the DOS RENAME command to rename all
new portrait font files to have the extension SFP,
and all new landscape fonts to the extension SFL.
Iflandscape fonts are not supplied by the font vendor, create landscape fonts from portrait fonts.
This is done as follows:
• Insert the UTILITIES DISK (#11) into drive A
• Type the following command:
A:PORTOLAN C:\VENTURA\*.8FP Enter

~

Copy the HPLTOVFM.EXE utility from the
UTILITIES DISK #11 to the VENTURA directory
by typing the following command:
COpy A:\HPLJPLUS\*.* C:\VENTURA Enter

K-6

REFERENCE GUIDE

Adding new fonts to the HP LaserJet Plus

~

APPENDIX K-ADDING FONTS

For each portrait font file, you must create a Ventura Font Metric (VFM) file. This is a readable text
file which provides Xerox Ventura Publisher with
important information about your new fonts. The
VFM file is described in more detail near the end
of this chapter. To create this file, type the following command for each new font file:

HPLTOVFM fontname.SFP [switches] Enter
where [switches] is replaced with the following:
• IF=Typeface name (15 characters maximum)
• IN=Typeface ID (15-255; See ID table later in
this chapter)
• IP=Point size (always 2 characters)
• IW=Weight (style) (1 character: N=normal;
B=bold; I=normal italic; T=bold italic)
You must specify all switches for each font file. The
typeface names, typeface ID, and weight (style) combinations are shown later in the chapter under the
Typefaces heading.
Example: You purchase seven new portrait fonts:
Century Schoolbook 8 point normal; 10 point normal;
10 point bold; 10 point italic; 12 point normal; 12
point bold; and 12 point italic. You copy these to your
computer's hard disk and rename the files so they
have the extension SFP. The file names are:
CENT08NP.SFP
CENTIONP.SFP
CENTIOIP.SFP
CENTIOBP.SFP
CENT12NP.SFP
CENT12IP.SFP
CENT12BP.SFP

To create VFM files for each ofthese fonts, type these
commands (placing these commands in a batch file
and then executing that file is less prone to error):

REFERENCE GUIDE

K-7

APPENDIX K-ADDING FONTS

Adding new fonts to the HP LaserJet Plus

HPLTOVFM CENT08NP.SFP IF=CenturylN=20!P=081W =N Enter
HPLTOVFM <{ENTIONP.SFP IF=CenturylN=20!P=lOIW=N Enter
HPLTOVFM CENTlOIP.SFP IF=CenturylN=20/P=lOIW=I Enter
HPLTOVFM CENTI OBP.SFP IF=CenturylN=20!P=1 OIW =B Enter
HPLTOVFM CENT12NP.SFP IF=CenturylN =20!P=12IW=N Enter
HPLTOVFM CENT12IP.SFP IF=CenturylN=20/P=121W=I Enter
HPLTOVFM CENT12BP.SFP IF=CenturylN=20!P=121W=B Enter

Once all the VFM files have been created, you next
create a list of all VFM files. This list must contain
the name of every VFM file just produced. Create the
list with any wordprocessor, and save as an ASCII
text file. The name of this file should be the same as
the name of the ultimate width table file, and the extension should be LST.
The VFM file names should be placed in the LST file
with all fonts for a given typeface together, starting
with the smallest point size and then going to larger
point sizes. Within a given size, the order should be
normal, italic, bold, and then bold italic.

Example: The LST file for the seven fonts whose
VFM files were created in the example above should
look like this:
CENT08NP.VFM
CENTIONP.VFM
CENTlOIP.VFM
CENTIOBP.VFM
CENT12NP.VFM
CENT12IP.VFM
CENT12BP.VFM

As the last step in the width table generation process,
the VFMTOWID.EXE uses the LST file to create a
new width table. The syntax for this conversion is:
VFMTOWID fliename.LST Enter

where filename is replaced with the name of the list
file you wish to convert. The VFMTOWID.EXE file

K-8

REFERENCE GUIDE

Adding new fonts for the Xerox 4045 Laser Printer

APPENDIX K-ADDING FONTS

must be copied from the Utilities Disk to the VENTURA directory by placing the Utilities Disk in the A
drive and typing the following:
COPY A:\ VFMTOWID.EXE C:\ VENTURA Enter

Example: For instance, to create a width table from
the list file created in the previous example, assuming this file is saved under the name CENTURY.LST, type the following:
VFMTOWID CENTURY.LST Enter

This will create a width table called CENTURY.WID. This width table can be merged into an
existing width table using the AddlRemove Fonts option within Xerox Ventura Publisher.
When you are finished generating new width tables,
you can save the VFM files onto a floppy disk and
then erase them from your computer's hard disk.
They are not used by Xerox Ventura Publisher except
when generating a new width table.

Adding new fonts for the Xerox 4045 Laser Printer
To use new fonts with the Xerox 4045, follow the
general directions for adding new printer fonts, earlier in this chapter.
Creating a width table for the Xerox 4045
If the font vendor did not supply a Xerox Ventura
Publisher width table file for your 4045 printer, you
must create one. This is done as follows:
~

REFERENCE GUIDE

Copy the XRXTOVFM.EXE utility from the
UTILITIES DISK #11 to the VENTURA directory
by typing the following command:
COpy A:\XRX_4045\*.* C:\ VENTURA Enter

K-9

APPENDIX K-ADDING FONTS
~

Adding new fonts for the Xerox 4045 Laser Printer

Rename each font file according the following conventions:
The file extension must be .XFN
The file name must be in the following format.
X450FPPW.XFN
where:

o is replaced with the orientation (portrait = P;
landscape = L)
F is replaced by one of the following typefaces:
A
B
C
D
F
G
H
L
N
0
P
S
M

T
Z

Avant~arde

Bookman
Century
Dingbats
Friz_quadrata
Garamond
Helvetica
Lubalin
Nar_helvetica
Optima
Palatino
Souvenir
Symbol
Times
ZapCchancery

PP is replaced with the type size (e.g., 08 for 8 point,
10 for 10 point etc.)

W is replaced with one of the following type weights
(styles):

B
I
N
T

K-1O

Bold
Italic
Normal
Bold Italic

REFERENCE GUIDE

Adding new fonts for the Xerox 4045 Laser Printer

APPENDIX K-ADDING FONTS

Example: The file name for 14 point, italic,
Lubalin, portrait, should be X45PL14I.XFN.

>- Convert

each font to a Xerox Ventura Publisher
VFM file using the XRXTOVFM.EXE converter.
The resulting VFM file is an ASCII text file that
can be edited. (See end of this chapter.) Each file
must be converted individually.

Example: To convert the font file in the previous
example, type the following:
XRXTOVFM X45PL14I.XFN Enter

>- Create

a list of all VFM files that should be included in a new width table. This list should contain all typefaces and sizes that you want to appear in the Font Settings dialog boxes, and must
contain at least one system font. Create this list
with any wordprocessor, and save as an ASCII tex:t
file. The name of this file should be the same as the
name of the ultimate width table file, and the extension should be LST. The VFM file names should
be placed in the LST file with all fonts for a given
typeface together, starting with the smallest size
and then going to larger sizes. Within a given size,
the order should be normal, italic, bold, and then
bold italic.
Example: The 4045 LST file which created the
fonts provided with Xerox Ventura Publisher is:

X45PH06N.VFM
X45PH08N.VFM
X45PHI0N.VFM
X45PHI0LVFM
X45PHI0B.VFM
X45PH12N.VFM
X45PH12LVFM
X45PH12B.VFM
X45PH14B.VFM
X45PH18B.VFM
X45PH24B.VFM
REFERENCE GUIDE

K-11

APPENDIX K-ADDING FONTS

Adding fonts to: AST Turbo Laser; Cordata; JLaser

X45PT08N.VFM
X45PTION.VFM
X45PTIOI.VFM
X45PTIOB.VFM
X45PT12N.VFM
X45PT12I.VFM
X45PT12B.VFM
X45PT14B.VFM
X45PT18B.VFM
X45PT24B.VFM
X45PC12N.VFM
X45PMION.VFM
~

Finally, convert the LST file to a width table using
the VFMTOWID.EXE program as follows:
VFMTOWID filename.LST Enter
where filename is replaced with the name of the
list file you wish to convert.

This width table can be merged into an existing
width table using the AddlRemove Fonts option
within Xerox Ventura Publisher.
When you are finished generating new width tables,
you can save the VFM files onto a floppy disk and
then erase them from your computer's hard disk.
They are not used by Xerox Ventura Publisher except
when generating a new width table.

Adding fonts to: AST Turbo Laser; Cordata; JLaser
Some font vendors supply printer fonts in Xerox Ventura Publisher format. These fonts are intended for
use with AST TurboLaser, Cordata, and JLaser
printers. Follow the general directions for adding
printer fonts given earlier in this chapter. The extension for these fonts should be renamed to B30 for
JLaser and Cordata printers and to W30 for the AST
TurboLaser printer.
K-12

REFERENCE GUIDE

I

Adding fonts to: AST Turbo Laser; Cordata; JLaser

APPENDIX K-ADDING FONTS

Downloadable fonts (fonts on disk) for the HP Laser
Jet Plus can be converted for use with the AST Turbo
Laser, Cordata Laser Printer, and JLaser board. To
do this, follow the procedure described in the Adding
new fonts for the HP LaserJet Plus section, with
the following changes:
• Only portrait fonts are required.
• During the VFMTOWID operation, specify the
printer name as follows:
VFMTOWID CENTURY.LST IN=printer Enter
where printer is replaced with the name of the
printer exactly as it appears in the Set Printer Info
Dialog Box.
After the width table has been generated, convert the
fonts themselves from HP format to Xerox Ventura
Publisher's format by using the HPLTOFNT.EXE
utility contained on the UTILITIES DISK #11. To
convert the fonts:
~

Copy the HPLTOFNT.EXE utility from the
UTILITIES DISK #11 to the VENTURA directory
by typing the following command:
COPY A: \ HPLTOFNT.EXE C:\VENTURA Enter

~

For each portrait font file type the following command:
HPLTOFNT fontname.SFP [switches] Enter
where [switches] is replaced with the following:
IF=Typeface name (15 characters maximum)
IN=Typeface ID (15-255; See ID table later in
this chapter)
IP=Point size (always 2 characters)
IW=Weight (style) (1 character: N=normal;
B=bold; I=normal italic; T=bold italic)

REFERENCE GUIDE

K-13

APPENDIX K-ADDING FONTS

Adding new PostScript fonts

For instance, to convert a 10 point, Century Schoolbook, normal, portrait font from HP LaserJet Plus to
Xerox Ventura Publisher format, type the following:
HPLTOFNT CENTIONP.SFPIF=CenturyIN=201P=lOIW=N
Enter

The extension for the resulting fonts should then be
renamed to B30 for JLaser and Cordata printers and
to W30 for the AST TurboLaser printer.

Adding new PostScript fonts
To add new fonts for PostScript printers, copy the
font files to the PSFONT directory on your computer
hard disk. (Create this directory, if necessary.) Rename the font file name, so that it matches exactly
one of those shown in the Typeface subsection which
follows, and with the extension FIB (or FlA if your
fonts files are ASCII).
If you wish to save fonts in a different directory, use

the ASCII text editing function of your wordprocessor to edit the POSTSCPT.CNF file located in the
VENTURA directory. For instance, if all fonts are
saved in a directory called NEWFONTS, change the
line in the POSTSCPT.CNF file which reads:

psfonts(C: \PSFONT\)
to:

psfonts(C: \NEWFONTS\)
Then, for each font added, use the AddlRename
Font option to change the state of each new font.
They should each be set for Download.
~

K-14

Remember to change the download/resident
switch for each Face, Size, and Style combination.

REFERENCE GUIDE

~

Typefaces

APPENDIX I<-ADDING FONTS

The PostScript width table which is installed with
Xerox Ventura Publisher includes the most common
PostScript typefaces. Therefore, you don't need to
copy or merge width tables. However, the file name
for each typeface added must match those shown in
the Typefaces section (later in this chapter) exactly,
and the download/resident switch must be set as
described on the previous page.

Typefaces
The following is a list of the standard typefaces and
their associated ID's and weights (styles.) If the typeface you are adding is not on this list, assign the
largest number available for the class of typeface you
are adding. For example, if you have already added
two new serifed typefaces, neither of which is on this
list, you would have already assigned typeface ID
number 49 and 48. The next typeface, if it is not on
the list, should then be assigned number 47.
The PostScript file name is shown for reference. For
file names which contain the underline character you
must type enough underline characters to make the
file name exactly eight characters long.
System Faces (International Character Set)
Typeface

PostScript
FileName

Courier-Bold
Courier-Bold Oblique
Courier
Helvetica-Oblique
Helvetica-Bold
Helvetica
Helvetica-Bold Oblique
Times-Bold Italic
Times-Italic
Times-Bold
Times-Roman

COURIB
COURIBO
COURI
BELVEO
HELVEB
HELVE
HELVEBO
TIMESBI
TIMESI
TIMESB
TIMESR

REFERENCE GUIDE

FaceId

Weight
(Stl:':le)

1
1
1

1

2
2
2
2

4

14
14
14
14

5
0
1

0

5
5

4
1

0

K-15

APPENDIX K-ADDING FONTS

Typefaces

Serifed Faces (International Character Set)
Typeface

PostScript
FileName

New Century Schlbk-Italic
New Century Schlbk-Roman
New Century Schlbk-Bold Italic
New Century Schlbk-Bold
Palatino-Italic
Palatino-Bold Italic
Palatino-Bold
Palatino-Roman
Garamond-Bold
Garamond-Bold Italic
Garamond-Light
Garamond-Light Italic
Bookman-Demi
Bookman-Light Italic
Bookman-Demi Italic
Bookman-Light
Lubalin Graph-Demi Oblique
Lubalin Graph-Book
Lubalin Graph-Book Oblique
Lubalin Graph-Demi
Souvenir-Light
Souvenir-Light Italic
Souvenir-Demi
Souvenir-Demi Italic
Benguiat-Book
Benguiat-Bold
Glypha-Bold
Glypha
Glypha-Oblique
Glypha-Bold Oblique
Friz Quadrata
Friz Quadrata-Bold
ZapfChancery-Medium Italic
Trump Mediaeval-Italic
Trump Mediaeval-Bold Italic
Trump Mediaeval-Roman
Trump Mediaeval-Bold
Melior-Bold Italic
Melior-Bold
Melior-Italic
Melior
Galliard-Bold Italic
Galliard-Bold
Galliard-Italic
Galliard-Roman
New Baskerville-Bold Italic
New Baskerville-Bold
New Baskerville-Italic
New Baskerville-Roman
Goudy-Bold Italic
Goudy-Bold

NCI
NCR
NCBI
NCB
POI
POBI
POB
POR
GAB
GABI
GAL
GALl
BKD
BKLI
BKDI
BKL
LUDO
LUW
LUWO
LUD
SUL
SULI
SUD
SUDI
BGW
BGB
GYB
GYR
GYO
GYBO
FQR6
FQB
ZCMI
TMI
TMBI
TMR
TMB
MEBI
MEB
MEl
MER
GLBI
GLB
GLI
GLR
NBBI
NBB
NBI
NBR
GOBI
GOB

K-16

Face Id
20
20
20
20
21
21
21
21
22
22
22
22
23
23
23
23
24
24
24
24
25
25
25
25
26
26
27
27
27
27
28
28
29
30
30
30
30
31
31
31
31
32
32
32
32
33
33
33
33
34
34

Weight
(St;rle)
4
0
5
1
4
5
1
0
1
5
0
4
1
4
5
0
5
0
4
1
0
4
1
5
0
1
1
0
4
5
0
1
4
4
5
0
1
5
1
4
0
5
1
4
0
5
1
4
0
5
1

REFERENCE GUIDE

APPENDIX K-ADDING FONTS

Typefaces

Goudy-Italic
Goudy
Park Avenue
Bodoni-Bold Italic
Bodoni-Bold
Bodoni -Italic
Bodoni
Bodoni-Poster
Century Old Style-Bold
Century Old Style-Italic
Century Old Style-Regular
Cheltenham-Bold Italic
Cheltenham-Bold
Cheltenham-Book Italic
Cheltenham-Book

GOI
GOR
PAM
BDBI
BDB
BDI
BDR
BDPS
COB
COl
CORG
CHBI
CHB
CHWI
CHW

34
34
35
36
36
36
36
37
38
38
38
39
39
39
39

4
0
0
5
1
4
0
0
1
4
0
5
1
4
0

Sans Serifed Faces (International Character Set)
Typeface

PostScript
FileName

Helvetica-Narrow-Bold
Helvetica-Narrow-Bold Oblique
Helvetica -Narrow-Oblique
Helvetica-Narrow
Avant Garde-Book
Avant Garde-Demi Oblique
Avant Garde-Demi
Avant Garde-Book Oblique
Optima-Bold Oblique
Optima-Bold
Optima-Oblique
Optima
Korinna-Kursiv Bold
Korinna -Bold
Korinna-Kursiv Regular
Korinna -Regular
Helvetica-Light
Helvetica-Light Oblique
Helvetica-Black
Helvetica-Black Oblique
Franklin Gothic-Demi
Franklin Gothic-Book
Franklin Gothic-Demi Oblique
Franklin Gothic-Book Oblique
Franklin Gothic-Heavy
Franklin Gothic-Heavy Oblique
Helvetica-Condensed-Light Oblique
Helvetica-Condensed-Light
Helvetica-Condensed-Bold Oblique
Helvetica-Condensed-Oblique
Helvetica -Condensed
Helvetica -Condensed-Bold
Helvetica-Condensed-Black Oblique
Helvetica -Condensed-Black

HELVENB
HELVENBO
HELVENO
HELVEN
AGW
AGDO
AGD
AGWO
OPBO
OPB
OPO
OPR
KRKB
KRB
KRKX
KRRG
HVL
HVLO
HVBL
HVBLO
FRD
FRW
FRDO
FRWO
FRH
FRHO
HVCLO
HVCL
HVCBO
HVCDO
HVC
HVCB
HVCO
HVCBL

REFERENCE GUIDE

Face Id
50
50
50
50
51
51
51
51
52
52
52
52
53
53
53
53
54
54
55
55
56
56
56
56
57
57
58
58
59
59
59
59
60
60

Weight
(St;yle)
1a
5
4
0
0
5
1
4
5
1
4
0
5
1
4
0
0
4
0
4
1
0
5
4
0
4
4
0
5
4
0
1
4
0
K-17

APPENDIX K-ADDING FONTS

VFM file format

Typewriter (mono-spaced) faces (International Character Set)
PostScript
FileName

Typeface
American Typewriter-Bold
American Typewriter-Medium
Machine
Courier-Oblique
Prestige Elite
Prestige Elite-Bold
Prestige Elite-Bold Slanted
Prestige Elite-Slanted
Orator-Slanted
Orator
Letter Gothic-Bold
Letter Gothic-Slanted
Letter Gothic
Letter Gothic-Bold Slanted

ATB
ATM
MAM

COURIO
PERG
PEB
PEBSL
PESL
ORSL
ORRG
LGB
LGSL
LGR6
LGBSL

~-

Face Id
100
100
101
102
103
103
103
103
104
104
105
105
105
105

Weight
(St,r:le)
1
0
0
4
0
1
5
4
4
0
1
4
0
5

PI Fonts (Different Character Sets)
Typeface

PostScript
File Name

Symbol
ZapfDingbats
Sonata

SYMBOL
ZDM
MUSO

Face Id
128
129
130

Weight
(St,r:le)

o
o
o

VFM file format
The VFM file created during the width table generation process describes the font characteristics for
each font file. It has the same format, regardless of
what font file type (e.g., HP LaserJet Plus, PostScript) was used as the source. While most readers of
this note will not need to edit the VFM file, the following information is provided for those who have
the need to make changes to the font information.
Remember, after you edit any VFM files, you must
then generate a new width table using the
VFMTOWID utility, and then merge this new width
table using the AddJRemove Fonts option in the Options menu. Otherwise, changes made to the VFM
table will not affect Xerox Ventura Publisher's output.
K-18

REFERENCE GUIDE

VFM file format

APPENDIX K-ADDING FONTS

A sample VFM file is shown below for reference.
In this file, each field has the following function:
DEVICE This specifies the printer or typesetter on
which this font will be printed. The name is determined by the VFM converter you use. For example,
if you use the HPLTOVFM converter, the DEVICE
name will be automatically set to HP LJ+. This
string is used to determine whether Xerox Ventura
Publisher is currently set for draft or ultimate
printing (as shown in the Set Printer Info Dialog
Box.) Key Note: Draft printing is done on a different
printer than the one for which you added fonts. Only
the system fonts will be used when draft printing,
and space between words will be adjusted as necessary in order to make lines and paragraphs end at the
correct place.
TYPEFACE This specifies the typeface name. The
name is set by the IF option during VFM generation.
It can be a maximum of 15 characters, and must be
unique for each type family.
FACEID This number is the typeface ID. This number is set by the IN option during VFM generation. It
must also be unique for each typeface. The valid
range is 15-255 decimal. Serifed fonts are 20-49.
Sans serifed fonts are 50-99. Mono-spaced fonts are
100-127. PI fonts (i.e., character sets other than the
international character set shown in figures E-1 and
E-2) are 128 and above.
SIZES This is the point size. It can range from 1-255
points. This number is set by the IP option during
VFM operation. The number 255 is used to set continuous font scaling (this enables the Custom font
setting in the font Dialog Boxes.)
ATTRTYPE This number specifies the weight ofthe
font, where 1=medium; 2=bold; 5=medium italic;
6=bold italic. This field along with sizes and face ID

REFERENCE GUIDE

K-19

APPENDIX K-ADDING FONTS

VFM file format

are used by Xerox Ventura Publisher to uniquely
identify a font.
UFACEID This number is always the same as
FACEID.1t is an abbreviation of ultimate face ID.1t
is used to select the typeface on the printer when it
is the ultimate device.
USTYLE This number is used to select the weight
of the font on the ultimate device. The numbering
convention is different than ATTRTYPE: O=medium,
l=bold, 4=medium italic; 5=bold italic.
SFACEID This is no longer used in this version.
SSTYLE This is no longer used in this version.
TOP This defines the distance from the baseline to
the top of the cell of the font, using a normalized
measurement system. To convert this number into
inches, use the following formula: (yDIVNMPY) *
TOPI1200
BOT This defines the distance from the baseline to
the bottom of the cell of the font, using a normalized
measurement system. To convert this number into
inches, use the following formula: (YDIVNMPY) *
BOT/1200
XMPY,XDIV Xerox Ventura Publisher's coordinate
system is based upon a 111200 inch grid. The ratio of
these two numbers provides the conversion between
the normalized internal measurement system, and
inches.
YMPY,YDIV Xerox Ventura Publisher's coordinate
system is based upon a 111200 inch grid. The ratio of
these two numbers provides the conversion between
the normalized internal measurement system, and
inches.

K-20

REFERENCE GUIDE

VFM file format

APPENDIX K-ADDING FONTS

DEVICE HP LJ+
TYPEFACE Swiss
FACEID2
SIZES 18
ATTRTYPE2
UFACEID 2
USTYLE 1
SFACEID2
SSTYLE 1
TOP 72
BOT 17
YMPY4
YDN18
Character widths,
XMPY4
starting with the space
XDN18
/
character (decimal 32)
DEVSPEC NONE
WIDTHS 192
21 252558426453192828377521 2521 24
42 42 42 42 42 4242 42 42 42 23 23 75 75 7542
75 51 53 56 54 49 45 58 56 23 41 53 44 66 56 59
50595450455349704847452938297537
19424641464324464520204220664546
46 46 29 41 244540 5740 40 38 37 37 37 75 1
56 45 43 42 42 42 42 41 43 43 43 20 20 20 51 51
49667546464645454059534242454542
42204645455629324233331818253434
42 46 59 46 71 85 51 51 59 37 37 37 37 62 62 65
33 75967537752551 51 49494923232323
59 59 59 50 41 53 53 53 47 45 0 0 0 0 0 0
KERN 2
6599 -5
65101 -5 ...............Kerning pairs. First
pair is Ac. Second
pair is Ae.

Figure K-l

Typical VFM file.

REFERENCE GUIDE

K-21

Modifying kerning pairs

APPENDIX K-ADDING FONTS

DEVSPEC This string is used to pass information
to the output device at print time, and is associated
with a particular face, size and weight. The format of
the string must be:
JUNKIpfilename/lfilename
Ip must be placed in front of the portrait font's name,

and II in front of the landscape font's name.

WIDTHS This specifies the number of characters in
the width table.
The width shown in the VFM file is converted from
points as follows:
(1200172)

* (XMPYIXDIV) * width

Example:
If XMPY=4 and XDIV=18, the width measurement
for 18 points is:
(1200172)

* (4/18) * 18 = 67

Modifying kerning pairs
This subsection describes how to add kerning information, even for fonts that don't normally include
kerning.
To add kerning information, modify each font's VFM
file prior to generating a width table. Kerning information is appended to the end of the VFM file. For
each pair of characters to be kerned, add a one line
entry of the following form:
Chari! Char#2 Kerning
where Chari! is replaced with the· decimal
equivalent for the first character, Char#2 is replaced
K-22

REFERENCE GUIDE

APPENDIX K-ADDING FONTS

Modifying kerning pairs

with the decimal equivalent for the second character,
and Kerning is replaced with the amount of kerning
desired. The units of measurement for kerning are
the same as described above for VFM widths.

Example:
To provide 1.5 point kerning for a capital A (decimal
65) followed by a capital V (decimal 86), where
XMPY=4 and XDIV=14, add the following line to the
end of the VFM file:

65 86 ·7
Add the word KERN followed by the number ofkeming pairs before the first kerning pari. (See Figure K1.)

REFERENCE GUIDE

K-23

Modifying kerning pairs

APPENDIX K - ADDING FONTS

This page intentionally left blank.

K-24

REFERENCE GUIDE

APPENDIXL
STYLE SHEETS
Xerox Ventura Publisher comes with 20 different style sheets. Each
style sheet is named according to the following formula:
&-identifies an original style sheet supplied with the software
P or L-identifies the printing orientation as portrait (vertical) or
landscape (horizontal)
Digit-number of columns in the style sheet
STY-file extension for a style sheet
Thus, a book style which is printed portrait mode in two columns is
&BOOK-P2.STY.
Below is a complete list of style sheet titles with a brief description:
&BOOK-P1.STY
Book, I column
&BOOK-P2.STY
Book, 2 column
&BRO-L2.STY
Brochure, landscape, 2 column
&BRO-P3.STY
Brochure, portrait, 3 column
&INV-PI.STY
Invoice form with line items
&LSTG-P2.STY
Product listing
<RI-P1.STY
Letter
&MAG-P3.STY
Magazine
&NEWS-P2.STY
Newsletter,2 column
&NEWS-P3.STY
Newsletter, 3 column
&PHON-P2.STY
Phone listing
&PREL-P1.STY
Press Release
&PRPT-P1.STY
Proposal/report, I column
&PRPT-P2.STY
Proposal/report, 2 column
&TBL-PI.STY
Tabular financial table
&TBL2-LI.STY
Columnar table
Technical manual
&TCHD-PI.STY
&TDOC-P1.STY
Technical manual
&VWGF-L1.STY
Viewgraph, landscape
&VWGF-P1.STY
Viewgraph, portrait
The style sheets provided with Xerox Ventura Publisher and
described in the appendix represent common publishing applications.
Any style sheet can be modified to fit your exact needs. Just remember to make a copy of the style sheet before editing so the original
remains intact. Any changes made to a style sheet affect all chapters

REFERENCE GUIDE

L-1

APPENDIX L-STYLE SHEETS

which use it, To make a copy ofastyle sheet, use Save As New
Style in the File menu.
Xerox Ventura Publisher also provides a chapter file (on the Examples Disk) for each of the style sheets. The chapter file provides a
text and frame Template for the style sheet to format.
To look at an example of each style sheet:
~

Select the Open Chapter option in the File menu.

~

Select the chapter name which corresponds to the style sheet
you want to see (i.e., &BOOK-Pl.CHP uses &BOOK-Pl.STY.)

~

Specific information about typeface or point size is not given.
This information varies according to the printer you have installed.

Xerox Ventura Publisher also contains several other style sheets:
CAPABILLSTY

SAMPLEl.STY
CHARSET.STY

SCOOP. STY

Used by the CAPABILI chapter to visually
show you the limitations of your printer. Open
this chapter and then print it to see whether
your printer can print white text on a black
background or transparent graphics. This
also shows you what font sizes your printer
can print, and how much space it leaves
around the edge of the page. The CAPABILI
chapter is shown on the next page.
D sed for training exercises
Used by the CHARSET chapter to display
and print the Xerox Ventura Publisher
character set. Printing this chapter will show
you what characters your printer can print.
Used by the SCOOP chapter to display an
example of a typographically sophisticated
page. You should open this chapter, then
select individual frames to see how to create a
complex document.

To see an example of each style sheet:, open the chapter which has
the same name as the style sheet. For example, to see an example of
a phone list formatted with the &PHON-P2 style sheet, open the
chapter &PHON-P2.CHP.

L-2

REFERENCE GUIDE

APPENDIX L-STYLE SHEETS

PRINTER CAPABILITY PAGE
(Print This File On Your Printer To See What You Get)
This page will help you understand the capabilities of your particular printer. It illustrates the use
of white text on black background and other features which not all printers have.

Reverse Text

The box to the left should be black with the words "Reverse Text" primed in
whiteon top of it. Ifyourprinlcrcannot print white texloo a black background,
you will see only a black box.

The word "Under" from the phrase "Text Under Graphics" should be completely obscured by the opaque circle on top of it.

The word "Under" from the phrase "Text Under Graphics" should be partial~
ly obscured by the transparenlcirc\con lOp of it. On PostScript and some other
printers which cannol handle transparent graphics, this picture will look identical to the one directly above.

,,',9,1Il,12,14.18243648,72

The numbers to the left represcnt a
range of point sizes between 6 and
72 point Timcs(or Dutch). If the size
is not available in your printer, the
number will print in the nearest
available size.

The box outline to the left is drawn
with 3 black ruling lines and its
lower right hand comer is completely obscured by an opaque circle (i.e.,
graphics).
This ruling line around the page
goes right to edge of the physical
page. When printed, the white space
outside the ruling line represents the
"dead" space to which your printer
can't print.

CAPABILI.CHP

REFERENCE GUIDE

L-3

ill

o

:3
CJ

ill
()

Z_HEADER

Z
ill

"~"The Adventure Begins

a:

_ _,.1

ill
LL

ill

a:

Chapter!

Chapter #
~

==
U

The Adventure Begins

~

~

~I
UJ

~
0
0

E

~

~

~

T

~
0
0

~

J:

UJ

>f-

(/)

I

...J

><

Ci
z
UJ
11.
11.

«

•• I

~

~

~

U

Z_LABEL FIG

-...
al

~

Chapter Title

hiS mpreally began in Sepl~mberlast year when Gerry won ~jrst
prize In a raffle at the fa~hlOn show which Rush-PreshytenanSt. Luke's Medical Center holds every year
trip tickets to Hong Kong on United Airlines,
ten nights in the
J long Kong Ilyan Hotel. Analyzing OUT good fortune, we concluded
that we wanted to do more than spend ten days in Hong Kong and
return, but at the same time, United, having just gouen its routes and
equipment from Pan American, had not yet received authority to fly
to other destinations or between points in the Far East.

Firstpar

(/)
...J

...-

Body Text

_..__-1 ~j~{i81~llc:h~S~~~~p~:~~7e'~:~~~e~~~i~-!~~i~!tOry. You might

--+-----I..

Z_CAPTION

On february 10th, United acquired this authority, and on february
11 th Debbie began putting our trip together. We left on March 2nd

~ and returned on March 26th. We entered seven countries, traveled
over 25,000 miles on four airlines, made over 500 Kodachrome@

~

Q,)

E--t

"'"
..J

APPENDIX L-STYLE SHEETS

STYLE SHEET: &BOOK-Pl.STY
Description: Single column book layout
Comment:

For any document with multiple chapters or sections.

Special Characteristic:

Menu:

Option

One 36-pica column

Frame

Margins & Columns

Column-wide rules above
and below Chapter #

Paragraph

Ruling Line Above
Ruling Line Below

Chapter #, Chapter Title
centered on page

Paragraph

Alignment

Big first character
in Firstpar

Paragraph

Special Effects

Body Text indented 1.5
inches in from left margin

Paragraph

Spacing

Bullet indented 10 picas
from left margin and begin
with •

Paragraph

Spacing
Special Effects

Ruling line separating
footnotes from text

Page

Footnote Setting

Page Break has page break
after set so that following
paragraph starts new page.

Paragraph

Breaks

Change Bar is created with Paragraph
a custom ruling box around
where the width ofthe rule
and the height of the rule are
the same.

F1
F3
F5
F7
F9

Ruling Box Around

Tags and Function Keys
Firstpar
F2 Major Heading
Minor Heading
F4 Bullet
Chapter Head
F6 Chapter #
F8 Page Break
Change Bar
FlO Body Text

REFERENCE GUIDE

L-5

ill

o

:::J

CJ
ill
()

Z

ill

a:

ill
l.L

ill

a:

Chapter #

Il..

I

~I.

•
~
0
0
(J)

I-

ill
ill

~

~

~

~
0
0
~

Firstpar

K",,~

X

0

Z

ill

a...
a...

«

~

0

in the Hong Kong Hyan Hotel

:Hld r.;turn, but at

In

Major Heading

Hong

..

I~EEd~

I

-.

JlI~hl'

Body Text

Q!
~
~

~"'~"~

AnalY/jllg OIJf good fUrlune. we concludc~ that w~

--1

J

Chapter Title

wh~n Gerry won first prize in a raffle at the
f:.dlJ()[] ,how which Rush-Prcsbytcnan·St Luke's
M~JKaJ Ccmcr holds eyery year. The prize was two

w,"l1,'<1 \0 ,10 more !han _'pend ten days

ill
(J)

TT'. . .aud len

(/)

>-

..

found !fir tid;.Cl~ to Hong Kong on United A)rhnes,

I

I-

Chapter 1
The Adventure Begins

C'l

Il..

I

QS

Z_LABEL FIG

CI::

Z_FOOTER

,~

!II,

r.:

-

F, ure 1·1 Place your own picture in Ihls

frame

Travel Log

..

So far, ,rs been a long lind intcrcslmg day and J
guess it'sjusl about half over. We did the follow,og

Minor Heading

• Aroseat5:30A.M

Bullet
Z_CAPTION

The Advenlure Begins

~

a.l

E-i

I~

APPENDIX L-STYLE SHEETS

STYLE SHEET: &BOOK-P2.STY
Description: Two column book layout
Comment:
For any document with multiple chapters or sections.
Note how frame-wide Chapter headings keep text from flowing to top
of second column on page one.
Special Characteristic:

Menu:

Option:

Rule around entire frame

Frame

Ruling Box Around

Two 17-pica columns
with a 2-pica gutter

Frame

Margins & Columns

Chapter #, Chapter Title
flush left on page, extends
across columns

Paragraph

Alignment

Big first character
in Firstpar

Paragraph

Special Effects

Major Heading flush left
in column

Paragraph

Alignment

Ruling line below
major Heading

Paragraph

Ruling Line Below

Bullet indented 10 picas
from left margin and begin
with •

Paragraph

Spacing
Special Effects

Page Break has page break
after set so that following
paragraph starts new page.

Paragraph

Breaks

Change Bar is created with Paragraph
a custom ruling box around
where the width of the rule
and the height of the rule are
the same.
F1
F3
F5
F7
F9

Ruling Box Around

Tags and Function Keys
Firstpar
F2 Major Heading
Minor Heading
F4 Bullet
Chapter Title
F6 Chapter #
F8 Page Break
Change Bar
FlO Body Text

REFERENCE GUIDE

L-7

w

Cl

::;
CJ

w

o
z

w

a:
w

LL

W

a:

The TItle of The Seminar

__

Title

-----------+- Subtitle

A Short Description of the Seminar ......
July 23, 1987
MariottHotel
Detroit, Michigan

~

:=
o
~
~

•

o

~

(J)

IW
W
I

~

~

~

~
~

~
~

00

Body Text

~

~

Some sales blurb that makes a person want to attend your seminar
Highlights 01 last year's seminar, How many people showed up_
you can expect this year

7:30-8;OOA.M

Firstevent~

Position -+-----.,~~~ ~:~;.O;'e~r;:;!~t
XYZCorp

~

--------------1-

........

10:00-10:15

Break

10:15·12:00

Exhibits
All kindS of interesting exhibits

Setting

Whai

Event

12:00·1:00 P.M.

Lunch

1:00-2:30 P.M

Next talk

A brief description of what Mr. Smith will talk about

Time

+a:OO-lo:o0A,M.

Second Event
Ms. Jane Schwartz
Treasurer

What he plans to talk about

NBCo,Ltd.

2:30-5:00

Cocktail hour

Ms. Schwartz will talk about all kinds of interesting things

(J)

W

...J

T
x
oz

w

a..
a..

-

(J)

Table Item

0==

Jx

15

z

w'

Il..
Il..

«

~
~

~

0

Ves

Ve,

-!f

choose your design by

selecting a

Table Item

style~sheet

No

Ve,

Click. Load text from your
word processor. Clicle And

Ve,

Ves

watch ftffow, instantly, into
your format.

or scanners, and create
professionat, typeset quality

You can compose any dowment that you desire in a
fraction of the time if would

Z..LABEL FIG
~
e;::::

Mod, Rel.1

sor, and graphics from
popular graphics programs

take to sel1d it to a typesetter, proof 11:, and print it.

-

a:

documents. Without being a
professional layout artist,
typesetter or graphic designer. You don't even have to
think 6ke one.

0
!:d

~I

w

W

ill can take text from
;ur favorite word proces-

W

I-

LL

Body Text

= =
~

Deckhead

modify ours.
Feature Muff.

Text

~

a:

can design your own, or

Se!cifications

Major Head

~
w

Headline

Z_CAPTION
With the Acme Pub6sher™,
an you need to know is how
to paint. The mouse driven
software contaros dozens of
professionally designedstyle-sheets-i'or news Ie!·
tars, flyers, technicar docu-

You want three corumns, not
two? Click. Done. The whore
chapter, up to 100 pages, is

ments, catalogs, proposals,

now three cofumn format
with proportional spacIng,
justifIcation. hyphenatioll,
multiple type styles and
sizes. Just like you get from

and magazines. Pfus, you

the typesetter.

~

~

IP

~

o

..-

...J

APPENDIX L-STYLE SHEETS

STYLE SHEET: &BRO·P3.STY
Description: Three-column portrait brochure
Comment:

Use for sales brochures.

Special Characteristic:

Menu:

Option:

Three 13-pica columns
with a 1.5-pica gutter

Frame

Margins & Columns

Headline automatically
kerned and tracked

Paragraph

Typographic controls

Headline, Deck Head
centered on page

Paragraph

Alignment (frame
wide)

Major Head flush left
over column

Paragraph

Alignment (column
wide)

Table Header centered
over column

Paragraph

Alignment

Custom 1 point underline
used on first line of Table
Item

Paragraph

Typographic controls

Ruling line below
Table Header

Paragraph

Ruling Line Below

Table Item tab settings:
tab1=left (4 picas)
tab2=right (10 picas)
tab 3=right (13 picas)

Paragraph

Tab Setting

Body Text flush left

Paragraph

Alignment

Page Break has page break
after set so that following
paragraph starts new page.

Paragraph

Breaks

F1
F3
F5

F7
F9

Headline
Major Head
Table Header
Address
List Item

REFERENCE GUIDE

Tags and Function Keys
F2 Deckhead
F4
F6 Table Item
F8 Page Break
FlO Body Text

L-11

UJ

Cl

5

<.?

m,croPublishing Report

Logo

UJ

o

Small Computer Solutions for Publications Professionals

Z

UJ

Address
Date

2004 Cunis Ave. #A

Redondo Beach, CA 90278

a:

(213) 376-5724

UJ

u.

UJ

a:

March 1, 1986

Customer
Invoice
Column heads

Il.t

=:
o

~

Il.t

en
f-

UJ
UJ

~

1-01

~

~~

Total

INVOICE

Quantity

Description

Price

Subtotal

Subscription
Seminar fee including
late charges

$175.00

$175.00
$2,875.00

$57500

Line item

-Total now due: .......................................................................................$3,050.00

I.)

""""

~

I

en

UJ
...J

~
en

~

><
Ci
z

~
o

J

UJ

a..
a..

«

~

~

c::

;.>

~

~

C\J
~

....J

APPENDIX L-STYLE SHEETS

STYLE SHEET: &INV-Pl.STY
Description: Single column invoice
Comment:
Mixed type sizes in Logo. (Set tag attributes, then go to
Text mode. Select the word to be in a different font and use Set Font
to change it. Note: Paragraph Tag does not override Set Font attributes)
Special Characteristic:

Menu:

Option:

One 42-pica column

Frame

Margins & Columns

Address tab settings:
tab l=center (21 picas)
tab 2=right (42 picas)

Paragraph

Tab Setting

Invoice in shaded box
(use an 18-pt. rule with
pattern 1. Select a negative value (-) for Space
Below Rule 3. This has
the effect of moving the
line below 18 points
higher and creates dark
words on a shaded band.)

Paragraph

Ruling Line Above

Column Head tab settings:
tab l=left (6 picas)
tab 2=left (20 picas)
tab 3=right (42 picas)

Paragraph

Tab Setting

Line Item tab settings:
tab l=left (6 picas)
tab 2=left (20 picas)
tab 3=decimal (40 picas)

Paragraph

Tab Setting (leaders
turned on for tab 3)

Ruling line above
Total

Paragraph

Ruling Line Above

Total tab settings:
tab 1 =decimal (40 picas)

Paragraph

Tab Setting

F1
F3
F5
F7
F9

Headline
Major Head
Table Header
Address
List Item

REFERENCE GUIDE

Tags and Function Keys
F2 Deckhead
F4
F6 Table Item
F8 Page Break
FlO Body Text
L-13

w

Z_HEADER
Category
Comp
Model
Body Text

o

::;

Digitizers

(9
OeclslonWare, Inc. .
RlghtWriter

Digitizers
Chorus Data Systems .......... (555) 424 2900

=

.~ 450.00

Video capture image digitizer

Emerging Technology.

IBM PC 256K, long slot

Word processing and document development
software

Datacopy .
. ... (555) 965 7900
Model 900 Imaging System
35·mm digitizing camera with computer interlace

490,00
192K

o ~
~
~

00

en
fW
W
I

~

~

~

Quadram Corp.

. .... (555) 447 9495

w

Professional Writers Package

living Vldoetext, Inc ..

LL

w
a:

" . (555) 964 6300

Thinktank
Outlining software

Microvislon Co.
MacVIZ
Image digitizer for Macintosh
299.00
Macintosh

~

w
a:

IBM PC 96K, DOS 2.0

• PC·Eye

Koala Technologies, Inc.
. ... (555) 676 5655
MacVisfon
Image digitizer for MaCintosh computer
349.95
Macintosh

o

w

o
z

Document and style proofreader for IBM PC
75.00

11945.00
16M XT/AT,
Hercules card

~

• (555) 383 6059

. .. (555) 438 5520

• ......... (555) 923 6666

Palette Capture
Video input digitizer
795.00
IBM PC 360K, DOS 2.1

Editorial Software
Arrlx Logic Systems Inc,
... (555) 292 6425
APSlmicroDCF
lBM·based lext processing system

195.00
IBM PC or Macintosh
RefetenceSoftware ,
Reference Set
On-line thesaurus
89.00
IBM PC

. , , (555) 626 2222

ScenlcSoft Inc,
(555) 742 6677
ScenicWriter
Text editing, correcting, and composition software
for IBM
PC

995.00
MS DOS
TCI Software Research.

, .... (555) 522 4600
T3
Scientific word processing system
595.00
IBM PC, S12K. graphics
Writing Consultants.
Word Fmder
On-line thesaurus

. . , .. (555) 377 0130

124.95
IBM PC

en
W

...J

~
en

~

x

~
0

~

oz

w
c...
c...

«

~
~

-.
~

It:
~

~

E-t

pagel

4

Z_FOOTER

I~

APPENDIX L-STYLE SHEETS

STYLE SHEET: &LSTG·P2.STY
Description: Two column product listing
Comment:
Line breaks are used to separate different entries in
Body Text. In long directory listing, this dramatically increases the
size of the chapter that can be created compared to using paragraphs
between each line.
Special Characteristic:

Menu:

Option:

Two 19-pica columns
with a I-pica gutter

Frame

Margins & Columns

"Live" headers automatically
place, in the header, the first
occurrence of text which is
tagged as Category. This is
stored in chapter, not style
sheet.

Page

Headers & Footers

Text attributes in the footer
Page
(the word page is subscripted)

Headers & Footers

Comp uses one tab, with
with dot leaders to create
the phone number.
tab:::right 19 picas

Fl
F3

Category
Model

F5

F7
F9

REFERENCE GUIDE

Paragraph

Tab Settings

Tags and Function Keys
F2 Comp 2
F4
F6
F8
FI0 Body Text

L-15

w

-

Name

o

::J

Ajax Corp.

Leaders in Indus/ria/lnnovmion

[

123 Sapporro RO:ld

.....

Motto

I_----------_+-

Address -+-----------I.~ palo~)~~;(i:i~~3~027~4......
I ~

To ~
Body Text

--r.

Mr. 1. Smith
123 Main SI
Detroit, MI 98989

Phone

"
W

U
Z

w
a:
w
u..
w
a:

-1- Date

November 15, 1987 .........

D,," M,sm;th

It has been called to our altemion that you have been having i\ difficult time with our new

Body Text

~

U

~

Il.t
~

w

~

widget. Upon reviewing your case, we

h;l'ie

found that you have fuiled to plug your widget

an electrical outlet. As may know, OUf widget

~

~

~ E
~

~

~
~

Thank

yOll

doe~

UllO

require power to operate properly

for buying our widgets, and we look forw:lrd to your continued

b\l~ines~

S;"",dy.

1

To~

John L. Smith
Cusromer Service MJnager

W
I

C/)

W

--I

~

Jx
oz

w
c..
c..

<

~

~
as

a;:

U

~
Q.l

en

~

><
0

E-t

I-

J
Z

w

c..
c..

«

~

~
0

-

This is a liflout. It
highlights a keJ quole or

-'N&l I9sStSlcbfiLtrUCUttS
ur

Lift

as

a;::::

~

~

~

Z_FOOTER

~NM'mb"I51988

/3

APPENDIX L-STYLE SHEETS

STYLE SHEET: &MAG·P3.STY
Description: Three column magazine
Comments: Note automatic figure numbering in frame captions.
This is saved. in the chapter. Also, note that text in the Liftout box is
from a different text file.
Special Characteristic:

Menu:

Option:

Three l3-pica columns
with a l.5-pica gutter

Frame

Margins & Columns

Body Text first line indent
of6 points

Paragraph

Alignment

Letterspacing on for Body
Text

Paragraph

Typographic Controls

Vertical rules between
columns
(Inter-column=on)

Frame

Vertical Rules

Headline centered
across page, frame-wide

Paragraph

Alignment

Firstpar not indented
(Relative indent=O)
Big first character in
Firstpar

Paragraph

Alignment

Paragraph

Special Effects

Bullet has l.l-pica
fixed indent
each Bullet item begins
with •

Paragraph

Alignment

Paragraph

Special Effects

Larger type size
for text in liftout box

Paragraph

Font

Ruling lines above and
below Liftout

Paragraph

Ruling Line Above
Ruling Line Below

Fl
F3
F5
F7
F9

Headline
Firstpar
Creditline
Byline

REFERENCE GUIDE

Tags and Function Keys
F2 Subhead
F4 Deckhead
F6
F8 Bullet
FlO Body Text
L-19

w

0

=>
C}

Widget World News

Masthead
Credo

Views and News of Widget Manufacturing in the 80s - - -

Headline +Software Salaries: How do you stack up?
Byline +bYJOCSm'tl'
I
HowmuchyolJrsofLwareprof~ssionalsarepajdisafunc-

~o;o~~ ~r~n:ni;J~~I.CS. and a subject of consIderable ,nterest

Subhead ~softWareSalarypaYS~aleS
Because of the dynamiC growth of the software

industry
over Lhe la.>t decade, the demand for experienced, qualified
programmers has greatly increaser;!, thus leading 10 3 spiraling

ofsaJancs
Bul what causes managers to pay one programmer more

~

f:?w

lhan anOlhcr'! Docs the lype of organization, its size, or location make a dJffcrcnce? Whm career path or programming
.PCCia!lY1Cadstolhcmostrcmllncration?

~

==
o

~

~~~

~

•
00

~~U
~OO

;3~~

~

~~~

W

~OO~

I

en

~
en

Jx

oz

w
a..
a..
~

TOC Title -+--+-........ Table of Contents
TOC Entry

-+--

Sp

... _3

w
w

-

Headline

,II:

unalterable, always ensuring
the original copy is intact,
making archiving easy
The storage capacity, low
cost., and read only feature of
CD-ROM bring an enormous
new capability \0 microcomputer users - that is, informatiorlretrievalofverylarge
reference publications. How
pcoplereceive and useinformatiorlin the immediatcand
longlerm fUlurewillbcdl""dmatically changed by CDROM,
In addition to lhe huge capacity of raw information

storage, spccializedsoftware
forthesearchofthalinforma-

Theory of Operation
Information stored on a
CD·ROM can be loaded into
memory (RAM), displayed
and printed, as with other
media. While that data in
RAM may be altered and
storcd 10 a conventional magnetic di;k. the original informJtion o~ the CD-ROM is

Next comes /he fourth
•...... ",..5
A Long artie/e breaks to the nexlline without
running into the page number_ .. .. _ ...•. _ ... ",,_.6
Note that this TOC could have been generated
from the newsletter CHP file ... _
... 9

W

--'

To answer these questions. Acme Magazine recently COIl-

ducted il~ third annual compensation survey for software pro·
fessionals_ This newslellcr article presents the results of this
study and explores whalthe findings may mean to you
Acme Magazine asked Joe Smith, a compensation consulting specialist [or the software industry. LO design and eonduet
the survey. T wcmy·four positions, representing four programmer job families plus management, were included.
Data was collccted for base pay, bonl.lS and incentive payments, and whether nor not lncumbents received stock options
orotherformsofequity.
Questionnaires were sent to the data processing heads of
2,400 organizntions throughout the United States

~0 .

~

~

Body Text

~

II:

LL

CD·ROM Breaks New
G ro u nd
Compact Disk Read Only
MemorY (CD-ROM) IS a rapidly emerging new technol·
ogy for the retrieval of vast
amounts of information from
an optical disk, This new
peripheral device allows a totally new level of functionality in the use of

I~

~

~
~

~

~ !

_-------+--

c:

o

Caption . . . . . .

/lfanh,1Y87

--

Z_LABEL CAP
Z_FOOTER

o

N

~

APPENDIX L-STYLE SHEETS

STYLE SHEET: &NEWS-P2.STY
Description: Two column newsletter
Comment:
Frames placed on top of underlying page frame allow
multiple text files to be placed in document. Each frame can have its
own set of columns. Text flows from frame to frame. The order of flowing is determined by what order the frames were created.
Special Characteristic:

Menu:

Option:

Two 20.5-pica columns
with a I-pica gutter

Frame

Margins & Columns

First line of Body Text
indent of 1 pica

Paragraph

Alignment

Table of Contents frame has Frame
ruling box around and shaded
background

Ruling Box Around
Frame Background

Table of Contents entries
indented 1 pica from left
and right frame margin

Paragraph

Spacing

Paragraph

Alignment

TOC tab settings:
Tab l=right (19 picas)
leader=periods
Successive hyphens
in Body Text restricted to
2 in a row

Fl
F3
F5

F7

Deckhead
Bullet
TOC Entry

F9

REFERENCE GUIDE

Tags and Function Keys
F2
F4 Credo
F6
F8 Subhead
FI0 Body Text

L-21

w

o

l'!{i99~!)C!9!J5Jctr!~~1""4"'---+Detroit, MI9B987

142 Gur/rep Pkwy.

Headline
Byline

Software Salaries: How
do you stack up?

Data was collected for base pay.
bonus and incenuve payments. and
whclhcrnornotincumbentsrccelved
SlOCkoptionsorOlhcrfonnsofcquily.

hyJIlcSmith

processing heads of 2.400 organi7..a-

Qucstionnaircswcrcscntlothedata
(ionslllmllgllouttbeUnitedStatc.~.

How
slonal~

mu~b

your software profcs-

arc JI'lid

~~

a funcuon

or many

variahle's, and a ~ubjCl1 of mn~idcr.lble

zntcfl:stloyuurorganlf.:tuon.

~

I

=

\)

~

~
•
00

~

~I

~
~

W

.Subhead
E-4

~~~

C/)

W

....J

~

Jx
Ci

z

w

D..
D..

«

~

~

~

\)

-....
ai

c::I
~

~

E-4

Compact DISk Read Only Memory
(C[)"ROM) is a rapidly enlCfging new
technology for the retrieval of vast
amounts of lRformallon from an opU·
cal disk. ThIS new penpberal deVIce
allows a totally uew level of fune·
1I0nahtYlnthcuscofmicrocomputcrs.
Pbysically, the CD.ROM device
bas a lascrdlSk. drive (OI "playcrj tbc

microcompU1C(users-~tbatis,infor

mationn:u:-icwlofvcrylargercferencc
pubhcauons. Howpcoplereceiveand
use. informallon in tbe immediate and
1000gtcnn fUlure will be drnmatically
changed by CD-ROM.
In addition to the bugecapacilyof
raw information storage. ipOCialil.ed
sofLware forthescarcbofthalinforma·
tion is currently being intnxruced.
This software allows scan:bing Ihc information in areas, metbods and
speedsootpreviouslyfeasitlle.
It now becomes possible to
electronically publish reference
material more economically than to
print tIie same material in book form.
Thatcost benefit, coupled. with search
and retrieval software. make an
astouisbing price/pwfonnance ratio.

:5
w

C!l
C,.)

zw

ffi

IJ..

W

Body Text

a:

Z_CAPTION

OO~
~E-4~

I

C/)

Bu[v..t>a! causcsmanagcrlI 10 pay
one programmer more than another?

~~~
ot;!)oE-4
..
oo~oo
~ ~

Software salarv pay scales
Bccausc ofLhc dynamic grnwlh or
tile sortware mdUSIT)' over the last
decade, Ihe demand forc"pcricnccd,
qualificd programmersltasgrcatly increased,lhuskooingloaspiralingof
salanes.

CD-ROM BreaKS NeW
Ground

(413) 567-9888

Masthead
Credo
Address

Z_LABELCAP

FlgullIl

+

C.pL,,>nlnfonnau

o

m
JJ

L-24

REFERENCE GUIDE

APPENDIX L-STYLE SHEETS

STYLE SHEET: &PHON-P2.STY
Description: Two column portrait style for phone books or other
directories
Comment: The break and alignment settings in the Body Text and
Phone tags allow a directory to be created without tab settings.
However, dot leaders cannot be used. Text was automatically tagged
by database report generator. By making the company name a
separate tag from the phone number, the company name can
automatically be placed into the header.
Special Characteristic:

Menu:

Option:

Two 20.5 pica columns
with a l-pica gutter

Frame

Margins & Columns

"Live" header on odd and
even pages. First and last
occurrence of text tagged
with Body Text are placed
in the header.

Page

Headers & Footers

Ruling line below Header

Paragraph

Ruling Line Below

Body Text has line
break before, but not after

Paragraph

Breaks

Phone has line break after
and right alignment. This
makes the phone numbers
appear on the same line with
the company names.

Paragraph

Breaks
Alignment

Phone flush right
in column

Paragraph

Alignment

Fl
F3
F5
F7
F9

Phone

REFERENCE GUIDE

Tags and Function Keys
F2
F4
F6
F8
FlO Body Text

L-25

UJ
Cl

Name
Address
For Release

..

5

Ajax Corp.

(9

Leaders in Industrial f nnovation
123 Sapporro Road
[

..

.....

+-

P'I"V''''~.CA9027_4. . .~_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
(555)541-1234 ....

4

I

_

-

~

~

h

~

~g:

~I

~
w

w

~

~

a:

UJ

Contact

a:

Headline

-+-

waget supply mdustry, announced that it has shipped Its IOOOth Model 123-X enhanced Widget. ~......
The customer is ABC Inc. of Livonia Hills, ML

Body Text

UJ

LL

Datel ine ~I ws ANGELES, CA, July 17~XYZCorp.• thel~ading.manufacturerofwidgetsforthe aut~ated

:=

Phone

Z
UJ

UJ
Formoreinfi,ormation: ~...Mr Joe Flack
(212)555-12]2

XYZ COrp. Ships 1000th Product

o

()

~ FOR IMMEDIATE RELEASE

............-r-

~

Motto

Firstpar

"This is an imponant step for XYZ Corp., and the emerging widget industry," said Fred Smith,
~ president of XYZ Corp. "We have now shipped more widgets than the other ten companies combined. We believe our technology is second to none."
Marketing plans, availability, and pricing for Ihe new widget line will be announced later this fall.
XYZ Corp., Inc. was fanned in 1975. Headquaners are in Los Angeles California.

~~
E·d~

I

C/)

W

-1

~

C/)

Jx

Ci
z
w
c...
c...

«

~

~

~o

]
!+::
~

~

<0
C\J

...j

APPENDIX L-STYLE SHEETS

STYLE SHEET: &PREL·Pl.STY
Description: One column press release
Comment:

The letterhead is placed in a separate frame.

Special Characteristic:

Menu:

Option:

One 39-pica column

Frame

Margins & Columns

Contact is flush right

Paragraph

Alignment

Dateline has line break
Paragraph
before, but not after
(another tag can be placed on the same line)

Breaks

Firstpar has line break
after

Paragraph

Breaks

Firstpar is indented
relative to previous line

Paragraph

Alignment

The combination of Dateline and Firstpar attributes create an
automatic lead-in. The first paragraph is always placed exactly after
the Dateline, regardless ofthe Dateline length. Also, the Dateline is a
different font from Firstpar.

Fl
F3
F5
F7
F9

Headline
For Release
Firstpar

REFERENCE GUIDE

Tags and Function Keys
F2 Dateline
F4 Contact
F6
F8 Page Break
FlO Body Text

L-27

w

o
Title of Report

~

Z_HEADER

C}

Title

()

W

PROPOSAL TO ACME INSURANCE CORPORATION .......--1-

Head level 1

Body Text

•

I

Z

w
w

Corporate Training

T~h~'~Co~;~po~m~"~T~m~i"~i"~gd~'-PO-n-me~"~'h-",-'d~e~m~ifi-ed~'~"~Ob~je~CI~i'~eI-o-"d7e~si~g"~'~"d~re~w~~-'~o-o,-"

a:

900() pages of textual and ,graphic information which constitutes the company's training
documentation elements. In addition to redesigning this substantial amount of inform all on,
the department will also add new sections to the current tmining curriculum. The training
documentation is currently available in a variety of media, mostly on much copied papers.
Thedocumentation is ~omewhal outof date ,..,- - - - - - - - - - - - - ,
since the collection of materials dates back

LL.
W

a:

.~

Z_LABEL FIG
~

=
0

~

~,

E-t
~

~I

Acme Insurance staff to coordinate the

~
~

~

0

~

~

~

W

~

I

W

....J

>-

(/)

I

....J

x

(5

z

w

Cl..
Cl..

<

• FasllUm·around time without having to depend on another corporate department
to print documentation.

Bullet

~
~
E-t

~

0

as

!+=

....~
Q,)

E-i

• Ability to make immediate changes and update training modules.
• Ability to use already installed Personal CompUlers and Word Processing equipment in association with the new publishing equipment
• Ability to incorporate the new machinery directly into the day-to-day operations
of the department.

Head level 2

(/)

l-

7Fi;gc;;:":i,"i.,Ti'The",7, ;Pp;:;,, :;:'"i::'loc;'ii,h;:;,,;'jj,,:;:gc:::"-";;iiiliI.---.l-- Z _C APTI 0 N

processes of rewriting the documentationr·

Currently, there is an in-house printing and
type-setting shop. Because of delays and priorities, the training department does not have
ready access to this facility. Due to the size and nature oflhis project, a decision has been
made to evaluate departmental or work-group desk-top publishing solUlions specifically for
the training facility. Having an depanmenlaI facility for documentation will give the training operation the following benefits:

The TXN Solution
It is the recommendation of TXN Corporation that Acme Insurance consider the 3544
graphic workstation as the input terminal for the redesign/reformat processes in the training
facility. TXN was the first company to offer this unique type of workstation. In 1976, we
introduced the 9967 professional computer which had the power of combining textual and
graphic elements on the same screen. Now, ten years later, after many modifications and
refinements of our original technology, we are proud to introduce the 3544 Professional
Workstation for publishing applications .

Page 1

co
C\I

~

APPENDIX L-STYLE SHEETS

STYLE SHEET: &PRPT·Pl.STY
Description: One column proposal/report.
Comment:
Header and Footers are contained in chapter. Chapter
has different headers on left and right pages.
Special Characteristic:

Menu:

Option:

One 36-pica column

Frame

Margins & Columns

Horizontal padding of
3 points for caption
frame. This keeps the text
on the left ofthe frame from
touching the frame, yet the
right side of the frame snaps
to the right column guide.

Frame

Sizing & Scaling

Ruling line below Head
Levell

Paragraph

Ruling Line Below

Bullet items indented 3 picas Paragraph
in from left margin

Spacing

Extra space above and below Paragraph
Bullet items (gives the effect
of double spacing)

Spacing

Space between Body Text
Paragraph
paragraphs set with interparagraph space This lets
Head Levell be closer to
Body Text than Body Text
paragraphs are to each other.

Spacing

FI
F3
F5
F7
F9

Tags and Function Keys
F2 Head Levell
F4 Bullet
F6
F8 Page Break
Change Bar
FlO Body Text

Title
Head Level 2

REFERENCE GUIDE

L-29

-

ill

o
5

-

..

I-

~

Jx

E-t

C/')

0

z

ill

a..
a..

«

~

~U

as
!+=

....~
~

E--

Bullet
Z_FOOTER

• Fast turn-around time without
having to depend on another corporate department to pTlnt
documentation.

-+-......~TitleofReport

on the same screen. Now, ten years later,
afler many modifications and
1-1

g
~

APPENDIX L-STYLE SHEETS

STYLE SHEET: &PRPT-P2.STY
Description: Two column proposal/report.
Comment:
Header and footers are in chapter, not style sheet.
Ruling line around caption (store in chapter) has 3 points space above
the rule.
Special Characteristic:

Menu:

Option:

One IS-pica column, one
17-pica column with a
2-pica gutter

Frame

Margins & Columns

Ruling lines above and below Paragraph
Title

Ruling Line Above
Ruling Line Below

Paragraph

Alignment (column
wide)

Head Levell centered
in column

Bullet items indented 3 picas Paragraph
in from left margin

Spacing

Extra space above and below
Bullet items (gives the
effect of double spacing)

Paragraph

Spacing

Ruling line below footer

Paragraph

Ruling Line Below

Different font for generated
caption than for free-form
caption

Paragraph

Font

Fl
F3
F5
F7
F9

Tags and Function Keys
F2 Head Levell
F4 Bullet
F6
FS Page Break
Change Bar
FlO Body Text

Title
Head Level 2

REFERENCE GUIDE

L-31

APPENDIX L-STYLE SHEETS

CHAPTER:

&TBL-PI.CHP

Text file:

TABLE.TXT

0
0

-

OJ

0

(fj
><

3

( I)

:::T

I»

Q.

'<

Co

0

c.o

...

0
'<

:l

(I)

I»

Q.

C/I

OJ

oQ.
'<

(fj
><

L-32

REFERENCE GUIDE

APPENDIX L-STYLE SHEETS

STYLE SHEET: &TBL-Pl.STY
Description: One column table.
Comment:

Use for financial statements.

Special Characteristic:

Menu:

Option:

One 39-pica column

Frame

Margins & Columns

Ruling line below Column
Heads

Paragraph

Ruling Line Below

Body Text has fixed indent
of 3 picas from left margin

Paragraph

Alignment

Body Text and Total tabs:
Tab l=decimal (18 picas)
(has dot leader)
Tab 2 =decimal (35 picas)

Paragraph

Tab Setting

Column Heads tabs:
Tab l=center (14 picas)
Tab 2=center (30 picas)

Ruling lines above and below Paragraph
Total

Fl
F3
F5
F7
F9

Ruling Line Above
Ruling Line Below

Tags and Function Keys
Column Heads
F2
Category
F4
Total
F6
F8
FI0 Body Text

REFERENCE GUIDE

L-33

w

o
5

~

w

Title

()

I

•

z

w
a:
w
LL

Title of this table

Table header

~

HeaderlorTable

NexlColumn

First Entry

The second column describes some
featu res 01 the item called out In the Ii rsl
column. Notice thai the text for the
column is too wide to lit on one line
This type of style might be useful In a
comparison chart where flowing texl is

~

~

U

~

~I
Cit
~
(J)

IW
W

~

~

~

~o

Rule

W

Th;rdCol.

Pr;ce

The third column might
on Ihe second column
column just holds a number, such as
pnce

$456

$654

a:

used

Second model.

The next column

The second model compareS qUite
favorably to the firs! model descnbed
above. There's not as mUCh text here
though.

Entry #3

More descriptive text about entry number three. Irs called WYSIWYG. It
means that as you edit and modify,
your screen shows you exaclly what

Another column of text

..
you're going to get when you print it out.
No surprises. It's all Ihere in front of
~

~

$66

j

your eyes.

•

o

I

(J)

W

...J

~
X

Ci

z

w

c...
c...

«

~

riIi:I
~

~
u

-..
ai

CI:l
~

(jl

~

Col 1

Col 2

Col 3

Col 4

I~

APPENDIX L-STYLE SHEETS

STYLE SHEET: &TBL2-LI.STY
Description: One column table in landscape mode
Comment: This table style sheet uses tags to create vertical tabs.
The ruling lines below Table Header is part of its tag. The other
ruling lines are a separate tag attached to a paragraph with no text
in it.
Note: When adding text to vertical tab, you may have to push the
ESC key to get the page to reformat.
Special Characteristic:

Menu:

Option:

One 54-pica column

Frame

Margins & Columns

Title centered on page

Paragraph

Alignment

CoIl has line break before,
no line break after

Paragraph

Breaks

Col 2 has no line breaks

Paragraph

Breaks

Col 2 justified

Paragraph

Alignment

Col 2 indented 12 picas in
from left margin; 28picas
from right

Paragraph

Spacing

Col 3 has no line breaks

Paragraph

Breaks

Col 3 indented 30 picas in
from left margin; 10 picas
from right

Paragraph

Spacing

Col 4 has line break after
no line break before

Paragraph

Breaks

Col 4 flush right

Paragraph

Alignment

Col 4 indented 36 picas in
from left

Paragraph

Spacing

F1
F3
F5
F7
F9

Title
CoIl
Col3
Rule

REFERENCE GUIDE

Tags and Function Keys
F2 Table Header
F4 Col2
F6 Col4
F8
FlO Body Text
L-35

ill

o
5

CJ
ill

o
r;~~~~~.---

Chapter Head
Heading 1

PUBLI$HINGCHAPTER

Z

I

Z_HEADER

PUBLISHING CHAPTER

.

ill

a::

ill
LL

ill

a:

MENU COMMANDS
Most of Ventura Publisher's functions are controlled

Body Text
Heading 2

~I

0==

~

~I

~

==
0
~I
ill

~

~

--I

>f-

Cf)

Jx

0

z
a.
a.

ill

<:

-+--------••~

the order in which they appear on the screen. Use the
index for an alphabetical reference to these commands.

Menu Conventions
Often, a menu option will be shown in gray and cannol

~
U

cates these dependencies

Table Head 1

0

Q

=

--..

DESK

I

Publisher Info

Always available

4.----i--

....

Table 4

FILE

N,.

u

Must first Open chapter or load file
Always available
File name must be in title bar
Always available

Open.
Save
Save As

~
~

FILE MENU

J:

ill

through the menus at the top of the screen. This section

be highlighted. This usually indicates that the proper
function has not been selected. The table below indi-

ill
Cf)

I

-+---------I.~ ~~~~~~~i;~i~ ~~:~.t~;e~fee:~:~~~:~ep~~~ea~~~hi~

Description/Application

..

The File Menu controls information flow into and out of
Ventura Publisher.

~

r.1

~

~

0

-

Z_FOOTER

as
!+:
....~

CD

~

..J

~

C')

APPENDIX L-STYLE SHEETS

STYLE SHEET: &TCHD-Pl.STY
Description: One column in portrait mode
Comments: Use for technical documentation. This style sheet was
derived from the one used to format this reference guide. The equation on page 2 illustrates the use of centered tabs to create equations.
The text TECHDOC.TXT contains index references. Also, this style
sheet contains both index and table of contents tags. Therefore if you
generate either a table of contents or index, this style sheet will format them automatically. This is the most sophisticated style sheet in
the TYPESET directory.
Special Characteristic:

Menu:

Option:

One 27-pica column

Frame

Margins & Columns

Ruling line below header

Paragraph

Ruling Line Below

Ruling line above footer

Paragraph

Ruling Line Above

Chapter Head flush right
with ruling line below

Paragraph

Alignment
Ruling Line Below

18 points of space below
Chapter Head

Paragraph

Spacing

Heading 1 flush left with
ruling lines above and below

Paragraph

2 picas above and below
Heading 1

Paragraph

Alignment
Ruling Lines Above
Ruling Lines Below
Spacing

Body Text indented 7 picas
in from left margin

Paragraph

Spacing

Ruling line below Heading 2 Paragraph

Ruling Line Below

Ruling line above Table
Head 1

Paragraph

Ruling Line Above

List 1 indented 8 picas
in from left margin

Paragraph

Spacing

F1
F3
F5
F7
F9

Tags and Function Keys
Chapter Head
F2 Heading 1
Heading 2
F4 Computer Text
Key Note Text
F6 List 1
List 2
F8 Page Break
Table 1
F10 Body Text

REFERENCE GUIDE

L-37

w

o
5

<.')

Z_SEC 1

1.1 USER INTERFACE .........- - - - - - _ t _ Chapter Head
Major Heading

Z_SEC 2
Z_LABEL FIG

w
z

o

w
a:
w

LL
W

a:

Z_CAPTION

VcnlUrn Publisher is designed to provide What You See (on the screen) Is What You Get
printed (WYSIWYG). This means that the computer display should match as closely as

~

=
0

~

~I

0

0

~

~I
W

~

~

I

m

~~~~~'l~~aJ~~~~~~~:r~~;~~:~[p: ~np~gee~:~ ~~n;!:::a~! :U:b~:l~~::r::

~

~

lion of a prinu:r or typesetter, and because what IS displayed is shown in a diffcrcm aspect
ralio (height 10 width ratio), the space between words and between lines may appear 10 be

bigger or smaller than the printed page under certain cm:umstances. Several thin ruling
lines, with lit~e space between, may show on the screen as one thiCK line

--------------+--

Z_SEC 3 ""~------I.~B Keyboard Keys........

m

Jx

0

z
w
c...
c...

«

Minor Heading

Various keys on the keyboard perfonn special functions
• The keyboard Cursor keys conuol the Text Cursor (The text cursor is displayed
as a thin venical line.)
• The Home key goes to the first page of the document
• The End key goes to the last page of the document

"4"~------+-

Bullet

• The Pg Up key goes to the previous page.
• The Pg Dn key goes to the next page.

1.2. ITEM SELECTOR

.-J

>-

Body Text

particular. because the computerCRT screen cannot prodoce anywhere near the same resolu"

W

I-

........-+--

\0 prim a page on a laser printer or typesetter, do create some unavoidable differences. In

1.2.1

~

r.l

~ ....
~

as

a=

0

Description

The display shown in Figure 10-2 is called an Item Selector. The lrem Selector is used for
savmg and retrieving files

Z_FOOTER

'-A

WYSIWYG

~

ex:>

~

~

~

C')

APPENDIX L-STYLE SHEETS

STYLE SHEET: &TDOC·Pl.STY
Description: One column in portrait mode.
Comment:
Use for technical documentation. Note: the frame is
anchored below the first Major Heading. Also note, the text contains many index points. Show Tabs & Returns to see where they are.
Special Characteristic:

Menu:

Option:

One 39-pica column

Frame

Margins & Columns

Auto-numbering used for
Chapter Head, Major
Heading, Minor Heading

Page

Auto-Numbering

Generated tags for autonumbers have line break
before, and not after
(permits other tags
on same line)

Paragraph

Breaks

Chapter Head, Major
Heading, and Minor
Heading are indented
relative to previous line
plus 12 points

Paragraph

Alignment

Chapter Head, Major
Heading, and Minor
Heading have line break
after and not before

Paragraph

Breaks

Body Text, Table Head,
Table Item indented 9 picas

Paragraph

Spacing

Bullet, System Prompt
Paragraph
indented 11 picas in from left
margin. Each Bullet item
Paragraph
begins with •

Spacing
Special Effects

Ruling box around Warning

Ruling Box Around

F1
F3
F5
F7
F9

Paragraph

Tags and Function Keys
Chapter Head
F2 Major Heading
MinorHeading
F4 Warning
Table Head
F6 Table Item
System Prompt
F8 Page Break
Bullet
FlO Body Text

REFERENCE GUIDE

L-39

-

w

o
5

C)

w

()

z
w
ex:

Presentation Title

-

Presenter's Name
~
Presenter's Organization

Topic level 1

~

=
0

0

1""'4

..::l

•
~
~

EIw

~

~

~

~

~

I

en

Topic level 2
Topic level 3

~Main To~ic

a

w
w

LL.

Title

ex:

Presenter

is the Most Im~ortant
Use line breaks to add space vertically
Use the special function keys as you type to tag the
paragraphs you are typing
For instance, this paragraph was tagged by pressing
function key F5
Another subtopic
Still another subtopic

-

Another Main To~ic
SubtopiC
Subsubtopic
Subsubtopic
Subtopic

W

...J

>t-

J
x
0
Z

W
D..
D..

«

00

~
~
~

--=....

0

E-t

~

~
~

~

~
....J

APPENDIX L-STYLE SHEETS

STYLE SHEET: &VWGF-LI.STY
Description: One column in landscape modeo
Comment:

Use for horizontal viewgraphs

Special Characteristic:

Menu:

Option:

One 54-pica column

Frame

Margins & Columns

Title, Presenter centered

Paragraph

Alignment

Ruling line below
Topic Levell

Paragraph

Ruling Line Below

Topic Level 2 indented
6 picas in from left margin

Paragraph

Spacing

T0 ic Level 2 begins
wit bullet (.), followed by
Oo5-inch indent

Paragraph

Special Effects

Topic Level 3 indented
12 picas in from left margin

Paragraph

Spacing

Topic Level 3 begins
with and en dash (-)
followed by Oo5-inch indent

Paragraph

Special Effects

1

Fl
F3
F5
F7
F9

Topic Levell
Topic Level 3
Presenter

REFERENCE GUIDE

Tags and Function Keys
F2
F4 Table Item
F6 Title
F8
FlO Body Text

L-41

Presentation Title
Presenter's Name
Presenter's Organization

Topic level 1
Topic level 2
Topic level 3

~'

:=

u

...4

~

•

~

~

~I
w

~~

~

-

..

..

w
o
:5
(9
w

Title
Presenter

()

z

w
a:
w
u.
w
a:

..... Main To~ic is the Most Im~ortant

..

Use line breaks to add space vertically
Use the special function keys as you type
to tag the paragraphs you are typing
For instance, this paragraph was
tagged by pressing function key
F5
Another subtopic

~
~

~
~

5:

Z_LABEL CAP

This is a Diagram

I

C/)

Still another subtopic

W

-'

~

C/)

~

x
0
z
w
a..
a..

«

~
~

E-t

~

U

Another Main To~ic

-...
~

a=
~

Q,)

Eo!

Subtopic
Subsubtopic

~

~

APPENDIX L-STYLE SHEETS

STYLE SHEET: &VWGF·Pl.STY
Description: One column in portrait mode.
Comment:

Use for vertical viewgraphs.

Special Characteristic:

Menu:

Option:

One 39-pica column

Frame

Margins & Columns

Title, Presenter centered

Paragraph

Alignment

Ruling lines above and
below Topic Levell

Paragraph

Ruling Line Above
Ruling Line Below

Topic Level 2 indented
6 picas in from left margin

Paragraph

Spacing

T01.ic Level 2 befons
wit bullet (. ), fol owed by
O.5-inch indent

Paragraph

Special Effects

Topic Level 3 indented
12 picas in from left margin

Paragraph

Spacing

Topic Level 3 begins
with en dash (-) followed
by O.5-inch indent

Paragraph

Special Effects

Fl
F3
F5
F7
F9

Topic Levell
Topic Level 3
Presenter

REFERENCE GUIDE

Tags and Function Keys
F2
F4 Table Item
F6 Title
F8
FlO Body Text

L-43

APPENDIX L-STYLE SHEETS

This page intentionally left blank.

L-44

REFERENCE GUIDE

APPENDIXM
APPLICATIONS
This appendix gives step-by-step instructions for
using Xerox Ventura Publisher for the following applications:
Big First Character
Bullets
Columns
Coupons
Footnotes
Headers and Footers
Indents/Outdents
Leaders
Mixing Type Styles
Reverse Type/Shaded Type
Ruling Lines
Tables
Tabs
Before you use this section, you should complete the
exercises in the Training Guide so that you are
familiar with the basic concepts and usage of the
software.

REFERENCE GUIDE

M-1

Big First Character

APPENDIX M-APPLICATIONS

Big First Character
The text in the example box below explains big first characters.
ig first characters (also called dropped caps) are frequently
B used
to start the first word in a paragraph of a chapter, section
or article. With Xerox Ventura Publisher you can control the number oflines indented to allow for the large letter. You can also shift
the character up or down in the defined space. Directions for using
this feature are in the "Menu Commands" section of this manual.

t"

ou can create a reverse box for your Big First Character by
using a special combination of text-wide ruling lines and
reaks. Instructions are given below. Make sure your printer supports reverse type before trying this feature.

Creating a reversed big first character

M-2

~

Type the large letter and the text that will follow it. Make the large letter a separate
paragraph (i.e., the paragraph consists of just
one letter).

~

Create two new tags. Both should have the
same attributes initially. The Spacing for both
tags must remain identical even after you make
the following modifications ..

~

Select the Paragraph Tagging function and
select the paragraph for the big first character.

~

Select the Ruling Line Above option in the
Paragraph menu.

~

Select Text for the Width option.

~

Enter 2 fractional points for the Space Above
Rule 1. This controls the distance the black box
extends above the first line of text. You can adjust this after you're finished.

~

Enter a Height for Rule 1 that is about four
points smaller than the tag's point size. For example, create a 20 point rule for 24 point type.
REFERENCE GUIDE

Big First Character

REFERENCE GUIDE

APPENDIX M-APPLICATIONS
~

Enter a Space Below Rule 3 that is the sum of
the Space Above Rule 1 and the Height of Rule
1. For example, for the values given in the previous two steps, enter 22.

~

Select the - (minus sign) for the Space Below
Rule 3.

~

SelectOK

~

With the letter still selected, select the Special
Effects option in the Paragraph menu.

~

Select Custom and then select the Space For
Big First Character to the desired number of
lines.

~

Select the appropriate size and typeface and
then select White for color.

~

Select OK and then select OK again.

~

Select the tag for the text that will follow the
reversed letter.

~

Select the Alignment option in the Paragraph
menu.

~

Select Relative Indent Length of Previous Line.
Then enter an indent value of 2 to 3 fractional
points.

~

Enter a number to indicate how many lines
should be indented to allow for the reversed
box.

~

Select OK

~

With the paragraph text still highlighted, select
the Breaks option in the Paragraph menu.

~

Select After for the Line Break option.

~

SelectOK

~

Select the big first character and, if necessary,
set the break option to Line Break Before.

M-3

APPENDIX M-APPLICATIONS

Bullets

Bullets
The text in the example box below explains bullets.
•
•

The small black circle before this paragraph is traditionally
called a bullet. Bullets are used to draw attention to blocks of
text, for example, lists.
A bullet may be any character you wish. Some characters often
used for bullets include:
a hyphen
an asterisk or
> a caret, or other special symbol
You can easily set the indent spacing after the bullet at the
same time you define the bullet character. The indent space
must be defined to prevent the bullet and text from overlapping.
If you have a Postscript printer, you can define a square bullet
by using ASCII value 110 and a Dingbat font. However, if you
do not have a Postscript printer, you can create a square bullet
by using the custom rule above in the tag's paragraph settings.
The procedure for doing this is provided on the next page.

*

•

•

M-4

>

Select the Paragraph Tagging function and
highlight the paragraph which will begin with a
bullet.

>

Select Special Effects in the Paragraph menu.

>

Choose Bullet

>

Optional: Select Set Font Properties if the bullet will have a different type face, size, or style
than the rest of the paragraph. (All of the bullets in the example box are 14 point; the text is
10 point.)
Select the appropriate options.
Select OK
The Special Effects dialog box displays
again.

REFERENCE GUIDE

,4

~

Bullets

APPENDIX M-APPLICATIONS

•

Select one of the 13 characters for the Show
Bullet As option.

OR
Select Other, if you want to define a special
character which is not listed.
•

Enter the ASCII value for the bullet character. See Appendix E for a complete listing of
ASCII characters.

>-

Enter a value for the Indent After Bullet option
that defines the space between the bullet and
the text. A suggested value for the indent is an
em. This will be the same number as the point
size. For example, if the bullet is 12 point type,
enter 12 fractional points for the indent. If you
do not make an entry in this field, the text will
print on top ofthe bullet.

>-

Select OK

Note: If you want the bullet indented from the left
margin, use the In From Left setting in the Spacing
option from the Paragraph menu.

Defining a square bullet
If you have a Postscript printer, you can use the
steps above to define a bullet as ASCII character
110. Select a Dingbat font for the character.

If you do not have a Postscript printer, use the
steps below for a square bullet. (You may have to
experiment with the values given and make adjustments for your printer.)

>- Select the Paragraph for the bullet.

REFERENCE GUIDE

>-

Select the Ruling Line Above option
Paragraph menu.

>-

Select Custom for Width.

>-

Enter a value for the Space Above Rule 1 that
equals half of the size of the font used for the

In

the

M-5

APPENDIX M-APPLICATIONS

Bullets

tag. For example, enter 5 fractional points if the
text for the tag is 10 point type.

M-6

~

Enter the same number from the previous step
for the Height for Rule 1 option.

~

Enter a number that is the total of the numbers
entered in the previous two steps for the Space
Below Rule 3 option. For example, if you enter 5
for both the Space Above Rule 1 and the Height
of Rule 1, enter 10.

~

Select the - (minus sign) for the Space Below
Rule 3.

~

Enter a value for the Custom Width that equals
half of the size of the font used for the tag. For
example, enter 5 fractional points if the text for
the tag is 10 point type.

~

SelectOK

~

With the tag still selected, select the Alignment
option in the Paragraph menu.

~

Enter a value for the In/Outdent Width that
identifies how much space should be placed between the square bullet and the text.

~

Enter a very large value (for example, 100) for
the In/Outdent Height.

~

Select OK

REFERENCE GUIDE

Coupons

APPENDIX M-APPLICATIONS

Coupons
Coupons (or other special forms) can be created easily using the Box
Text feature in the Graphic Drawing function. Because the Box Text
frame can have a shaded background, it's easy to create special effects, as shown in the illustration below.
Use the other Graphic Drawing tools to add ruling lines, solid boxes or
additional finishing touches to your form .

...................................................... ..•..•....•••......
Don't delay. Return this coupon today!
Check the option you prefer:

Name

~

~~-------------------------------------------

Company

~__________~______________________________

Address ___~~__~__~____~__~__-'---~__~____~___
City _~____~_____________ State ______ Zip ___~___

...................................................... ......•............

REFERENCE GUIDE

~

~

Draw a brief sketch of the coupon or form you
want to create. Try to estimate the amount of
text that will be in each area.

~

Select the frame that will hold the coupon. This
can be a frame you have drawn especially for it
or the underlying page frame. If you draw the
coupon directly on the underlying page frame, it
will repeat on every page in the chapter.

~

Optional: If you want a broken line around the
entire coupon, select Ruling Box Around in the
Frame menu.
• Select Frame for Width.
M-7

APPENDIX M-APPLICATIONS

•

•
•

•

Coupons

Select Solid for Pattern.
Select Dashes Off (to turn Dashes On).
Enter a value for the Height of Rule 1.
A dashed line is shown in the Dialog Box.
Select OK

~

Optional: You may find it easier to work with
rulers on.
• Use Set Ruler in the Options menu to define
the horizontal and vertical ruler measurementunits.
• Select OK
• Select Show Rulers in the Options menu.

~

Select the Graphic Drawing function.

~

Select the Grid Setting option in the Graphic
menu.
• Select On for Grid Snap.
• Enter values for the horizontal and vertical
spacing. (If will draw a ruling line in a Box
Text frame, set the grid to correspond to the
point size of the type. For example, 12 fractional points for 12 point type.)
• Select OK

~

Select Box Text and begin drawing boxes at
each text location. Hold down the Shift key as
you draw to keep the function selected. (You can
also copy Box Text frames if you need multiple
frames of the same size.) If you were creating a
coupon similar to the one on the previous page,
your final form would look similar to the one
below.

I

Box Text

I

I Box Text I I Box Text I IBox Text I
Box Text
I

Box Text

I

Box Text
I
M-8

Box Text

I

REFERENCE GUIDE

APPENDIX M-APPLICATIONS

Coupons
~

When you have all of the Box Text frames
drawn, select the Text Editing function.

~

Delete the words BOX TEXT and enter the text
for the coupon.

~

Create new tags and change attributes as
needed.

~

Optional: If you need to add lines, use the Line
Drawing tool in the Graphic Drawing function.

~

Optional: If you want to add shading to any Box
Text frame, use the Fill Attributes option in the
Graphic menu. (You can also display this menu
by pressing Ctrl + F.)

~

Optional: Delete ruling lines around the Box
Text frames by using the Line Attributes option
in the Graphic menu. (Or, type Ctrl + L to display the menu.)

Saving and loading line and fill attributes
You can define default values for line and fill attributes. Once you define attributes for any of the
Graphic Drawing tools, an object created with that
tool has the assigned attributes. For example, if you
draw a line and select rounded ends in the Line Attributes menu, the next line you draw will also have
rounded ends.

REFERENCE GUIDE

~

Select a line or a graphic (including Box Text
frames) that will have the default values.

~

Display either the Fill Attributes or Line Attributes options from the Graphic menu.

~

Set the values you want.

~

Select Save To ...

~

SelectOK
All graphics of the same type you now create will
have the default attributes.

M-9

APPENDIX M-APPLICATIONS

Coupons

You can also apply stored default values to any
graphic which has already been created.

» Select the graphic which will also have the
default values.

» Select the Line Attributes or Fill Attributes option in the Graphic menu.

» Select the Load From... option.
» Select OK

Hints for graphics

M-10

•

If you have problems selecting an object created
with the Graphic Drawing tools, change to the
Frame Setting function and select the frame
that the graphics are tied to. Then, select the
Graphic Drawing function and select the object.

•

Sometimes it is easier to draw long ruling lines
with the line drawing tool using reduced view.

•

If you want to block text or background shading
from any area, draw a rectangle and choose
White for Background and Opaque for Result in
the Fill Attributes. The white boxes on top of
the shaded area in the example for this section
were created this way. This only works with
some printers. It does not, for instance, work
with any of the HP LaserJet printers.

REFERENCE GUIDE

Footnotes

APPENDIX M-APPLICATIONS

Footnotes
Footnotes are used in an article, paper or book to provide references to
other information. They are placed at the bottom of a specific page to
correspond to a reference number in the text. Footnotes can only be
added to text on the underlying page frame. They cannot be added to
text files in another frame or to box text.
You control whether the footnotes are numbered from the beginning
of a page or a chapter. The footnote number is automatically assigned
a Z_FNOT # tag and the reference is assigned a Z_FNOT ENTRY tag.
The attributes of these tags can be changed for different formatting effects.

An example offootnote usage is in the illustration box below.
Selected Data and Ratios
Average Common Shares Outstanding (in thousands)
Common Shareholders ~f Record at year-end
Employees at Year-End
Book Value per C2>mmon Share
Return on Assets 3
Return on ~quity
Total Debt to Total Capitalization 5

96,159
92,179
110,936
$45.54
10.6%
7.8%
33.2%

1

Excludes employees of discontinued
unconsolidated subsidiaries.

2

Calculated by dividing profits before federal and foreign
income taxes and outside shareholders' interests, from
continuing operations by average assets of continuing
operations.

3

Calculated by dividing income from continuing operations less
preferred stock dividends by average common and Class B
shareholders' equity.

4

Defined as the sum of notes payable, current portion of
long-term debt and long-term debt.

5

Defined as the sum of total debt, outside shareholder's
interests in equity of subsidiaries, and common and Class B
shareholders' equity.

REFERENCE GUIDE

operations

and

M-11

APPENDIX M-APPLICATIONS

Footnotes

Adding footnotes to a chapter
You can insert footnotes into text that has already
been typed and tagged or you can define the footnote settings and then create the text.
~

>

Select the Footnote Settings option in the Page
menu.

>

Select one of the options for Usage and Format
to indicate where the footnote numbering
should begin (on the page or from the beginning
of the chapter).

>

Optional: If you want the footnote number
shifted up from the text baseline, select Superscript for the Position of Number option.

OR
If you want the footnote number shifted down
from the text baseline, select Subscript for the
Position of Number option.

M-12

>

Optional: Enter a length for the line between
the footnotes and the document in the
Separator Line Width option. The length of the
line is measured from the left margin of the
page, although the line will not print in the
margin.
• Optional: Enter a value for the space above
the separator line (and below the text).
Enter a value for the width of the line in the
Height of Line option.
Select OK

>

Select the Text Editing mode and place the cursor at the position in the text where the footnote
number is to be inserted.

>

Select the Insert Footnote option in the Edit
menu.
A reference number appears to the left of the cursor. At the bottom of the page, the same reference
number appears followed by: TEXT OF FOOTNOTE.

REFERENCE GUIDE

~

APPENDIX M-APPLICATIONS

Footnotes

Note: If you have selected Show Tabs & Returns
in the Options menu, the footnote location will
also be marked in the text by a 0 symbol to left of
the footnote number. This symbol remains with
the text if you ever turn footnotes off.

» Move the text cursor to the footnote frame and
delete TEXT OF FOOTNOTE.

» Type the text for the footnote. The only limit on
footnote size is that the combined length of all
footnotes should not exceed one-half page.

Formatting footnotes
When you insert footnotes in a chapter, two tags,
Z_FNOT # and Z_FNOT Entry, are automatically
generated. These tags have Body Text attributes.
These tags can be changed just like any other tag
by using the Paragraph menu.

REFERENCE GUIDE

M-13

APPENDIX M-APPLICATIONS

Indents/Outdents

Indents/Outdents
The text in the example box below explains the different methods of
indenting text.

Indenting the first line of a paragraph is the most common
use of an indent. Paragraphs are not indented by using the
Tab key. Instead, you set the amount of the indent in the
Alignment option in the Paragraph menu. This paragraph has
a First Line Indent of 0.25 inches.

IYou

can also set an outdent with the Alignment option. An out-

~ent simply means that the beginning line or lines of a paragraph

are moved to the left of the margin of the frame or page. You
can define the number oflines a paragraph should be indented
or outdented. This paragraph has a First Line Outdent of 0.25
inches and an In/Out Height oftwo lines.
Sometimes you may want to create a
special effect by indenting text from
both margins. This is frequently used
in legal documents or for indicating a
long quote. These temporary margins
are set in the Spacing option in the
Paragraph Menu. This paragraph has
In From Left and In From Right both
set to 0.75 inches.
This paragraph has temporary
margins set in the Spacing option. It
also has a paragraph indent set in the
Alignment option.

Indent

M-14

Hanging indents are created as two separate
paragraphs. The technique is described on the
next page. In this example, the boldfaced word Indent at the beginning of the paragraph is actually
a separate paragraph.

REFERENCE GUIDE

Indents/Outdents

APPENDIX M-APPLICATIONS

Hanging indents
To create a hanging indent, follow these steps:
~

While in the Text Editing function, type the
part of the paragraph that is to be hanging in
the margin and press the Enter key. Then type
the rest of the paragraph.

~

Select the Paragraph Tagging function.

~

Select the first paragraph.

~

Select the Breaks option in the Paragraph
menu.
Select Before for the Line Break option.
• Select OK

~

Select the second paragraph.

~

Select the Spacing option in the Paragraph
menu.
• Enter a value for In From Left to separate
the second paragraph from the first. For example, 1.00 inches.
Select OK

~

Select the Breaks option in the Paragraph
menu.
• Select After for Line Break.
• Select OK

For information on how to create more complex
hanging indents, consult the Tables heading later
in this appendix. The vertical tabs described there
are really just another form of hanging indent.

REFERENCE GUIDE

M-15

APPENDIX M-APPLICATIONS

Leaders

Leaders
Leaders are commonly used in tables of contents and in programs.
Generally, the period is used for leaders; however, hyphens, underlines or other special characters may be selected. Leaders are defined
in the Tab Setting option in the Paragraph menu. You can define
leaders for any or all of the tag's tabs.
The example in the box below shows leaders used in a table of contents. (See Exercise 7 in the Training Guide for information on creating a table of contents.)

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Introduction ...................................................................................... .1
Setup and Installation ...................................................................... 7
User Interface ..................................................................................1 7

M-16

>

Select the Paragraph Tagging function.

>

Select the paragraph which will have the tabs
with leaders.

>

Select the Tab Settings option in Paragraph
menu.

>

Select 1 for Tab Number.

>

Select one of the alignment positions for Tab
Type.

>

Select Shown as Leader Char for Tab Display
option.

>

Enter the Tab Location as measured from the
left margin of the frame or column.

>

Select periods for the Leader Character.

REFERENCE GUIDE

I

Leaders

APPENDIX M-APPLICATIONS

•

Optional: Select Leader Spacing (1,2, etc.) to increase the space between leaders. (No space
was added to the example in the box.)

~

SelectOK
Leaders are active for each tab in the tag

Deleting leaders from tabs
Sometimes you may have multiple tabs set for a tag
and just need leaders in one of them. When this
happens,
~

Select the tab in the tag which should not have
leaders.

~

Select Shown As Open Space for the Tab Display option.

~

Repeat for each tab which should not have
leaders.

~

SelectOK

Note: There is more information on leaders in the
"Tabs" section of this Appendix.

REFERENCE GUIDE

M-17

Mixing Type Styles

APPENDIX M-APPLICATIONS

Mixing Type Styles
There are several methods for mixing type styles and sizes on a page.
For example, if you want your paragraph lead-in (first sentence) to be
in larger type, as shown in the example box below, you would create a
different tag for it. This tag would have a Break Before. The tag for
the remainder of the paragraph would have a Break After and would
be indented relative to the previous line.
Normally you set font type for an entire tag. However, to add special
emphasis you may want to have individual words in a different font.
You can use the Set Font button to change text attributes while in
Text Editing mode. The word "INTERNATIONAL" in the company
name in the example below was done this way.
You can also use the list of text attributes in the Assignment List to
change the appearance of a specified word(s) by bolding, underlining
or using another text attribute. (If you want to add the codes for these
attributes while creating the document in your wordprocessor, see AppendixD.)
the

INTERNATIONAL company

123 Main Street

Dallas, Texas 75201

214/555-9080

Dear Ms. Jones:

You may already be a winner! That's right. We've al-

ready selected prize winners living in your zip code and you could
be among them. This year we will award our largest sweepstakes
prize ever.

The grand prize is $500,000 a year for the rest of your life! Just
think what that means. No money worries ever again.
To find out if you're a winner, just return the card in the envelope
provided. We'll announce the prize winners soon.
Don't delay. Reply today.
Sincerely,

J. Ross, President

M-18

REFERENCE GUIDE

APPENDIX M-APPLICATIONS

Mixing Type Styles

Creating a lead-in
~

Select the Paragraph Tagging function.

~

Select the text for the lead-in.

~

Select the Paragraph menu.

~

Change the lead-in attributes to:
Font
As desired
Line Break
Before

~

Now select the paragraph which follows the
lead-in and change its attributes to:
Font
As desired
Alignment
First Line Indent
Indent width=em
Relative Indent=Length
of Previous Line
Line Break
After

~

Optional: If the lead-in will be more than one
line in length, make the following change to the
paragraph following it:
Breaks
Next Y Position=
Beside Last Line ofPrev.
Para

Using Set Font to change text

REFERENCE GUIDE

~

Select the Text Editing mode.

~

Select the text to be changed.

~

Select the Set Font button.
The Font Setting dialog box displays.

~

Select the appropriate options.

~

SelectOK

M·19

Mixing Type Styles

APPENDIX M-APPLICATIONS

Using the Assignment List to change text
~

Select the Text Editing mode.
The Assignment List shows the following attributes:
Normal (cancels any changes made by selecting one of the other options, except case conversions, and returns text to whatever attributes are specified in the paragraph tag)
Bold
.
Italic
Small (reduces the type size in proportion to
its original size)
Superscript
Subscript
Underline
Double Underline (UndrLn)
Strike-thru
Overscore
Upper Case (changes all letters to capitals)
Capitalize (starts each word with a capital)
LowerCase

M-20

~

Select the text you want to change.

~

Select one of the options.

. , t.

~

REFERENcE GUIDE

Reverse Type/Shaded Type

APPENDIX M-APPLICATIONS

Reverse Type/Shaded Type
Reverse type is white letters printed on a black background. Check
Appendix F to see if your printer supports this style of printing. The
example below shows reverse type.

REVERSE TYPE
Shaded, or screened, type is black letters printed on a gray background. The example below shows shaded type.

~

Select the Paragraph Tagging function.

~

Select the paragraph that will print in reverse
or shaded type.

~

Select the Font option in the Paragraph menu.

~

Select the correct point size.

~

Select White for Color for reverse type.

OR
Make sure Black is selected for Color for shaded
type.

If you selected White for reverse type, a black bar
indicates the position of the paragraph. The text
cannot be read since the letters and background
are both white.

REFERENCE GUIDE

~

SelectOK

~

With the paragraph still selected, choose Ruling
Line Above option in the Paragraph menu.

~

Select one of the Width options.

M-21

Reverse Type/Shaded Type

APPENDIX M-APPLICATIONS

>

Select Solid for Pattern for reverse type.
OR

Select one of the numbered Pattern options for
shaded type.

The Pattern selected displays in the dialog box.

> Enter a Height for Rule 1 that is larger than
the tag's point size. For example, create a 36
point rule for 24 point type (shown in the
reverse type example) or a 24 point rule for 18
point type (shown in the shaded type example).
This will result in the thick, black rule being
placed above the text.

>

Select the - (minus sign) for Space Below Rule 3
option. (Remember that this measurement represents the space below the last ruling line, not
just the third line.) Choosing this option will
subtract space, so that the ruling line is moved
down, on top ofthe text.

>

Calculate the distance the ruling line should be
shifted in order to center the text within the (
ruling line.
Add the ruling line height and the type
point size.
• Divide the total by 2.
Example:
36 = points in ruling line height
+
24 = type pOint size
=
60
+

~

30

OR
+

>

M·22

24 = points in ruling line height
18 = type point size
42

-'-

~

=

21

Enter the distance calculated in the step above
(e.g., 30 or 21) for the value in the Space Below
Rule 3 option. Select OK

REFERENCE GUIDE

Tables

APPENDIX M-APPLICATIONS

Tables
Tabs can be used to place single lines of text in a table. However, often
text must flow freely within a column, as shown in the example box
below. This kind offormat requires a vertical tab.
A vertical tab is not a column, but an effect created with tags. The
columnar effect is created by using In From Left and In From Right
margins and (line) Breaks. To add additional space between blocks of
text in one column, use a line break (Ctrl + Enter) rather than a
return.
For information on setting statistical tabs, see the section on "Tabs" in
this Appendix.

Position

Depart.

Duties

Grade

Technical
Writer

DoclEd

Prepares instructional
material for customer
use; edits technical
material for in-house
training courses.

10

Secretary

Accounting

Prepares correspondence for department
manager and staff; researches and completes
monthly activity report
for on-going projects.

5

Sometimes you may want to create a table consisting of single lines
which should be boxed. This effect also created using vertical tabs
that have a ruling box around.

Position
Writer
Grade level 1
Secretary
Clerk II

REFERENCE GUIDE

Department
DoclEd

Reports To
Jane Jones

Grade
10

Accounting
Personnel

Bob King
David Smith

5
3

M-23

APPENDIX M-APPLICATfONS

Tables

Typing text for vertical tabs
> Type all the text for the table using your word
processor or the Text Editing function. Type
each block of text as a separate paragraph.
Type the paragraphs in the order they will appear, reading across. For examfle, for the illustration above, type "Technic a Writer", then
type "Doc/Ed".

>

Use a line break (Ctrl + Enter) to add space between lines. Do not use the Return key.

Creating tags for vertical tabs
Each column is tagged with its own separate tag. In
the example on the previous page, you sill need four
tags.
You use a special combination of In from Left and
In from Right settings (Spacing option) and Breaks
to define vertical tabs. The settings (in inches) for
the multi-line table in the example box on the previous page are:
In from Left o
In from Right 3.50
Line BreakBefore
Column 2
In from Left 1.00
(Depart.)
In from Right 2.50
Line BreakNo
In from Left 2.00
Column 3
(Duties)
In from Right 0.75
Line BreakNo
In from Left Column 4
3.75
(Grade)
In from Righto
Line BreakMter
The settings for the single line table in the example
are:
In from Left Column 1
o
(Position)
In from Right 3.40
Line BreakBefore

Column 1
(Position)

M-24

REFERENCE GUIDE

Tables

APPENDIX M-APPLICATIONS

Column 2
(Depart.)

In from Left In from RightLine BreakIn from Left Column 3
(Reports To) In from RightLine BreakColumn 4
In from Left (Grade)
In from Right Line Break-

1.25
2.15
No
2.50
0.75
No
3.90

o

After

The first column

>-

Select the Paragraph Tagging function.

>-

Select the text for the first vertical tab.

>-

Select the Spacing option in the Paragraph
menu.
• Define In from Left as 0 (unless it should
align with other text that is indented. Then,
use the same measurement for the indent).
• Enter a value for In from Right that sets
the right-hand margin of the first column.
• Select OK

>-

Select the Breaks option in the Paragraph
menu.
Select Before for Line Break.
• Select No for Allow Within
Select Yes for Keep With Next
Select OK

The middle columns

REFERENCE GUIDE

>-

Select the text for the second vertical tab.

>-

Select the Spacing option in the Paragraph
menu.
• Enter a value for In from Left that identifies the left-hand margin of the column.
Make sure that this value allows for the
second column to begin past the point where
the first column ends.
• Enter a value for In from Right that identifies the right-hand margin of the column.
• Select No for Allow Within
Select Yes for Keep With Next
• Select OK
M-25

APPENDIX M-APPLICATIONS

>

Tables

Select the Breaks option in the Paragraph
menu.
Select No for Line Break.
• Select No for Allow Within
• Select Yes for Keep With Next
• Select OK

> Repeat these steps for any columns located between the first and last columns.

The last column

>

Select the text for the last column.

>

Select the Spacing option in the Paragraph
menu.
Enter a value for In from Left that identifies the left-hand margin of the column.
• Define In from Right as o.
• Select OK

>

Select the Breaks option in the Paragraph
menu.
• Select Mter for Line Break.
• Select No for Allow Within
• Select Yes for Keep With Next
• Select OK

Placing boxes around vertical tabs

M-26

>

Select the Paragraph Tagging function.

>

Select the first vertical tab which you defined
according to the steps listed above.

>

Select the Ruling Box Around option in the
Paragraph menu.

>

Select Margin for Width.

>

Enter a value for the Height of Rule 1. This
should be narrow since it will overlap lines from
other tabs. For example, enter .002 inches.

>

Select OK
REFERENCE GUIDE

Tables

APPENDIX M-APPLICATIONS
~

Repeat defining a ruling box around for each
vertical tab in the table.

~

Optional: Select the Spacing option in the
Paragraph menu for each vertical tab and
delete any extra space being added above or
below the tag.

Using Box Text for tables
You can also use Box Text to create multi-line
columnar formats. Simply draw Box Text frames at
each location where text will be placed. See the section on "Coupons" in this appendix for information
on how to use this feature.

REFERENCE GUIDE

M-27

Tabs

APPENDIX M-APPLICATIONS

Tabs
Tabs can be used for simple tables in which the entries do not exceed
one line in each column. For multiple line columns, see the section on
"Tables" in this Appendix. The text in the example box shows simple
columns set using tabs.

METROPOLITAN HOME PRICES

Metro Area

1986

Boston ........................ $156,200
Chicago ........................... 84,700
Dallas ............................. 93,600
Denver ............................ 86,200
Houston .......................... 72,000
Los Angeles .................. 128,700
Memphis ........................ 71 ,300
Metro NYC ................... 160,000
Phoenix .......................... 78,800
Portland ......................... 63,400

1985

% Change

19.2%
3.5
7.5
3.0
-5.5
10.1
11.8
22.7
6.6
4.6

$131,000
81,800
87,100
83,700
76,200
116,900
63,800
130,400
73,900
60,600

Setting tabs
You may need to define different tab settings for the
heading line. For example in the illustration above,
the tabs (in inches) for the heading line are:
Tab 1 = 1.75 (centered)
Tab 2 = 3.00 (centered)
Tab 3 = 4.00 (centered)
The tabs for the listing itself are:
Tab 1 = 2.00 (right)
Tab 2 = 3.25 (right)
Tab 3 = 4.00 (decimal)

M-28

>

Select the Paragraph Tagging function.

>

Select the Paragraph which will contain tabs.
REFERENCE GUIDE

I

Tabs

APPENDIX M-APPLICATIONS
~

Select the Spacing option in the Paragraph
menu and make sure that Alignment is not set
for Justified.

~

Select Show Rulers in the Options menu.

~

Select the Tab Settings option in the Paragraph
menu.

~

With Tab 1 selected for Tab Number, select Tab
Type.
Left tabs start at the Tab Location
Center tabs are centered around the Tab
Location.
Right tabs end at the Tab Location.
Decimal tabs place the decimal at the Tab
Location.

~

Enter a value for the tab location measured
from the left margin of the current column.

~

Continue selecting Tab Numbers and defining
locations until all tabs are defined.

~

Select OK.

Adding leaders to all tabs
Frequently you can make tabbed material easier to
read by using leaders. Leaders are usually a line of
periods which connect columns of text. (Refer to the
"Leaders" section in this Appendix for more information.)

REFERENCE GUIDE

~

Define each tab location using the steps in "Settingtabs".

~

Select Shown As Leader for Tab Display option
for any tab which has been defined.

~

Select the periods as the Leader Character.
Leaders are active all of the defined tabs in the
paragraph.

~

SelectOK

M-29

APPENDIX M-APPLICATIONS

Tabs

Turning off leaders in specific tabs
The example in the illustration box has leaders in
the first tab only.
~

Define each tab location using the steps on the
previous page.

~

Select the Tab which will have leaders.

~

Select Shown As Leader Char for the Tab Display option.

~

Select the periods as the Leader Character.

~

Select Shown As Open Space for the Tab Display option for other tabs in the tag. These tabs
will not have leaders.

Setting tabs for mixed units
Sometimes you may have different units appearing
in tabbed material. For example, you may want to
have a special symbol following a tab, as shown in
the example below:
Common share market value
Return on Assets

$59.75
10.6%

~

Set a right tab for the number.

~

Set a left tab at the same location. In the example above this tab would be used for the percent sign.

Comments
When you are entering text with your word processor that will be formatted into tabs in Xerox Ventura Publisher, insert only one tab character beM-30

REFERENCE GUIDE

Tabs

APPENDIX M-APPLICATIONS

tween columns. Do not try to align the tabs in the
word processor; align the tabs in Xerox Ventura
Publisher.
Also, many word processors insert spaces instead of
a true tab code. Refer to Appendix D for more information.

REFERENCE GUIDE

M-31

APPENDIX M-APPLICATIONS

Tabs

This page intentionally left blank.

M-32

REFERENCE GUIDE

INDEX
A
Abandon, 5-12
Abort
Go to page, 3-3, 5-76
Installation, A-4
Print, 3-3
Add new frame, 4-3
Keep enabled, 3-3
Add new tag, 4-14
Adding non-keyboard characters, 4-25
Alignment, 5-108 - 5-11 0
Example, frame wide, L-7, L-19
See also Set rulers
Alt key, 3-3
Anchors & captions, 5-92 - 5-95
Apple LaserWriter
See LaserWriter
Arabic numbering
Defined, 5-50
Arrow keys
See Cursor keys, 3-3
Art
See Pictures
Ascender, 1-1
ASCII text, D-11
Characters not used, D-12
Defined,I-1
From mainframes, D-12
Aspect ratio, 3-19
Assign function keys, 4-22,
5-136 - 5-137
Assignment list, 3-17
Defined, 3-17, 1-1
Tag names in capitals, 6-16
Using to change text
attributes, M-20
AST ThrboLaser, F -24 - F -26
Fonts, F-24
Images, number/page, F-25
New fonts for, K-12 - K-13
Print to fIle, F-25

REFERENCE GUIDE

Attribute
Defined,I-1
See also Text attributes
Auto adjust styles, 5-107, 5-151
Auto-numbering, 5-54 - 5-60
Example, L-39
See also Section numbering
AutoCAD, G-1
Creating slide files, G-1
DXF files, G-1
Slide files, G-1

B
Backspace key, 3-3, 4-20
Backup fIles, 5-10
Bad break
See Widow
Baseline, 1-1
Baud rate on PostScript printer, F-19
Beep
What it means, 3-6, 3-12
Beginning the program, 2-7
Big first character, 5-123 - 5-124,
M-2 - M-3
Example, L-7
Reversed, M-2
Binding margins, 5-80
Defined,I-1
Blowup
See Sizing & scaling
Body text, 5-104
Cannot remove, 6-16
Defined,I-1
Body type
See Body text
Bold
See Text attributes
Borders
See Ruling box around
See Ruling line abovelbelow

Index-1

INDEX

Box
See Ruling box around
See Ruling line abovelbelow
Box text, 4-32, M-27
Compared to frames, C-4
Using for coupons, M-7
Breaks, 5-117 - 5-119
Defined,1-2
Example, L-9, L-15, L-17,
L-25, L-27, L-35
Vertical tabs, 6-18
Bring to front, 5-140
Broadsheet, 5-21
Bullet, 5-123 - 5-124, M-4 - M-6
Example, L-5, L-7, L-29,
L-31, L-39
See also Special effects
Square, M-5
Button on mouse
See Mouse

c
Cabling
Printer, F-19
CAD conversion, G-1
Callouts, 4-32 - 4-33
Camera guides, 5-21
Cancel a menu, 3-8
CAP files, 5-10 - 5-11
Capitalize, 4-17
Change capitals to lower
case letters, M-20
First letter of each word, M-20
Make all letters in a
word capitals, M-20
Caps Lock, 4-20
Caption files, 4-19, 5-94
Captions
Adding to pictures, 5-92 - 5-95
Auto-numbering for, 5-93,
5-96 - 5-97
Caption margins, 5-80
Converting to text file, 5-41
Example, L-23
Figure counter, 5-96 - 5-97

Index-2

C

Placing both on same line, 5-94
Table counter, 5-96 - 5-97
Tags, 5-94, 6-16
Carriage return
See Enter
Center
See Alignment
Center text
See Alignment, 5-108
Centimeter, 3-9
CGM, 5-16, G-1
Change bar
Example, L-5, L-7
Change bars, 5-132
Chapter
Continue page numbers across
multiple, 5-52
Defined,1-2
Chapter counter, 5-50 - 5-51
Chapter files
Combining into publications, 5-172
Difference from text file, 4-22
Printing, 5-19 - 5-21, 5-174
See files associated with, 5-173
Character formatting
See Style sheet
Character set, E-1
Character space
Changing, 4-19
Characters
See Alt key
See Fonts
See Foreign character
Hidden, 5-167
CHP extension, 5-8
CIF files, 5-10 - 5-11
Clear menu, 3-14
Clipboard
Defined,I-2
Frame, 5-29
Graphic, 5-30
Text, 5-28
Close chapter
See Quit, 5-24
Color, 3-19, D-6
Color separations, 6-18
Column balance, 5-84
Columns don't balance exactly, 5-84
Column break, 5-117 - 5-119
REFERENCE GUIDE

D

Colwnn guides, 5-165
Underlying page used as grid, 6-2
Colwnn snap, 5-168
Colwnns
Aligning text within, 5-168
Changing to equal width, 5-79
Changing to unequal
column width, 5-79
Different left/right page, 5-80
Example, unequal, L-31
Margin & column
option, 5-78 - 5-81
See also Margins & Columns
More than eight, 5-91
Rules, 5-98
Vertical tabs, 6-17
CONFIG.SYS, 2-6
Contents of Ventura Publisher, 1-2
Conversion
DXF to GEM, G-l
Text to PCX, G-5
Copy, 5-26 - 5-30
Chapter, C-l, 5-179
Frame, 5-29
Graphic, 5-30
Publication, 5-179
Text, 5-27
Text attributes, 5-28
Copy-fitting, 6-8
Copyright symbol, 4-25
See Keyboard keys
Cordata printer, F -24 - F -26
Fonts, F-24
Images, nwnber/page, F-25
New fonts for, K-12 - K-13
Print to file, F -25
Coupons, M-7 - M-I0
Creating new tags, 4-14
Crop, 5-85
Defined,I-2
See Sizing & scaling
Crop marks, 5-21, 1-2
Crosshairs, 5-153
Ctrl key, 3-4
Current Selection Indicator, 4-6, 4-20
Cursor
Mouse, 1-5,3-1
Text, 1-5
Cursor keys, 3-3
REFERENCE GUIDE

INDEX

Cut, 5-26 - 5-30
Text attributes, 5-28
Cut/copy/paste, 5-26 - 5-30
Cutlines
See Callouts, 4-32

D
Database publishing, H-l
Example, L-25
Dataproducts
LZR 2660, F-18 - F-23
LZR 2665, F-18 - F-23
Dbase III, D-l, D-13, H-l
DCA, D-14
DEC Print Server 40, F-18 - F-23
Default settings, 5-24
Definition, I-I
Arabic numbering, 5-50
Assignment list, 3-17
Images, 1-5, 4-5
Line art, 1-4, 4-5
Line break, 4-23
Mouse cursor, 1-5
Orphan, 5-48
Pictures, 4-5
Tag, 5-104
Text, 1-4
Text cursor, 1-5
Typographic conventions, 1-4 -1-6
Widow, 5-48
Delete
Character, 4-19
Directory, 5-22 - 5-23
Extra carriage returns, D-ll
Files, 5-22
Frame, 5-28
Graphic, 5-29
Page, 5-73 - 5-74
Repeating frame, 5-90
Text, 4-20, 5-27
Delete key, 3-3
Desk menu, 5-5
Dialog box
Defined,I-2
Erase line oftext, 3-8
Use of, 3-7 - 3-9
Index-3

E

INDEX

Dictionary
See Hyphenation dictionary
Direction keys
See Keyboard keys
Directory
Changing, 3-12
. Creating new, 5-23
Delete, 5-22 - 5-23
Make new, 5-22
See also Subdirectory
Discretionary hyphen, 3-6, D-9
Defined,I-2
Disk drives
Changing, 3-12
Disk full, 5-22
Displaywrite, D-14
Document
See Chapter
Documentation
How to use, 1-1
DOS COPY command, C-l
DOS file operations, 5-22 - 5-23
DOS version, 2-4
Dot leader
See Tabs
Dot leaders
See Leaders
Dot matrix printers, F-17
Fonts, F-18
Paper size, F -17
Resolution, F-17
Double spaces
Eliminating, 5-15
Double underline, 4-17
Change defaults, 5-125
Drawing
See Graphic drawing function
See Graphics
Drives
Changing the active, 3-12
Dropped capital, 5-123 - 5-124
M-2 -M-3
'
Duplex printing, 5-20
DXF file, G-l

Index-4

E
Edit menu, 5-25 - 5-41
Editing
See Graphic drawing function
See Text editing
Editing text to fit
See Copy-fitting, 6-8
Em dash, 3-6, 4-25, 6-11, 1-3
Em space, 3-6, D-I0, 1-3
EN dash, 3-6, 1-3
En space, 3-6, D-I0, 1-3
End key, 3-3
End of file symbol, 5-167
End session
See Quit, 5-24
Enlarging a picture
See Sizing & scaling
Enter key, 1-4, 3-8, 4-22
Epson LQ 1500, F-17
Epson MXIFXIRX-880, F-17
Equations, 5-122
Erase
See Backspace key
See Delete
Error messages, C-6
Escape (ESC) key, 3-3, 3-8
Exit
See Quit, 5-24
Expanding font files, A-12
Extension
Default names, 3-12
Defined,I-3

F
Features
List, 1-3
Figure counter, 5-29
Example, L-19
Figure space, 3-6, D-I0 1-3
File
'
Creating new text, 4-21
Defined,I-3
Delete, 5-22
Filters, changing, 3-11
REFERENCE GUIDE

F

Graphics files created, 5-15
Name conventions, 3-12
Print to file, C-1, 5-155
Removing, 4-7, 5-38 - 5-39
Removing excess, 5-39
Renaming, 5-40 - 5-41
Within chapter, 5-173
Write protected, 5-23
File menu, 5-6 - 5-24
File type/rename, 5-40 - 5-41
Files
Backup, 5-10
CAP, 5-10 - 5-11
CIF, 5-10 - 5-11
VGR, 5-10 - 5-11
Fill attributes, 4-30, 5-143 - 5-144
Filter
Defined, 1-3
First line indent, 5-109
Floppy disks
Don't read directly, 3-12
Font Metric
Defined, 1-4
Fonts, 5-106 - 5-107
Adding new, C-1, 5-160 - 5-162, K-1
AST 'furboLaser, F-24, K-12 - K-13
Changing, D-6, 4-18
Character set, E-1
Cordata, F-24, K-12 - K-13
Defined,I-4
Definition, K-1
Disable downloading, 5-162
Dot matrix printer, F-18
HP LaserJet, F-12, K-6 - K-8
Installing new, 5-159
Interpress, F-18
JLaser, F-16, K-12 - K-13
Modifying automatic kerning, K-22
Paragraph tag
doesn't change, 5-107
PostScript, F-18, K-14
Printing, won't print font, 5-107
Screen fonts, K-3 - K-4
Selected text, 4-17
Size limitations, 5-107
VFM file format, K-18 - K-21
Width tables, 5-157
Wrong size in line art, F-1
Xerox 4020, F-9
REFERENCE GUIDE

INDEX

Xerox 4045, F-6, K-9 - K-ll
Footer
Defined, 1-4
See also Headers & Footers
Footnotes, 5-70 - 5-72, M-11 - M-13
Adding to a chapter, M-12
Changing placement, 5-72
Copying/moving, 5-28
Defined, 1-4
Deleting, 5-31
Editing, 5-31
Example, L-5
Formatting, M-13
Inserting, D-10, 5-31
Length limitation, 5-31
Margins & Columns, 5-81
'fum on/off, 5-31
Foreign characters, D-3, 4-25
Foreign language
Hyphenation, B-2
Format
See Style sheet
See Tag
Forms, 4-33
See Coupons
Formulas, 5-122
Mathematical, 4-26
Frame setting
function, 3-17, 4-2 - 4-11
Frames
Adding, 4-3
Anchoring, D-10, 5-36 - 5-37
Background, 5-102 - 5-103, L-21
Captions, 5-94
Changing size, 4-7
Column snap, 5-168
Creating multiple, 4-4, 5-38, 6-6
Cut, copy, paste, 5-28
Defined, 4-2 - 4-11, 1-4
Delete, 5-28
Example, anchored, L-39
Example, padding, L-29
Gray selection lines, 5-89
Line snap, 5-169
Margins, 5-166
Menu, 5-77 - 5-103
Moving, 4-7
Placement, 5-83, 6-7
Placing files in, 4-5
Index-5

G

INDEX

Re-anchor, 5-62 - 5-63
Removing file from, 4-7, 5-38
Repeating, 5-88 - 5-91
Ruling lines around, 5-100 - 5-101
Selecting multiple, 4-9, 6-7
Selecting underneath, 6-6
Selection borders, 6-7
Sizing & Scaling, 5-82 - 5-87
Text fit, 6-8
Text flow around, 5-82
Text in, 6-1 - 6-2
Too complex to format, 5-91, H-5
Underlying page, 5-77
Word wrap around, D-5
Full box, 3-15
Function keys
Assigning, 5-136 - 5-137
See also Assign function keys, 4-22,
5-136 - 5-137
Function Selector, 4-1 - 4-36

Line attributes, 4-30
Load from, 5-142
Overview, 4-28
PostScript, 5-16
Repeating, 4-28
Save attributes, 5-142 - 5-143
Saving/loading line and fill
attributes, M-9
Select all, 5-145
Selecting graphic on bottom, 4-32
Graphs
See Graphics
See Pictures
Greeking, 5-42, 5-149
Defined,I-4
Grid settings, 4-29, 5-146
Gutter
See Columns
Gutter rule
See Vertical rules

G

H

Gl characters
See Foreign characters
GEMPRINT.SYS, F-2
Generated numbers
See Auto-numbering
See Section numbering
Generated tags, 5-148, 6-16
Z]NOT # and Z_FNOT ENTRY,

Hanging indent, 1-6, M-14
See also Outdent
Hard disk
Space requirement, 2-3
Space taken on, A-2
Head margin
See Spacing
Headers & Footers, 5-64 - 5-68
Example, generated, L-25
Example, generated phone
list, L-15
Generated, 5-66
Large, 5-91
Margins & Columns, 5-80
Multi-column, 5-91
Tags, 6-16
Turn on/off, 5-69
Help
See Appendix C
See relevant topic in index
Hidden text, D-I0
Hide column guides, 5-165
Hide pictures, 5-166
Hide rulers, 5-164

M-ll
Glossary, 1-1
Go to page, 5-75 - 5-76
Keyboard shortcuts, 5-76
Relative to file, 5-76
Graphic drawing function, 3-17,
4-27 - 4-36
Graphic menu, 5-138 - 5-146
Graphics
Blocking text or shading, M-10
Cut, copy, paste, 5-29
De-selecting, 5-145
Drawing multiple, 4-32
Fill attributes, 4-30
How to use, 4-28
Keep tool enabled, 3-3
Index-6

REFERENCE GUIDE

INDEX

Hide side-bar, 5-163
Highlight text, 4-15
Highlighting
See Text attributes
Home key, 3-3
Horizontal scroll bar, 3-16
Horizontal tabs, 5-120 - 5-122
HP LaserJet, A-9, F-9 - F-14
Cabling, F-9
Configuration switches, F-11
Courier font; can't
print landscape, F-15
Disable font downloading, 5-162
Error 20, F-13
Font cartridge, A-9, F-11
Fonts, F-12
Images, number/page, F-15
New fonts for, K-6 - K-8
Out of memory, F-13
Paper size, F-11
Resolution, F-11
White text, F-15
HP LaserJet II, A-9
HP Thinkjet, F -17
HPGL, 5-16, G-3
Hyphenation
Dictionary, B-1
Example, successive control, L-21
Foreign languages, B-2
Overriding for specific words, 4-24
Turning on/off, 5-109
Hyphens
Discretionary, D-9, 4-24
Removing, D-9, 4-24

I
IBM 4216 laser printer, F-18 - F-23
IBM Proprinter, A-8
Images
Cropping, 3-3, 5-85
Defined, 1-5, 4-5, 1-4
Scaling, 5-85
Inch,3-9
Indent, 5-109
Defined,I-4
First line, 5-109
REFERENCE GUIDE

From both margins, 5-116
Hanging, M-14
Indents/Outdents, M-14 - M-15
Index
Copying/moving, 5-28
Creating, 5-32 - 5-35
Creating within
wordprocessor, D-10
Deleting, 5-34
Example, text contains
indices, L-39
Generating, 5-176
Repeat automatically throughout
section, 5-66
Tags, 6-16
Insert
See Text editing
Insert footnote, 5-31
Insert key, 3-3
Insert/edit anchor, 5-36 - 5-37
Insert/edit index, 5-32 - 5-35
Insert/remove page, 5-73 - 5-74
Installation, 2-1 - 2-8
Begin, 2-4
Hard disk space required, 2-3
Software, 2-2 - 2-6
Updating from version 1.0, A-2
Inter-line spacing
Defined, 1-4
Setting, 5-112
Inter-paragraph spacing, 5-113
Example, L-29
Interpress, F-18 - F-23
Defined,I-5
Fonts, F-18
Print files, 5-156
Italics
See Text attributes
Item selector
Beep, 3-12
Filter, 1-3
Operation, 3-10 -3-13
Too many files, 3-12

Index-7

J

INDEX

J
JLaser, F-15 - F-16
Fonts, F-16
New fonts for, K-12 - K-13
Paper size, F-15
Print to file, F-16
Printing problems, F-17
Resolution, F-16
Justification
Defined,I-5
Justify
See Alignment

K
Kerning, 4-19
Automatic, 5-125
Defined, 1-5
Example, L-11
Manual, D-8
Modifying automatic, K-22
On-screen, 5-150
Keyboard
Characters not on, D-3, 4-25
Keys, 3-1 - 3-6
Shortcuts, 3-4

L
Labels
See Callouts, 4-32
Landscape, 5-46
Defined, 1-5
Large documents
Creating, 5-172
Laser printer
See name of printer
LaserJet
See HP LaserJet
LaserWriter, A-9, F-18 - F-23
Baud rate, F-19
Cabling, F-19
Connection to PC, F-19

Index-8

Error message, F-19
New fonts for, K-15
Layout
Defined,I-5
Lead-ins, 5-118, M-18
Creating, M-19
Example, L-27
Leaders, M-29
Defined,I-5
Deleting, M-17
See also Tabs
Turning off in specific tabs, M-30
Leading
Defined,I-5
See also Inter-line spacing
See also Spacing
Left justify text
See Alignment, 5-108
Letterspacing, 5-125, 5-170
Example, L-19
Line art
Cropping, 5-85
Defined, 1-4,4-5,1-5
Scaling, 5-85
Line attributes, 4-30, 5-141 - 5-142
Line break, 3-4, D-9, 5-117 - 5-119
Defined, 4-23, 1-6
Example, L-9
Use in a database, H-3
Line length, 1-6
Line snap, 5-169
Linotronic
100,300, F-18 - F-23
Cabling, F-19
Lists
See Section numbering,
Auto-numbering
Load different style, 5-17
Load from, 5-144
Load text/picture, 3-10, 5-13 - 5-16
Changes to text, 5-14
Several files, 5-14
Loading a style sheet, 6-12
Logoff
See Quit, 5-24
Loose lines, 5-170
Lotus 1-2-3, D-1
Creating pictures, G-3
Printing spreadsheet text, D-12
REFERENCE GUIDE

M

M
Macintosh
Paint, G-4
PICT, G-4
Mainframe
Text files from, D-12
Maintain aspect ratio, 5-85
Make directory, 5-22 - 5-23
Margins
Binding, 5-80
Left/right page, 5-80
Temporary text margins, 5-116
Margins & Columns, 5-78 - 5-81
Measurement units
Changing, 3-9
Rulers, 5-152
Mechanical,I-6
Memory
Out of memory, C-9, C-13,
C-21, C-26, H-3, H-5
Printer out of memory, A-9, 5-162,
F-7, F-13
Menu
Can't select, 5-1
Clear, 3-14
Gray text, 5-1
Pulling down, 3-14
Menu commands, 5-1 - 5-43
Microsoft Word, D-14
Style Sheets, D-14
Minimum space width, 5-126
Mixing type styles, M-18 - M-20
Monospaced,I-6
Mouse,A-7
Cursor, 1-5, 3-1
Double click, 3-11, 5-150
Installation, A-7
Middle and right buttons, 3-1
Operation, 3-1
Problems with, A-7
MOUSE.COM, A-7, A-13, 2-6
Move, 5-26 - 5-30
Frame, 5-29
Graphic, 5-30
Text, 5-27
Multi-chapter, 5-171 - 5-182
Multimate, D-15
REFERENCE GUIDE

INDEX

Multiple article chapters, 6-1
Multiple copy printing, 5-19
Multiple file loading, 5-14
Multiple frames, 4-4, 4-9, 6-7
Multiple graphics, 4-32
Multiple paragraph tagging, 4-12,
4-22

N
Network operation, C-2
New, 5-7
New page, 6-4
Newspaper layout, 6-1 - 6-2
Example, L-21
Re-using, 6-5
Non-breaking space, 3-6, D-9, 4-23
Normal space width, 5-127
Numbering
Automatic section
numbering, 5-54 - 5-60
Chapter, 5-50 - 5-51
Lists, 5-59
Page, 5-52 - 5-53

o
Opaque, 5-144
Open chapter, 5-8 - 5-9
Options menu, 5-147 - 5-170
Orphan
Defined, 5-48, 1-6
Outdent, 5-109
Defined,I-6
Outdents
See also Indents/Outdents
Outlines, 5-54 - 5-60
Output
See Printing
OUTPUT.wID, 5-158
Overscore
Change defaults, 5-125

Index-9

p

INDEX

p
Packing list, 1-2
Padding, 5-87
Example, L-29
Page
Create new, 6-4
Creating new automatically, 6-4
Go to, 5-75 - 5-76
InsertlRemove, 5-73 - 5-74
Page break, 5-117 - 5-119,6-11
Example, L-5,L-7, L-9, L-11
Page counter, 5-52 - 5-53
Page down, 3-3
Page layout, 5-45 - 5-47
Page menu, 5-44 - 5-76
Page number indicator, 3-17, 5-53
Page numbers
See Headers & Footers
See Numbering
See Page counter
Page up, 3-3
Paper size, 5-46
Paragraph
Adding and deleting, 4-22
Defined,I-6
Line break, 4-23
Numbering automatically
5-54 - 5-60
Spacing, 5-113
Paragraph menu, 5-104 - 5-137
Paragraph tagging, 3-17, 4-12 - 4-14
Paste, 5-26 - 5-30
Defined,I-6
PC Paint
Can't load files, C-5
PC Paintbrush
Color, G-4
Creating, G-4
No color, C-4, G-4
Text to PCX conversion, G-5
Phone directory, H-1
Picas, 3-9
Defined, 3-9, 1-6
Setting measurement in 3-9
Picture anchor, D-10
'
Pictures, 4-7, 5-13 - 5-16
Defined, 4-5, 1-6
Index-10

Exceed frame boundaries, 5-16
Obscurestext, F-23
Text wrong size, C-3
Too big for frame C-3
Points, 3-9
'
Defined, 3-9, 1-7
Port
Defined,I-7
Portrait, 5-46
Defined,I-7
PostScript, F-18 - F-23
Bug, F-23
Defined,I-7
Encapsulated, G-2
Files, 5-16
Files don't display, 5-16
Fonts, F-18 - F-19
LaserWriter, B-3
Prologue, F-22
Resolution, F-18
Print file
AST TurboLaser, F-25
Cordata printer, F -25
JLaser, F-16
LaserWriter, F-19
Printer
Capabilities, 5-144
Determining limitations of F-1
Installing multiple, A-10 '
Printer info, 5-154 - 5-159
Printer troubleshooting, C-5 F-1
F-17, F-25
'
,
Printing
Blank near edge of page, F-3
Changing ports, 5-155
Changing printers, 5-155
Chapter, 5-19 - 5-21
Disable font downloading 5-162
Disk files, 5-156
'
Double sided, 5-46
Duplex, 5-20
Fonts won't print, 5-107
Large format, 5-21
Matching width tables 5-157
Multi-Chapter, 5-174 '
Multiple copies, 5-19
Options, 5-154 - 5-159
Portrait or landscape, 5-46
Printer won't print, C-1
REFERENCE GUIDE

p

Publication, 5-174
Selected pages, 5-20
Space between word
incorrect, 5-158
Stopping, 5-21
To a file, C-1, 5-20, 5-155,
F-16, F-25
To file, multi-chapter, 5-174
Problem
- character in dialog box, 3-9
Assignment list, can't select, 3-18
Assignment list, unwanted tag
names, 6-16
Beep, 3-6
Blank columns, 5-109
Blank near edge of page, F-3, F-ll
Box text blank, 4-33
Bullet overlaps text, 5-124
Caption doesn't appear, 5-94
Chapter different than saved, 5-18,
5-134 - 5-135, 6-13
Chapter, can't find, C-3
Character doesn't print, 4-25
Columns don't balance, 5-84
Cursor keys, 3-7
Dialog box disappears, 3-8
Dialog box numbers change, 3-9
Disk drive change wrecks display,
3-12
Disk drives, changing, 3-12
Disks not used during installation,
2-5
Enter doesn't end dialog, 5-180
Facing page format
inoperative, 5-47
Facing pages view
not available, C-3
File, can't find, 3-13
Font selection gray, 5-107
Font, won't change, 5-107
Fonts (screen & printer)
don't match, 5-159
Fonts won't print, 5-107
Footer spacing too large, 5-68
Footnote space above, 5-72
Footnotes don't appear, 5-31, 5-71
Frame moves instead of
changing size, 4-8

REFERENCE GUIDE

INDEX

Frame rules overlap
picture or text, 5-101
Frame wide text, 5-85
Frame, can't select, 4-29
Graphic repeats on every page, 4-28
Graphic, can't, M-10
Graphic, can't select, 4-29
Header not displayed, 5-69
Header spacing too large, 5-68
Header/footer doesn't display, 5-65
Menu option gray, 5-1
Menu options gray, 5-104
Multiple paragraph
selection lost, 4-13
Numbers in dialog box
change, 5-131
Open chapter is slow, 5-8
Page doesn't print
completely, F-7, F-13
Paragraph overwrites
other text, 5-109
Paragraph selection lost, 4-13
Picture not in frame, C-3
Picture obscures text, F -23
PostScript bug, F-23
Print doesn't match screen, 3-18
Print, page edges blank, 3-19
Print, page numbers wrong, 5-20
Print, some characters
don't print, 3-19
Print, wrong page numbers, 5-53
Printer won't print, C-5
Printing, wrong space between
words, 5-158
Ruling box doesn't print, 6-7, F-23
Ruling box stops at column/page,
5-130
Ruling line dashes don't
print, 5-101, 5-130
Spacing changed, 5-107
Spreadsheet columns don't align,
D-13
Style sheet changed, 5-18
System stops while loading
text, 3-14
Tab doesn't take effect, 5-121
Tab, first line indent, 5-122
Tabbed text beyond margin, 5-122
Tabs don't work, 5-122
Index-11

Q

INDEX

Text attributes change, 4-21
Text beyond right margin, 6-17
Text disappears, 4-20
Text doesn't appear in frame, C-2
Text doesn't match
Appendix L styles, 6-14
Text flow around
irregular shape, C-5
Text format changed in
wordprocessor, D-2
Text formatting speed, 5-84
Text from later to earlier page, 6-5
Text in first column only, 5-85
Text in wrong'frame, 6-4
Text into right margin, 5-110
Text moves to next
column/page, 6-8
Text on top oftext, 5-59
Text, can't place where 1 want, C-4
Text, can't read, 5-149
Vertical rule doesn't show, 5-99
Problems
Error messages, C-6
Prologue
PostScript, F-22
Publication
Creating, 5-172
Defined,I-7

Q
QMS
PS 800, 1200, 2400, F-18 - F-23
Quit, 5-24
Quotes
True typographic, 3-6, 4-25, 6-11

R

Reformat page, 3-3
Register marks, 5-21,1-2
Remove
Directory, 5-23
File, 5-38 - 5-39
Page, 5-73 - 5-74
Tag, 5-133 - 5-134
Rename tag, 5-135
Renumber chapter, 5-61
Repeating frames, 5-88 - 5-91
Text in, 4-6
Requirements
System, 2-1
Reset section number, 5-59
Return
See Enter
Reverse type, 5-131, M-21 - M-22
Right justifY text
See Alignment, 5-108
Roundoff error, 3-9
Rulers
Measurement units, 5-152
Show/hide, 5-164
Ruling box around
Example, L-7, L-31, L-39
Ruling lines
Custom width, 5-130
Dashes, 5-101, 5-130
Defined,I-7
Example, ruling line
over text, L-13
Frames, 5-100 - 5-101
Paragraph, 5-129 - 5-132
Vertical, 5-98 - 5-99
Run arounds, C-5, 4-9, 5-87
Defined,I-7
Running head
See Headers & Footers
Running the program, 2-7

s

Re-anchor frames, 5-62 - 5-63
Rearrange
Save, 5-10
Chapters within publication, 5-173
Files, 3-10 - 3-13
Redraw screen, 4-20
Publication, 5-173
Reducing a picture
Save as, 5-11
See Sizing & scaling
Save as new style, 5-18
Index-12

REFERENCE GUIDE

s
Scale
Defined, 1-7
Scaling, 5-85
Scanner, 5-16
Compatibility, C-4
Defined, 1-7
Printing images from, 5-86
Screen controls, 3-14 - 3-16
Screen fonts, K-4
PostScript, K-5
Screen snapshot, G-5
Screened type
See also Shaded type
Scroll down one line, 3-16
Scroll left one character, 3-16
Scroll right one character, 3-16
Scroll up one line, 3-15
Scrolling
Difference from go to page, 5-76
Search and replace, D-l
Secondary leading
See Inter-paragraph
spacing, 5-113
Section numbering, 5-54 - 5-60
See also Auto-numbering
Example, L-39
In frames, 5-57
Tags, 5-57
Select
Defined, 1-5, 1-8
Menu option, 3-15
Text, 4-15
Select all, 4-29, 5-145
Send to back, 5-139
Set font
U sing to change text
attributes, M-19
Set preferences, 5-148 - 5-151
Set rulers, 5-152 - 5-153
Shaded type, M-21 - M-22
Shading
See Frames, background, 5-102
Shift
Font, D-7
Shift keys, 3-3
Shortcut, 3-4
Mouse, 3-11
ShowlHide column guides, 5-165
Showlhide loose lines, 5-170
REFERENCE GUIDE

INDEX

ShowlHide pictures, 5-166
ShowlHide rulers, 5-164
ShowlHide side-bar, 5-163
ShowlHide tabs & returns, 5-167
Side-Bar, 3-17, 5-163
Sidekick, A-I, G-5
Note files, D-13
Size box, 3-16
Sizing & scaling, 4-7, 5-82 - 5-87, 6-7
Small case, 4-17
Soft hyphen
See Discretionary hyphen
See Hyphenation
Space, 4-23
Em, 3-6, D-I0, 1-3
En, 3-6, D-I0, 1-3
Figure, 3-6, D-I0, 1-3
Non-breaking, 3-6, D-9, 4-23
Thin, 3-6, D-I0, 1-8
Space character
See Character space
Spaceband,5-126
Spacing, 5-111 - 5-116
Adding additional between
paragraphs, 4-11
After period, colon, 5-15
Between lines, 5-112
Between paragraphs, 5-15, 5-113
Between words, 5-126
Inter-paragraph,5-113
Total paragraph space, 5-115
Vertical,5-111
Special characters
See Altkey
See Fonts
See Foreign characters
Special effects, 5-123 - 5-124
Special function keys, 3-4
Speed
Improving screen drawing speed,
5-166
Printing, 5-20
Slow loading due to
excess files, 5-39
Spelling check, D-l
Spreadsheets
Publishing, D-12
Square Bullet, M-5
Starting the program, 2-7
Index-13

T

INDEX

Store
See Save
Stretch to fit, 5-85
Strikethrough
Change defaults, 5-125
Style sheet
Attributes stored in, 5-44
Changed unexpectedly, 5-18
Creating, 6-12 - 6-13
Defined, 6-12, 1-8
Designing, 6-13
Examples, Appendix L, L-1
Loading, 5-17, 6-12
Margins & Columns
stored in, 5-77
Menu options affecting, 6-15
Modifying, 4-14, 6-12
Saving, 5-18, 6-13
Unwanted changes in, 5-10
Width table stored with, 5-158
Subdirectory
Selection, 3-12
Suppress previous level, 5-56
Symbols, 4-25, E-1
System requirements, 2-1

T
T-Square, 5-153
Tab in
See Indent
Tab key, 3-4
Tabbed out
See Outdent
See Outdent, 5-109
Table counter, 5-29
Table counter/figure, 5-96 - 5-97
Table of contents
Example, tags for, L-37
Generating, 5-174
Tags, 6-16
Tables, M-23 - M-27
Aligning numbers
(figure space), 1-3
Creating, 4-33,6-10
Example, L-33, L-35

Index-14

Using box text to create
tables, M-27
Using tabs for
simple tables, M-28 - M-32
Tabs, 5-120 - 5-122
Adding leaders to tabs, M-29
Changing decimal, 5-149 - 5-150
Example, L-11, L-13,
L-15, L-21, L-23, L-33
Example, vertical, L-35
From wordprocessor, D-4
Setting, M-28, M-30
Showlhide, 5-167
Text right margin, 5-122
Used to create tables, 6-10
Versus spaces, D-5
Vertical, 6-17
Wordstar, D-16
Tag multiple paragraphs, 4-12, 4-22
Tags
Adding new, 4-14
Assigning to text, 4-12 - 4-14
Auto-numbering, 5-57
Captions, 5-94
Choosing names, 6-15
Defined, 5-104, 1-8
Extracting tagged text, 5-66
Font, 5-106
Frame-wide, 5-109
Function keys, 3-4
Generated, 4-13, 6-16
Headers & Footers, 5-68
Hidden, 5-148
In a wordprocessor, D-2
Modifying, 4-14
Removing, 5-133 - 5-134
Renaming, 5-135
Showlhide generated, 5-149
Spacing automatically
changed, 5-107
Unexpected new names, 6-16
Z-tags, 6-16
Tall orientation
See Portrait
Text
Adding and deleting, 4-19
Alignment, 5-108 - 5-11 0
Automatic text insertion, 5-60
Beyond right margin, 5-122
REFERENCE GUIDE

INDEX

U

Changes during loading, 5-14
Defined, 1-4
Hidden, D-I0
Keep away from frames, 5-87
Reverse, 5-131
See also ASCII text, D-12
White on black, 5-102, 5-131
Text attributes
Canceling, D-8
Changing, 4-15
Cut/copy, 5-28
Deleting, 4-20
End of paragraph, D-8
Example, L-13
Example, in footer, L-15
Precedence over tags, 4-17
Using Set Font to change, M-19
U sing the Assignment List
to change, M-20
Wordprocessor, D-5
Text cursor
Defined, 1-5
Text editing, 4-20
Across page boundaries, 5-76
Adding non-keyboard
characters, 3-3
Adding/deleting text, 4-19
Alt key, 3-3
Backspace key, 3-3
Blank frame/page, 4-21
Changing typeface, 4-18
Copy text between chapters, 5-28
Ctrl key, 3-4
Cursor keys, 3-3
Cut, copy, paste, 5-27
Delete key, 3-3
End key, 3-3
Enter key, 1-4
Escape (ESC) key, 3-3
Hidden characters, 5-167
Home key, 3-3
Insert key, 3-3
Kerning, 4-19
Line break, 3-4, 4-23
Move, 5-27
Non-breaking space, 4-23
Non-keyboard symbols, 4-25
Page down key, 3-3
Page up key, 3-3
REFERENCE GUIDE

Paragraphs, adding/deleting, 4-22
Section numbers, 5-56
Select text, 4-15
Set Font, 4-17
Shift keys, 3-3
ShowlHide tabs & returns, 5-167
Special function keys, 3-4
Tab key, 3-4
Text editing function, 3-17, 4-15 - 4-26
Text flow around, 5-82
Thin space, 3-6, D-I0, 1-8
Tilde character (-), 3-9
Title bar, 3-15, 5-10
To print, 5-19 - 5-21
Tracking
Example, L-11
Trademark symbols, 4-25
Trailer
See Headers & footers
Transparent, 5-144
Trim marks
See Register marks
Trim pictures
See Scaling, 5-85
Turn column snap on/off, 5-168
Turn footers off/on, 5-69
Tum headers off/on, 5-69
Tum line snap on/off, 5-169
Typeface
Changing, 5-159
Creating new, 5-159
Defined,I-8
See Fonts
Typeset
Defined,I-8
Typographic controls, 5-125 - 5-128
Automatic, 6-11
Typographic conventions, 1-4 -1-6

u
Underline
Change defaults, 5-125
Example, customized, L-11
Underlying Page
Defined, 1-8

Index-15

v

INDEX

Undo
See Abandon, 5-12
UNTITLED.CHP, 5-10
Update from version 1.0, A-2
User interface, 3-1 - 3-20

v
Version information, 5-5
Vertical justification, 5-84
Vertical rules, 5-98 - 5-99
Example, L-19, L-23
Vertical scroll bar, 3-16
Vertical tabs, 6-17, M-23 - M-27
Creating tags for, M-24
Example, L-35
Typing text for, M-24
VFM file, K-18 - K-21
VGR files, 5-10 - 5-11
Video Show, 5-16, G-4
View menu, 5-42 - 5-43
VP.INF file, 5-24

w
White letters on a black background
See Reverse type
Wide orientation
See Landscape
Widow
Defined, 5-48, 1-8
Widows & Orphans, 5-48 - 5-49
Width table
Not in standard format, C-17
Won't load, C-18
Width tables, A-10, 3-13
Adding kerning to, 5-126
Changing, 5-157
Creating new, 5-161, K-5
Defined,I-8
Load new width table, 5-161
OUTPUT.WID, 5-158
Stored with style sheet, 5-18
Use, 5-17, 5-154
Used to add fonts, 5-159
Index-16

Wildcard,I-3
Windows Write, D-14
Wordprocessor, D-1, 4-19
Attributes, E-1
Converting between different, 5-40
Developing index in, D-ll
Information deleted, D-1
Text attributes, D-5
Writing custom converter, D-1
Wordstar, D-16
Tabs, D-5, D-16
Wrapping text around picture
See Run arounds
WYSIWYG
Defined, 3-18 - 3-20, 1-8

x
Xerox 4020, F-8
Fonts, F-9
Resolution, F-8
Switch settings, F-8
Xerox 4045, F-3 - F-7
Configuration switches, F-3
DRAM option, F-3
Fonts, F-6
New fonts for, K-9 - K-ll
Out of memory, F-7
Paper size, F-3
Resolution, F-6
300 DPI driver, A-8, F-4 - F-6
Xerox writer, D-17
Xywrite, D-17

z
Z-tags, 6-16
See also Tags,generated
Zoom in, 5-43

REFERENCE GUIDE
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.3 Linearized : No XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 4.2.1-c043 52.372728, 2009/01/18-15:56:37 Create Date : 2012:04:20 09:49:03-08:00 Modify Date : 2012:04:20 11:01:51-07:00 Metadata Date : 2012:04:20 11:01:51-07:00 Producer : Adobe Acrobat 9.5 Paper Capture Plug-in Format : application/pdf Document ID : uuid:548c2db0-0a9b-45b0-ba2e-5b38bbdc6592 Instance ID : uuid:011fa37d-28a9-4da4-b406-4795d97b665f Page Layout : SinglePage Page Mode : UseNone Page Count : 520
EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools
610E03760_Ventura_Publisher_1.1_Reference_1987 610E03760 Ventura Publisher 1.1 Reference 1987

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation
